Menus
=====

   File Menu
   Edit Menu
   Element Menu
   Settings Menu
   View Menu
   Palettes Menu
   Snaps Menu
   User Menu


File Menu
---------

The File menu has items for creating, opening, and closing design files, 
importing and exporting files, plotting, and ending a MicroStation session.

To:                      Choose from the File 
                         menu:

Create and open a design New...
as the active design file.

Open an existing design fOpen...
the active design file. orOpen 
a DWG, DXF, IGES, or CGM file 
as the active design file.

Create a cell library andCell Library > New...
attach it to the active design 
file.

Attach an existing cell lCell Library > Attach...
to the active design file.

Compress the attached celCell Library > Compress
library.

Adjust reference file setReference
and select reference file 
tools.

Close the active design fClose
and open the MicroStation 
Manager dialog box.

Save the design file undeSave As...
different name, in a different 
directory, or on a different 
disk.or Save the design as a 
DWG, DXF, IGES, or CGM file.

Compress the active desigCompress Design
file.

Save settings in the actiSave Settings
design file.

Print the contents of a vPrint

Set up a drawing sheet.  Drawing Composition

Create a plotfile.       Plot...

Generate a tag report temTag Reporting > Generate Templates
file.

Generate a report on tagsTag Reporting > Generate Reports...
attached to elements and on 
graphical element attributes.

Place the contents of a DImport > DWG or DXF
file in the design.

Place the contents of an Import > IGES...
file in the design.

Place the contents of a CImport > CGM...
file in the design.

Place the contents of a  Import > Image...
bitmapped file in the design.

Place the contents of a tImport > Text...
file in the design.

Save the design in DWG orExport > DWG or DXF...
format.

Save the design or fence Export > IGES...
contents in IGES format.

Save the active design fiExport > 2D...
3D) or the attached 3D cell 
library (if any) as a 2D file.

Save the active design fiExport > 3D...
2D) or the attached cell 
library (if any) as a 3D file.

Save the contents of a viExport > RIB
a RenderMan Interface 
Bytestream (RIB) file for 
rendering with a 
RenderMan-compatible package.

Save a view's visible edgExport > Visible Edges
a design file.

Display the contents of aDisplay > Image...
bitmapped file in a window.

Play back an animated seqDisplay > Movie...

Display a text file in a Display > Text...
that has controls for 
scrolling.

Save the contents of a shSave Image As...
view in a bitmapped file.

Reopen an existing, recen#<filename>
opened design file as the 
active design file without 
using a dialog box or a key-in.

Exit MicroStation.       Exit





   New...
   Open...
   Cell Library > New...
   Cell Library > Attach...
   Cell Library > Compress
   Cell Library > <library_name>
   Reference
   Close
   MicroStation Manager dialog box
   Save As...
   Compress Design
   Save Settings
   Print
   Drawing Composition
   Plot...
   Tag Reporting > Generate Templates
   Tag Reporting > Generate Reports...
   Import > DWG or DXF
   Import Drawing File dialog box
   Import > IGES...
   Import IGES File dialog box
   Import > CGM...
   Import CGM File dialog box
   Import > Image...
   Import > Text...
   Export > DWG or DXF...
   Export Drawing File dialog box 
   Export > IGES...
   Export IGES File dialog box
   Export > CGM...
   Export CGM File dialog box
   Export > 2D...
   Export > 3D...
   Export > RIB
   Export > Visible Edges
   Display > Image...
   Display > Movie...
   Display > Text...
   Save Image As...
   #<filename>
   Exit


New...
------

Opens the Create Design File dialog box, which is used to create and open a 
design file as the active design file.

Key-in: DIALOG NEW

   Name
   Directory
   Filter
   Files
   Directories
   Seed File
   Seed...
   OK
   Cancel


Name
----

Sets the name of the new design file.

Different systems allow different numbers of characters in filenames. Some 
systems are case-sensitive (they differentiate between upper and lower 
case), others are not. If portability between different systems is a 
concern, filenames with a maximum of eight characters all in the same case 
are recommended.

Hint:
To bypass the Directories list box, you can key in a complete path 
specification for a file in the Name field.



Directory
---------

Indentifies the directory in which the new design file is created -- the 
default is the directory pointed to by the MS_DEF configuration variable. 
The Directories list box is used to select a different directory.



Filter
------

Sets the file filter, which determines the files that are listed in the 
Files list box. The default "*.dgn," is the normal extension used for a 
design file.



Files
-----

Lists the names of the existing files in the selected Directory that are 
allowed by the Filter.



Directories
-----------

Lists directories for selection. The Directory field identifies the 
selected directory.



Seed File
---------

Identifies the seed design file, which is copied to create the new design 
file. 



Seed...
-------

Opens the Select Seed File dialog box, which is used to select a different 
seed file. The files listed for selection in the Select Seed File dialog 
box are in the directory pointed to by the MS_SEEDFILES configuration 
variable. (For information about changing the default seed file, which is 
pointed to by the MS_DESIGNSEED configuration variable, see *Xref.)



OK
--

Creates and opens the new design file.

If the filename in the Name field is the same as the name of an existing 
file, an alert box asks if you want to overwite the existing file.

If a design file is already active, it is closed before the new design file 
is opened.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without creating a design file.



Open...
-------

Opens the Open Design File dialog box, which is used to open an existing 
design file or a file of a different Type as the active design file.

Key-in: NEWFILE<design_file> RD=<design_file>

Hint:
Using the NEWFILE (RD=) key-in can be faster than using the Open Design 
File dialog box.

Note:
You can open a design file with the view configuration of the active design 
file by keying in EXCHANGEFILE <filename>. This is a convenient way to make 
a reference file the active design file for modification. The alternate 
key-in is XD=. 

   Name
   Directory
   Filter
   Type
   Files
   Directories
   OK
   Cancel
   File menu/#<filename>
   File menu/Exit
   Directory menu/Current Work Directory
   Directory menu/#<path>


Name
----

Shows the name of the file that is selected in the Files list box; or you 
can key in a filename.

Hint:
To bypass the Directories list box, you can key in a complete path 
specification for a file in the Name field.



Directory
---------

Identifies the directory whose files are listed in the Files list box. The 
Directories list box is used to select a different directory.



Filter
------

Sets the file filter, which determines the files that are listed in the 
Files list box. The default "*.dgn," is the normal extension used for a 
design file.



Type
----

Sets the type of file to open.

Type:   Filter: Description:

Ustn    "*.dgn" MicroStation design file

DWG     "*.dwg" AutoCAD binary drawing file[a]

DXF     "*.dxf" DXF filea

IGES    "*.igs" Initial Graphics Exchange 
                Specification filea

CGM     ".cgm"  Computer graphics metafilea

[a]For information about DWG, DXF, IGES, and CGM files, see *Xref in the 
UG.
   
   

Files
-----

Lists the names of the selected Directory files that are allowed by the 
Filter. Double-clicking a filename opens the file.
   
   

Directories
-----------

Lists directories for selection. The Directory field identifies the 
selected directory.
   
   

OK
--

Opens the selected file. If a design file is already active, it is closed 
before the selected file is opened.
   
   

Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without opening a design file.
   
   

File menu/#
-----------

<filename>:Opens the specified design file. There are menu items for each 
of as many as the last four opened design files.
   
   

File menu/Exit
--------------

Closes the dialog box without opening a design file (the effect is the same 
as clicking the Cancel button).
   
   

Directory menu/Current Work Directory
-------------------------------------

Changes the directory whose files are listed in the Files list box to the 
current directory.
   
   

Directory menu/#
----------------

<path>:Changes the directory whose files are listed in the Files list box 
to the specified path. There are menu items of this type for each of as 
many as the last four directories in which design files were opened.
   
   

Cell Library > New...
---------------------

Opens the Create Cell Library dialog box, which is used to create a cell 
library and attach it to the active design file.
   
   Key-in: CREATE LIBRARY
   
   Note:
   The Create Cell Library dialog box can also be opened by choosing File 
menu/New... in the Cell Library settings box, which is opened by choosing 
Cells from the Settings menu.
   
   Name
   Directory
   Filter
   Files
   Directories
   Seed File
   Seed
   OK
   Cancel


Name
----

Sets the name of the new cell library. 

You must follow the file naming conventions for your system. For 
information about making filenames portable between  different systems, see 
Name.

Hint:
To bypass the Directories list box, you can key in a complete path 
specification for a file in the Name field.



Directory
---------

Identifies the directory in which the new cell library is created -- by 
default the directory pointed to by the MS_CELL configuration variable. You 
can select a different directory in the Directories list box.



Filter
------

Sets the file filter, which determines the files that are listed in the 
Files list box. The default "*.cel," is the normal extension used for a 
cell library.



Files
-----

Lists the names of existing files in the selected Directory that are 
allowed by the Filter.



Directories
-----------

List directories for selection. The Directory field identifies the selected 
directory.



Seed File
---------

Identifies the seed cell library, which is copied to create the new cell 
library.

The default seed cell library is pointd to by the MS_CELLSEED configuration 
variable. To define a different default seed cell library, redefine the 
MS_CELLSEED configuration variable. See *XRef.



Seed
----

Opens the Select Seed File dialog box, which is used to select a different 
seed cell library.



OK
--

Creates and attaches a new cell library. 
If the cell library name is the same as the name of an existing file, an 
alert box asks if you want the existing file overwritten.

If another cell library is already attached, it is detached before the new 
cell library is attached.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without creating a cell library.



Cell Library > Attach...
------------------------

Opens the Attach Cell Library dialog box, which is used to attach an 
existing cell library to the active design file.

Key-in: ATTACH LIBRARY <cell_library> RC=<cell_library>

Hint:
Using the ATTACH LIBRARY (RC=) key-in can be faster than  using the Attach 
Cell Library dialog box.

Hint:
To detach a cell library without attaching another, key in RC=<space>.

Note:
The Attach Cell Library dialog box can also be opened by choosing File 
menu/Attach... in the Cell Library settings box, which is opened by 
choosing Cells from the Settings menu.

   Name
   Directory
   Filter
   Files
   Directories
   OK
   Cancel


Name
----

Shows the name of the file that is selected in the Files list box; or you 
can key in a filename.

Hint:
To bypass the Directories list box, you can key in a complete path 
specification for a file in the Name field .



Directory
---------

Identifies the directory whose files are listed in the Files list box, 
which is the directory pointed to by the MS_CELL configuration variable. 
The Directories list box is used to select a different directory.



Filter
------

Sete the file filter, which determines the files that are listed in the 
Files list box. The default "*.cel," is the normal extension used for a 
cell library.



Files
-----

Lists the names of the files in the current directory that are allowed by 
the Filter. Double clicking a cell library name attache the cell library.



Directories
-----------

Lists directories foe selection. The Directory field identifies the 
selected directory. 



OK
--

Attaches the selected cell library. 

When a cell library is attached, if it cannot be opened with write access, 
it is attached with read-only access; no new cells can be added and this is 
noted in a message in the Command Window.

If a cell library is already attached, it is detached before the selected 
cell library is attached.

When a cell library is attached, only the filename and a custom 
configuration variable (if one is used to indirectly specify the directory) 
are stored in the attachment information. When the design file to which the 
cell library is attached is reopened, the following are searched to locate 
the cell library:
1. The attachment information.
2. The directory pointed to by the MS_CELL configuration variable.
3. The active design file's directory.
   
The design file and cell library can be transferred to another system on 
which MicroStation runs, even on a different hardware platform, or accessed 
over a network. MicroStation will locate the cell library whenever the 
design file is opened as long as MS_CELL or a custom configuration variable 
is defined and the cell library is in a directory pointed to by the 
configuration variable.

If you define a custom configuration variable, do not use the Attach Cell 
Library dialog box to attach the cell library. Instead, key in ATTACH 
LIBRARY <cell_library> (or the alternate RC=) with the cell library 
specification in the form <configuration_variable>:<filename>. For 
information about defining configuration variables, see *Xref.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without attaching a cell library.



Cell Library > Compress
-----------------------

Compresses the attached cell library. The compression process permanently 
removes deleted cells from the library.

Key-in: COMPRESS LIBRARY

Note:
You can also compress a cell library by choosing File menu/Compress in the 
Cell Library settings box, which is opened by choosing Cells from the 
Settings menu.



Cell Library > <library_name>
-----------------------------

A cell library that is in the cell library list can be attached by choosing 
its name from the Cell Library sub-menu.

More and cross-references TBD.

Note:
You can also attach a cell library that is in the cell library list by 
choosing File menu/<library_name> in the Cell Library settings box, which 
is opened by choosing Cells from the Settings menu.



Reference
---------

Opens the Reference Files settings box, which is used to adjust reference 
file settings and select reference file tools.

Key-in: DIALOG REFERENCE

   <Number of> Reference Files
   Scale
   Display
   Snap
   Locate
   Full Path 
   Description
   Tools menu/Attach...
   Tools menu/Detach
   Tools menu/Reload
   Tools menu/Move
   Tools menu/Scale...
   Tools menu/Rotate...
   Tools menu/Mirror Horizontal
   Tools menu/Mirror Vertical
   Tools menu/Clip Boundary
   Tools menu/Clip Mask
   Tools menu/Clip Front
   Tools menu/Clip Back
   Settings menu/Attachment...
   Settings menu/Levels
   Settings menu/Level Symbology...


<Number of> Reference Files
---------------------------

Lists the names and logical names of reference files attached to the active 
design file. To change a setting or select a tool for a reference file in 
the list, you must first select it.

<Number of> is the number of reference files attached to the active design 
file.



Scale
-----

Shows the 



Display
-------

Shows the



Snap
----

Shows the



Locate
------

Shows the



Full Path 
----------

When a reference file is attached, MicroStation stores only the filename 
and a custom configuration variable, if one is used to indirectly specify 
the directory, in the attachment information. The full path to the 
directory is not retained. When the design file to which the reference file 
is attached is reopened, MicroStation first uses the attachment information 
to locate the reference file. If the file is not found, MicroStation looks 
in the directory where the active design file is located. If the file is 
not there, MicroStation searches the directories pointed to by the MS_RFDIR 
configuration variable.

The full file specification, includ ing the directory, where MicroStation 
found the reference file is displayed in the Full Path field. If 
MicroStation cannot locate the file, the message "Reference File not found" 
is displayed in the field.

Because only filenames and configuration variables are stored in the 
attachment information, reference files can be moved to a different 
directory on the same computer or accessed over a network from a different 
computer with a different directory structure.

For more details about attaching reference files, see Attach Reference 
File. For information about defining configuration variables, see *Xref.



Description
-----------

Shows the optional description for the selected reference file.



Tools menu/Attach...
--------------------

Used to attach a reference file -- the same as selecting the Attach 
Reference File tool.



Tools menu/Detach
-----------------

Used to detach a reference file -- the same as selecting the Detach 
Reference File tool.



Tools menu/Reload
-----------------

Used to reload a reference file -- the same as selecting the Reload 
Reference File tool.



Tools menu/Move
---------------

Used to move a reference file -- the same as selecting the Move Reference 
File tool.



Tools menu/Scale...
-------------------

Used to scale a reference file -- the same as selecting the Scale Reference 
File tool.

When Scale is chosen, the Scale Reference File dialog box opens, which is 
used to set the scale factor.



Tools menu/Rotate...
--------------------

Used to rotate a reference file -- the same as selecting the Rotate 
Reference File tool.

When Rotate is chosen, the Rotate Reference File dialog box opens, which is 
used to set the rotation angle(s).



Tools menu/Mirror Horizontal
----------------------------

Used to mirror a reference file about a horizontal axis -- the same as 
selecting the Mirror Reference File About Horizontal tool.



Tools menu/Mirror Vertical
--------------------------

Used to mirror a reference file about a vertical axis -- the same as 
selecting the Mirror Reference File About Vertical tool.



Tools menu/Clip Boundary
------------------------

Used to clip a reference file -- the same as selecting the Define Reference 
File Clipping Boundary tool.



Tools menu/Clip Mask
--------------------

Used to mask part of a reference file -- the same as selecting the Define 
Reference File Clipping Mask tool.



Tools menu/Clip Front
---------------------

Used to set the front clipping boundary -- the same as selecting the Define 
Reference File Front Clipping Plane tool.



Tools menu/Clip Back
--------------------

Used to set the back clipping boundary -- the same as selecting the Define 
Reference File Back Clipping Plane tool.



Settings menu/Attachment...
---------------------------

Opens the Attachment dialog box, which is used to set information for the 
selected reference file. The name of the selected reference file is shown 
in the title bar.

   Logical Name
   Description
   Scale
   Display
   Snap 
   Locate 


Logical Name
------------

Sets the



Description
-----------

Sets the optional description for the reference file. The maximum valid 
description is 40 characters.



Scale
-----

Sets the ratio of active design file master units to reference file master 
units.



Display
-------

If on, the reference file is displayed. By default, Display is on for a 
reference file when it is attached.

This setting is automatically saved.

Key-in: REFERENCE DISPLAY [OFF | ON] <filename> | ALL>



Snap 
-----

If on, you can snap to elements in the selected reference file.

This setting is automatically saved; the default set by the Snap on when 
attached preference, that can be changed in the Preferences dialog box.

Key-in: REFERENCE SNAP [OFF | ON] <filename> | ALL>



Locate 
-------

If on, you can identify elements in the selected reference file for these 
purposes
*  To construct elements in the active design.
*  To copy reference file elements in the fence contents to the active 
design using the Copy Element tool.
   
This setting is automatically saved; the default is set by the Locate on 
when attached user preference, which can be changed in the Preferences 
dialog box.

Key-in: REFERENCE LOCATE [OFF | ON] <filename> | ALL>



Settings menu/Levels
--------------------

Opens the Reference Levels settings box, which is used to control the 
display of levels in the selected reference file. For each view, elements 
on different levels in the reference file can be displayed.

Key-in: REFERENCE LEVELS [OFF | ON] <filename> | ALL>

   View Number
   Reference Levels
   Apply
   All


View Number
-----------

Sets the view for which Reference Levels are shown.



Reference Levels
----------------

Sets the level map. Display is on in the selected view for levels that are 
selected (black with white numbers). Click on a level to select or deselect 
it. You can drag across the level numbers to select or deselect more 
quickly. To select a rectangular block of levels, hold down <Shift> while 
dragging.

When a reference file is attached coincidentally, the levels that are on by 
default were on when the reference file was last modified and its settings 
saved. If the selected reference file is attached using a saved view, the 
levels on in that view are the defaults. Changes are automatically saved.



Apply
-----

Applies the level map to the chosen view.



All
---

Applies the level map to all views.



Settings menu/Level Symbology...
--------------------------------

Opens the Level Symbology dialog box, which, when opened from this menu, is 
used to control level symbology for the selected reference file.

The reference file name and attachment number are displayed in the lower 
left corner of the dialog box.

For more information, see Level Symbology....



Close
-----

Closes the design file, and opens the MicroStation Manager dialog box.



MicroStation Manager dialog box
-------------------------------

Used to open design files and manage files. Opens when MicroStation is 
started without a design file specification or when Close is chosen from 
the Command Window's File menu.

The Name, Directory, Filter, Type, Files, Directories, and OK controls are 
analogous to those in the Open Design File dialog box, which opens when 
Open... is chosen from the Command Window's File menu.

Note:
TBD (about initapps)

   Cancel
   File menu/New...
   File menu/Copy...
   File menu/Rename...
   File menu/Delete...
   File menu/#<filename>
   File menu/Exit
   Directory menu/New...
   Directory menu/Copy...
   Directory menu/Current Work Directory
   Directory menu/#<path>


Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box, thereby ending the MicroStation session.



File menu/New...
----------------

Opens the Create Design File dialog box, which is used to create a design 
file (the effect is the same as choosing New... from the Command Window's 
File menu). Upon creation, the design file is automatically selected in the 
MicroStation Manager dialog box.



File menu/Copy...
-----------------

Opens the Copy File dialog box, which is used to make a copy of a file. 
This menu item is dimmed if a file is not selected in the Files list box.

   Current Directory
   From
   To
   OK
   Cancel


Current Directory
-----------------

Identifies the default directory for the destination file.



From
----

Identifies the source file to be copied -- by default, the file selected in 
the MicroStation Manager dialog box.



To
--

Sets the name of the destination file to be created as a copy of the file 
identified in the From field. By default, the destination file has the same 
name as the source file with the suffix ".bak" appended or substituted.



OK
--

Creates the destination file by copying the source file.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without copying a file.



File menu/Rename...
-------------------

Opens the Rename File dialog box, which is used to change the name of a 
file. This menu item is dimmed if a file is not selected in the Files list 
box.

   Current Directory
   From
   To
   OK
   Cancel


Current Directory
-----------------

Identifies the directory in which the file selected in the MicroStation 
Manager dialog box resides.



From
----

Identifies the file to be renamed -- by default, the file selected in the 
MicroStation Manager dialog box..



To
--

Sets the new name.



OK
--

Renames the file.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without renaming a file.



File menu/Delete...
-------------------

Opens an alert box for confirming the request to delete the file selected 
in the Files list box. If the request is confirmed, the file is deleted.

This menu item is dimmed if a file is not selected in the Files list box.



File menu/#
-----------

<filename>:Opens the specified design file. There are menu items for each 
of as many as the last four opened design files.



File menu/Exit
--------------

Closes the dialog box, thereby ending the MicroStation session (the effect 
is the same as clicking the Cancel button).



Directory menu/New...
---------------------

Opens the Make Directory dialog box, which is used to create a directory.

   Current Directory
   Dir
   OK
   Cancel


Current Directory
-----------------

Identifies the directory in which the new directory is created by default. 
This directory is the same as the one whose files are listed in the 
MicroStation Manager dialog box.



Dir
---

Sets the new directory name. If a path is not given, the directory will be 
created as a sub-directory of the Current Directory.



OK
--

Creates the directory.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without creating a directory.



Directory menu/Copy...
----------------------

Opens the Copy Directory dialog box, which is used to copy the files listed 
in the Files list box from one directory to another.

   Current Directory
   Dir
   OK


Current Directory
-----------------

Shows the path (directory and file filter) specification of the source 
files to be copied.



Dir
---

Sets the destination directory. The default is the current directory.



OK
--

Copies the source files to the destination directory.



Directory menu/Current Work Directory
-------------------------------------

Changes the directory whose files are listed in the Files list box to the 
current directory.



Directory menu/#
----------------

<path>:Changes the directory whose files are listed in the Files list box 
to the specified path. There are menu items of this type for each of as 
many as the last four directories in which design files were opened.



Save As...
----------

Opens the Save Design As dialog box, which is used to save a copy of the 
design file in a different directory, or on a different disk, or in a 
different file format.

Key-in: DIALOG SAVEAS

Hint:
While Save As.. can be used to back up the active design file, there are 
other, possibly more efficient, ways to perform this very important 
procedure. See To make a backup copy of the active design file: for more 
information.

   Name
   Directory
   Filter
   Type
   Files
   Directories
   OK
   Cancel


Name
----

Sets the name of the copy. By default, the design file name appears.

You must follow the file naming conventions for your system. For 
information about making filenames portable between  different systems, see 
Name.



Directory
---------

Identifies the directory in which the copy of the design file is saved -- 
the default is the directory pointed to by the MS_DEF configuration 
variable. The Directories list box is used to select a different directory.



Filter
------

Sets the file filter, which determines the files that are listed in the 
Files list box. The default "*.dgn," is the normal extension used for a 
design file.



Type
----

Sets the type of the copy:

Type:   Filter: Decription:

Ustn    "*.dgn" MicroStation design file

DWG     "*.dwg" AutoCAD binary drawing file[a]

DXF     "*.dxf" DXF filea

IGES    "*.igs" Initial Graphics Exchange 
                Specification filea

CGM     ".cgm"  Computer graphics metafilea

[a]For general information about DWG, DXF, IGES, and CGM files, see 
Exchanging Data With Other Applications.
   
   

Files
-----

Lists the names of existing files in the selected Directory that are 
allowed by the Filter.
   
   

Directories
-----------

Lists directories for selection. The Directory field identifies the 
selected directory.
   
   

OK
--

Saves the copy of the design file.
   
   If the filename in the Name field is the same as the name of an existing 
file, an alert box asks if you want to overwrite the existing file.
   
   

Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without saving a copy of the design file.
   
   

Compress Design
---------------

Compresses the active design file. The compression process permanently 
removes deleted elements from the file.
   
   Key-in: COMPRESS DESIGN
   
   Note:
   Compressing prevents previous changes from being undone.
   
   

Save Settings
-------------

Saves settings in the active design file.
   
   Saved settings include settings controlled through settings boxes and 
the view configuration (the arrangement of views on the screen and the 
areas of the design plane displayed in the views). However, user 
preferences, B-spline, plotting, and rendering settings are not saved.
   
   Key-in: FILEDESIGN
   
   

Print
-----

TBD
   
   

Drawing Composition
-------------------

Opens the Drawing Composition settings box, which is used to control the 
attachment of views of the model design(s) to a sheet file.
   
   Note:
   The Drawing Composition settings box is the MDL application, 
"drawcomp.ma," which loads when this menu item is chosen.
   
   Sheet File
   Model File
   Scale (Sheet:Model) 
   Nested Attachment Depth 
   Attachment Parameters 
   File menu/New > Sheet...
   File menu/Open > Sheet...
   File menu/Open > Model...
   Tools menu/Attach Copy
   Tools menu/Attach Coincident
   Tools menu/Attach Folded > Orthogonal
   Tools menu/Attach Folded > About Line
   Tools menu/Attach Saved View...
   Tools menu/Attach Standard >
   Tools menu/Clip >
   Tools menu/Detach >
   Tools menu/Group >
   Tools menu/Move >
   Tools menu/Scale >


Sheet File
----------

Identifies the sheet file.



Model File
----------

Identifies the model design file.



Scale (SheetModel) 
-------------------

Sets the ratio of the master units in the sheet file to the master units in 
the model file.



Nested Attachment Depth 
------------------------

Sets the number of levels of reference file attachments that are 
recognized. Model design files can have their own reference file 
attachments, which, in turn, can have more reference file attachments, and 
so on. If Nested Attachment Depth is set to 1 only the model file is 
attached to the sheet file; reference file attachments in the model file 
are ignored.



Attachment Parameters 
----------------------

Lets you directly enter the Logical Name and Description for each attached 
view (as in the Reference Files settings box). The default logical name is 
"logical#," where # automatically is incremented by 1 each time a saved 
view is attached, although it can be changed to any name.



File menu/New > Sheet...
------------------------

Opens the Create Sheet File dialog box, which is used to create and open a 
new sheet file.

The default sheet seed file is "seed.sht" in the directory pointed to by 
the MS_DEF configuration variable. Select a different sheet seed file by 
pressing the Seed button and using the Select Seed File dialog box.

Clicking OK closes the active design or sheet file and opens the new sheet 
file.

Key-in: MDL LOAD DRAWCOMP COMPOSITION NEW SHEET

Note:
The controls in the Create Sheet File dialog box are analogous to those in 
the Create Design File dialog box (File menu/New...). The controls in the 
Select Seed File dialog box are the same as when it is opened by clicking 
Seed... in the Create Design File dialog box.

Hint:
If the MS_SHEETSEED configuration variable is set, the default sheet seed 
file is the file that it points to -- for example, a sheet seed file that 
is customized for your workgroup.



File menu/Open > Sheet...
-------------------------

Opens the Open Sheet File dialog box, which lets you open a sheet file as 
the active sheet file. 

By default, the files listed have extensions beginning with "s" and are in 
the directory pointed to by the MS_DEF configuration variable. 

Note:
The controls are analogous to those in the Open Design File dialog box 
(File menu/Open...).

Key-in: MDL LOAD DRAWCOMP COMPOSITION OPEN SHEET



File menu/Open > Model...
-------------------------

Opens the Open Model File dialog box, which is used to attach a model file 
to the active sheet file (as a reference file).

By default, files with the extension ".dgn" in the directory pointed to by 
the MS_DEF configuration variable are listed.

Clicking OK attaches the model file to the sheet file.

Key-in: MDL LOAD DRAWCOMP COMPOSITION OPEN MODEL



Tools menu/Attach Copy
----------------------

Used to copy an attached view.

>> To copy an attached view:

1. From the Tools menu, choose Attach Copy.
2. In the attached view to be copied, identify an element.
3. Enter a data point to position the copy.
4. Go back to step 2 to copy another attached view.
   or 
   Reset to finish.
   
Key-in: MDL LOAD DRAWCOMP COMPOSITION ATTACH COPY



Tools menu/Attach Coincident
----------------------------

TBD



Tools menu/Attach Folded > Orthogonal
-------------------------------------

Used to attach a view by folding it orthogonally about the edge of an 
attached view. The attached view is automatically aligned with the attached 
view from which it was folded.

>> To attach a view by folding it orthogonally:

1. From the Tools menu's Attach Folded sub-menu, choose Orthogonal.
2. Identify an element in an attached view from which to fold the new 
attached view.
3. Identify the edge of the attached view about which the new attached view 
is to be folded.
4. Enter a data point to position and attach the view.
5. Go back to step 3 to fold another attached view from the same existing 
attached view. 
   or 
   Reset to finish.
Key-in: MDL LOAD DRAWCOMP COMPOSITION ATTACH FOLD ORTHOGONAL



Tools menu/Attach Folded > About Line
-------------------------------------

Used to attach a view by folding it from an attached view about a line 
defined by two data points.

>> To attach a view by folding it from an attached view:

1. From the Tools menu's Attach Folded sub-menu, choose About Line.
2. Identify an element in the attached view from which to fold the new 
attached view.
3. Enter a data point to define one endpoint of the line about which the 
new attached view will be folded.
4. Enter a data point to define the other endpoint of the line and attach 
the view.
5. Return to step 3 to attach another view. 
   or 
   Reset to finish.
Key-in: MDL LOAD DRAWCOMP COMPOSITION ATTACH FOLD LINE



Tools menu/Attach Saved View...
-------------------------------

Used to attach a saved view in the model file to the active sheet file.

>> To attach a saved view:

1. From the Tools menu, choose Attach Saved View.
   The Select Saved View dialog box opens, displaying a list of the saved 
views in the model file.
2. Choose the saved view to attach by selecting its name and clicking the 
OK button.
   The Select Saved View dialog box closes and an outline of the saved view 
is displayed.
3. Enter a data point to position the saved view and attach it to the sheet 
file.
   
Key-in: MDL LOAD DRAWCOMP COMPOSITION ATTACH SAVED

Note:
Saved views are defined in the Saved Views settings box, which is opened by 
choosing Saved (*Xref) from the View menu.



Tools menu/Attach Standard >
----------------------------

Used to attach a standard, fitted view of the model file.

>> To attach a standard, fitted view of the model file:

1. (Optional) Choose Levels from Tools menu's Attach Standard sub-menu to 
open the Standard View Levels dialog box, which lets you turn off a 
level(s) in standard views that are to be attached. The changes remain in 
effect until you exit MicroStation.
2. Choose the view (Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Front, Back, or Isometric) 
from the Tools menu's Attach Standard sub-menu.
3. Enter a data point to position the view and attach it to the sheet file.
   
Key-in: MDL LOAD DRAWCOMP COMPOSITION ATTACH STANDARD LEVELS COMPOSITION 
ATTACH STANDARD [TOP|BOTTOM|LEFT|RIGHT|FRONT|BACK|ISO]



Tools menu/Clip >
-----------------

These items function identically to their counterparts in the Reference 
Files palette and the Tools menu in the Reference Files settings box.

Clip > BoundaDefine Reference File Clipping Boundary

Clip > Mask  Define Reference File Clipping Mask

Clip > Front Define Reference File Front Clipping Plane 

Clip > Back  Define Reference File Back Clipping Plane 





Tools menu/Detach >
-------------------

Used to detach a single attached view of the model file, a group of 
attached views, or all attached views.

>> To detach an attached view:

1. From the Tools menu's Detach sub-menu, choose Single.
2. Identify an element in the attached view that is to be detached.
3. Accept the detachment.
   
Note:
This can also be done with the Detach Reference File tool.

>> To detach a group of attached views:

1. From the Tools menu's Detach sub-menu, choose Group.
2. Identify an element in an attached view within the group to be detached. 
All members of the group are outlined.
3. Accept the detachment.
   
Key-in: MDL LOAD DRAWCOMP REFERENCE GROUP DETACH

>> To detach all views attached to the sheet file:

1. From the Tools menu's Detach sub-menu, choose All.
   This item should be used with care -- all attached views are detached as 
soon as it is chosen. There is no chance to reject the detachment. 
   


Tools menu/Group >
------------------

Used to add or remove attached views to or from a group.

>> To add an attached view(s) to a group:

1. From the Tools menu's Group sub-menu, choose Add.
2. Identify an element in an attached view within the group to which 
attached views are to be added.
3. Identify an element in the attached view to add to the group.
4. Go back to step 3 to add another attached view to the group.
   or
   Reset to finish.
   
Key-in: MDL LOAD DRAWCOMP REFERENCE GROUP ADD

>> To remove an attached view(s) from a group:

1. From the Tools menu's Group sub-menu, choose Remove. Identify an element 
in an attached view within the group from which attached views are to be 
removed.
2. Identify an element in the attached view to remove from the group.
3. Go back to step 2 to remove another attached view from the group.
   or
   Reset to finish.
   
Key-in: MDL LOAD DRAWCOMP REFERENCE GROUP REMOVE



Tools menu/Move >
-----------------

Used to move an attached view of the model file, a group of attached views, 
or all attached views.

>> To move an attached view:

1. From the Tools menu's Move sub-menu, choose Single.
2. Identify an element in the attached view to be moved.
3. Accept the attached view.
4. Enter a data point to define the origin of the move.
5. Enter a data point to define the destination.
   
Note:
This can also be done with the Move Reference File tool.

>> To move a group of attached views:

1. From the Tools menu's Move sub-menu, choose Group.
2. Identify an element in an attached view within the group to be moved. 
This data point also defines the origin of the move.
3. Enter a data point to define the destination.
   
Key-in: MDL LOAD DRAWCOMP REFERENCE GROUP MOVE

>> To move all views attached to the sheet file:

1. From the Tools menu's Move sub-menu, choose All.
2. Enter a data point to define the origin of the move.
3. Enter a data point to define the destination.
   


Tools menu/Scale >
------------------

Used to scale a single attached view of the model file, a group of attached 
views, or all attached views.

>> To scale an attached view:

1. From the Tools menu's Scale sub-menu, choose Single.
2. Identify an element in the attached view to be scaled.
3. Accept the attached view.
4. Key in the desired scale factor in the Command Window in the form 
<Master_Scale>:<Reference_File_Scale>.
5. Enter a data point about which the attached view will be scaled.
   
Note:
This can also be done with the Scale Reference File tool.

>> To scale a group of attached views:

1. From the Tools menu's Scale sub-menu, choose Group.
2. Identify an element in an attached view within the group to be scaled.
3. Key in the desired scale factor in the scale (sheet:model) fields in 
Drawing Composition settings box.
4. Enter a data point about which the group will be scaled.
   
Key-in: MDL LOAD DRAWCOMP REFERENCE GROUP SCALE

>> To scale all views attached to the sheet file:

1. From the Tools menu's Scale sub-menu, choose All.
2. Key in the desired scale factor in the Command Window in the form 
<Master_Scale>:<Reference_File_Scale>.
3. Enter a data point about which the attached views will be scaled.
   


Plot...
-------

Opens the Preview Plot dialog box, which is used to preview a plot, set 
plotting settings, and create a plotfile. Plots are be generated from 
plotfiles. See *Xref for information about generating plots from plotfiles.

   Printable Area of Page for:
   View
   Use Fence
   Page Settings (Printable Area)
   Page Size...
   Drawing Settings
   Plot Origin
   Maximize 
   Center
   Options...
   Plotters...
   Preview
   Done
   Plot


Printable Area of Page for
--------------------------

Identifies the plotter configuation file.

The large box at left represents the printable area of the plotter page. 
The plot extents are denoted by a blue (dark) rectangle.



View
----

Sets the view to plot.



Use Fence
---------

If on, the plotfile is created from the fenced area in the chosen view. 

Use Fence is disabled (dimmed) if there is no fence.



Page Settings (Printable Area)
------------------------------

Shows the width and height of the printable area, which are extracted from 
the plotter configuration file. See "*Xref" in the user's guide for 
information about the plotter configuration file format.


Page Size...
------------

Opens the Set Page Size dialog box, which is used to change page settings 
for the plotfile being created.

Page settings cannot be saved in the design file, and changes to these 
settings remain in effect only while the Preview Plot dialog box remains 
open.

Note:
On Hewlett-Packard plotters, plots are not generated properly unless the 
page size specified is the same as the actual size of the paper loaded in 
the plotter.

   Units
   Page Name
   Manual Origin
   Printable Area Dimensions and Offset from Paper Origin
   Plotter Dots per Unit


Units
-----

Shows the



Page Name
---------

Sets the page name as defined in the plotter configuration file.



Manual Origin
-------------

TBD (Each SIZE record in the plotter configuration file...).



Printable Area Dimensions and Offset from Paper Origin
------------------------------------------------------

These settings make it possible to plot multiple views of a design(s) on 
the same sheet of paper. (If a printer is used, the sheet must be fed 
repeatedly.) Units for these settings are shown.
   Width -- Printable area width.
   Height -- Printable area height.
   Offset Width -- Width offset from paper origin.
   Offset Height -- Height offset from paper origin.
   
Hint:
In most cases, Drawing Composition is a more efficient way to arrange views 
to be plotted. If you use Drawing Composition, you can visually see all 
your views together before you plot, and there is no need to repeatedly 
feed the same sheet of paper.



Plotter Dots per Unit
---------------------

TBD
*  Width Dots -- 
*  Height Dots -- 
   


Drawing Settings
----------------

These settings control the plot's size

Setting:Description:   Default Does This:             Adjust to 
                                                      Plot:

Width   Width in plotteAligns longest axis of plot witTo exact size.
        units.         longest axis of printable area.

Height  Height in plottAligns longest axis of plot witTo exact size.
        units.         longest axis of printable area.

Scale   Ratio of masterFits the largest possible plot At exact scale.
        units to plotteprintable area.
        units.


These settings cannot be adjusted to exceed the printable area. Adjustments 
automatically update the dependent setting(s). Plotter units are defined in 
the plotter configuration file, usually as inches or millimeters.

This table lists the scales compatible with the working unit settings that 
are saved in the sample seed files:

Seed file       Scale
group

Architecture    8

Mapping         24,000

Mapping Metric  20

Mechanical      0.5

Mechanical Metri50

Schematic       1





Plot Origin
-----------

The lower left corner of the plot, in page unit coordinates relative to the 
lower left corner of the printable area. The defaults center the plot in 
the printable area. Adjust these settings to position the plot precisely in 
the printable area.

If a Manual Origin is set in the Page Settings box, the Plot Origin values 
are forced to zero and cannot be changed.

Drawing settings are read from the plotter configuration file and cannot be 
saved in the design file. Changes remain in effect only while the Preview 
Plot dialog box remains open.



Maximize 
---------

Fits the selected view or fenced area into as much of the printable area as 
possible (restores the default Drawing Settings if you change them).

The plot is centered either horizontally or vertically if it does not 
exactly fit the printable area, unless there is a Manual Origin, which 
anchors the plot at the lower left corner.



Center
------

Centers the plot in the printable area if you change the Drawing Settings. 
The Plot Origin is adjusted accordingly.



Options...
----------

Opens the Options dialog box, which is used to set plot output options:
The defaults for these settings are set in the plotter configuration file 
(*XRef) and cannot be saved in the design file. Changes remain in effect 
only while the Preview Plot dialog box remains open.

   Draw Border
   Rotate 90 Degrees
   Plot Fence Outline
   Comment


Draw Border
-----------

If on, a border is plotter. This setting is on by default if the plotter 
configuration file has a BORDER (*Xref) record.



Rotate 90 Degrees
-----------------

If on, the plot is rotated in the printable area.



Plot Fence Outline
------------------

If on (and Use Fence is also on), the bounding fence is plotted.



Comment
-------

Sets the comment (up to 40 characters) that is plotted just outside the 
plot. If the plot occupies the entire printable area, the comment is 
visible only if sufficient space remains within the plotter's clip limits. 
About 1/4" is necessary. Most plotter configuration files specify a 
printable area that allows enough space.



Plotters...
-----------

Opens the Plotter Configuration File dialog box, which is used to select a 
different plotter configuration file.

The plotter configuration files supplied with MicroStation have the ending 
".plt." For a lot of the sample plotter configuration files supplied with 
MicroStation, see *XRef.

If you change the plotter configuration file in this dialog box, the change 
remains in effect for the remainder of the session. The MS_PLTR 
configuration variable identifies the plotter configuration file. To save 
the change between sessions, click the Save button in the Configuration 
Variables dialog box (open by choosing Workspace > Modify User 
Configuration... from the User menu).



Preview
-------

Opens the Plot Preview window, which displays a preview image of the plot. 
The text in the title bar is the border Comment.

To stop generation of the preview image in progress, press <Esc>.

>> To close the Plot Preview window:

1. Reset.
   or
   Press <Esc>.
   


Done
----

Click to close the Plot dialog box.



Plot
----

Click to open the Save Plotfile dialog box, which is used to specify the 
plotfile's name and directory.
*  The default plotfile name is the same as the design file name with the 
ending ".000" added or substituted. 
*  The default plotfile directory is pointed to by the MS_PLTFILES 
configuration variable.
   
Note:
The controls are analagous to thpse in the Save Design File As dialog box 
(File menu/Save As....



Tag Reporting > Generate Templates
----------------------------------

Opens the Generate Templates settings box, which is used to generate a tag 
report template file that specifies the tag set and its member tags (plus 
any graphical element attributes) on which to report. A template file can 
specify tags from only one set.

Key-in: tbd

Note:
The Generate Templates settings box is part of the MDL application, 
"tags.ma," which loads when an item related to element tags is chosen from 
the File, Settings, or Palettes menu.

   Tag Sets
   Report File Name
   Tags
   Add
   Remove
   Clear
   Report Columns
   File menu/Open...
   File menu/Save
   File menu/Save As...


Tag Sets
--------

Lists the sets that have been defined for the design file. To generate a 
template file, you must first select the set that contains the tags on 
which to report.



Report File Name
----------------

TBD



Tags
----

Lists the tags in the set selected in the Tag Sets list box. To generate a 
template file, you must first select, in turn, each tag on which you want 
to report, and add it to the list on which to report.



Add
---

Adds the tag selected in the Tags list box to the Report Columns list box.



Remove
------

Removes the tag selected in the Report Columns list box from the list.



Clear
-----

Clears the list of tags from the Report Columns list box.



Report Columns
--------------

Lists the tags on which to report. To remove a tag from the list, you must 
first select it.



File menu/Open...
-----------------

Opens the Open Template File dialog box, which is used to open a tag report 
template file. The tags specified in a newly opened template file are 
listed in the Report Columns list box in the Generate Templates dialog box.

Note:
The controls are analagous to those in the Open Design File dialog box 
(File menu/Open....



File menu/Save
--------------

Saves changes to the open tag report template file.



File menu/Save As...
--------------------

Opens the Save Template File As dialog box, which is used to save changes 
to a new tag report template file and open the new file in the Generate 
Templates dialog box.

Note:
The controls are analagous to those in the Save Design File As dialog box 
(File menu/Save As....



Tag Reporting > Generate Reports...
-----------------------------------

Opens the Generate Reports dialog box, which is used to select a report 
template file and to generate a report using the selected template on tags 
attached to elements and on graphical element attributes.

Key-in: tbd

Note:
The Generate Reports dialog box is part of the MDL application, "tags.ma," 
which loads when an item related to element tags is chosen from the File, 
Settings, or Palettes menu.



Import > DWG or DXF
-------------------

Opens the Open Drawing File dialog box, which is used to open a DWG or DXF 
file (both of which are referred to here as drawing files).

By default, the Type is set to DWG and the Filter to"*.dwg."

Clicking OK opens the Import Drawing File dialog box, which lets you adjust 
import settings before opening the drawing file..

Key-in: MDL LOAD DWGIN

Note:
The controls are analogous to the controls in the Open Design File dialog 
box. 

Note:
For step-by-step procedures for opening DWG or DXF files, see General Data 
Exchange Procedures. For information about the expected results and 
limitations of translation, see Limitations of DWG or DXF import and 
export.

Hint:
To directly open a DWG or DXF file, use the Open Design File dialog box, 
which is opened by choosing Open... from the File menu.

Note:
DWG and DXF import is performed by the MDL application "dwgin.ma."



Import Drawing File dialog box
------------------------------

Used to import a DWG or DXF file. Opens when OK is clicked in the Open 
Drawing File dialog box (File menu/Import > DWG or DXF).

The dialog boxes that can be opened from its menus are used to adjust 
settings that control how drawing files are opened.

   Drawing File
   Status
   Open
   Cancel
   File menu/Settings File > Attach...
   File menu/Settings File > Save
   File menu/Settings File > Save As...
   File menu/Log File...
   Settings menu/General...
   Settings menu/Text Fonts...
   Settings menu/Levels...
   Settings menu/Line Styles...
   Settings menu/Width / Weight...
   Settings menu/Weight / Color


Drawing File
------------

Shows information about the DWG or DXF file to be opened.
   Name -- The file's path and filename.
   Version -- The file's version.
   Maximum -- The file's maximum extent.
   Minimum -- The file's minimum extent.
   Scale Factor -- The factor by which the drawing file must be scaled to 
fit in the design plane or design cube. Is set to 1.0 unless the drawing 
file does not fit. See the User's Guide for more information.
   


Status
------

During the conversion, displays messages about its progress, which are also 
saved in the Log File.



Open
----

Opens the drawing file.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without opening the drawing file.



File menu/Settings File > Attach...
-----------------------------------

Opens the Attach Settings File dialog box, which is used to attach an 
import settings file.



File menu/Settings File > Save
------------------------------

Saves the import settings in the attached import settings file.



File menu/Settings File > Save As...
------------------------------------

Opens the Save Settings File dialog box, which is used to save the import 
settings in a new import settings file.



File menu/Log File...
---------------------

Opens the Log File dialog box, which is used to specify an alternate Log 
File.



Settings menu/General...
------------------------

Opens the Drawing File Settings dialog box, which is used to adjust general 
drawing file import settings.

   Translation Units
   Convert Blocks To
   Color Palette
   Resolve Xrefs
   Xref Nest Depth
   Frozen Layers
   Display Elements
   Character Mapping
   Map Color to Weight
   Compress Fractions
   Origin
   Shift Global Origin
   Origin at


Translation Units
-----------------

Sets the units in the design file to which drawing units are equated
*  Master -- equates drawing units to master units.
*  Sub -- equates drawing units to sub-units.
   


Convert Blocks To
-----------------

Sets the method by which blocks in the drawing file are converted
*  Library Cells -- If a cell library is attached, cells are placed in the 
attached cell library and in the design file as unshared cells. If no cell 
library is attached, the cells are placed in the design file only.
*  Shared Cells -- Placed in the design file as shared cell definitions and 
instances.
*  Components -- Placed in the design file as individual components; In 
other words, dropped (exploded).
   


Color Palette
-------------

Sets the manner in which colors are mapped between the drawing file and the 
design file
*  AutoCAD -- The design file's color table is redefined to match AutoCAD's 
fixed 256-color palette. The colors of entities in the drawing file are not 
changed. The colors of elements in the design file may be changed.
*  Design File -- Each color in AutoCAD's color palette is mapped to the 
closest color in the design file's color table. The colors of entities in 
the drawing file may be changed. (The closer the design file's color table 
is to AutoCAD's color palette, the smaller the changes.) The colors of 
existing elements in the design file are not changed.
   
Color       Color of         Color of 
Palette     entities in the  elements in the 
setting:    drawing file:    design file:

AutoCAD     Not changed      May be changed

Design File May be changed   Not changed





Resolve Xrefs
-------------

Xrefs in the drawing file can be converted as follows
*  None -- All Xrefs are ignored.
*  Missing -- TBD
*  Always -- TBD
   


Xref Nest Depth
---------------

The maximum depth of nested Xrefs that is converted.



Frozen Layers
-------------

If on, entities on frozen layers are imported. If off, entities on frozen 
layers are omitted from the design file.



Display Elements
----------------

TBD



Character Mapping
-----------------

TBD



Map Color to Weight
-------------------

TBD



Compress Fractions
------------------

TBD



Origin
------

Contains controls used to specify the design file's origin, if it is 
necessary to shift it to fit all the entities in the drawing file onto the 
design file's design plane (2D) or cube (3D).



Shift Global Origin
-------------------

If on, and it is necessary to shift data in the drawing file, the design 
file's global origin is moved to the drawing file's origin. Elements in the 
design file are shifted so they are correctly positioned relative to the 
elements from the drawing file. 

If off, the design file's global origin is not moved.



Origin at
---------

The coordinates of the design file's global origin (usually 0,0,0, unless 
it is necessary to shift data in the drawing file to fit it in the design 
plane or cube).
   X -- Coordinate in x-direction.
   Y -- Coordinate in y-direction.
   Z -- Coordinate in z-direction (3D only).
   
Note:
See the User's Guide for more information.



Settings menu/Text Fonts...
---------------------------

Opens the Text Fonts dialog box, which is used to adjust the mapping 
between drawing file font or text style names and MicroStation fonts.

   Table File
   DWG Fonts...Ustn Fonts
   Edit
   OK
   Cancel
   File menu/Attach...
   File menu/Save
   File menu/Save As...


Table File
----------

Identifies the attached font translation table. To attach a different font 
translation table, use File menu/Attach....



DWG Fonts...Ustn Fonts
----------------------

Lists the MicroStation font to which drawing file fonts are converted. To 
change the mapping of a font, you must first select it.



Edit
----

Sets the MicroStation font to which the selected font is converted. You can 
key in the font number or choose the MicroStation font from the option 
menu.



OK
--

Makes the specified changes. The changes remain in effect ???



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without making any changes.



File menu/Attach...
-------------------

Opens the Attach Font Table dialog box, which is used to attach a font 
translation table.



File menu/Save
--------------

Saves the font mapping to the attached font translation table.



File menu/Save As...
--------------------

Opens the Save Font Table dialog box, which is used to save the font 
mapping to a new translation table.



Settings menu/Levels...
-----------------------

Opens the Levels dialog box, which is used to adjust the MicroStation 
levels to which layers in the drawing file are converted.

Note:
If a layer name is not mapped to a specific MicroStation level, level 
numbers are sequentially assigned to layer names in alphabetical order. A 
MicroStation level name is created for each layer name so that levels can 
continue to be referred to by their layer names.

   Table File
   DWG Layers...Ustn Layers
   Edit
   OK
   Cancel
   File menu/Attach...
   File menu/Save
   File menu/Save As...


Table File
----------

Identifies the attached level translation table. To attach a different 
level translation table, use File menu/Attach....



DWG Layers...Ustn Layers
------------------------

Lists the MicroStation levels to which drawing file layers are converted. 
To change the mapping of a layer, you must first select it.



Edit
----

Sets the level to which the selected layer is converted. You can key in the 
level number or choose the level from the option menu.



OK
--

Makes the specified changes. The changes remain in effect ???



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without making any changes.



File menu/Attach...
-------------------

Opens the Attach Level Table File dialog box, which is used to attach a 
level translation table.



File menu/Save
--------------

Saves the level mapping to the attached level translation table.



File menu/Save As...
--------------------

Opens the Save Level Table dialog box, which is used to save the level 
mapping to a new level translation table.



Settings menu/Line Styles...
----------------------------

Opens the Line Styles dialog box, which is used to adjust how linetypes in 
the drawing file are converted to MicroStation line styles.

   Table File
   DWG Linetype...Ustn Line Style
   Edit
   OK
   Cancel
   File menu/Attach...
   File menu/Save
   File menu/Save As...


Table File
----------

Identifies the attached line style translation table. To attach a different 
line style translation table, use File menu/Attach....



DWG Linetype...Ustn Line Style
------------------------------

Lists the line styles to which linetypes are converted. To change the 
mapping of a linetype, you must first select it.



Edit
----

Sets the line style to which the selected linetype is converted. You can 
key in the line style number to convert the selected DWG linetype to, or 
you can choose a line style from the option menu.



OK
--

Makes the specified changes. The changes remain in effect ???



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without making any changes.



File menu/Attach...
-------------------

Opens the Attach Style Table File dialog box, which is used to attach a 
line style translation table.



File menu/Save
--------------

Saves the line style mapping to the attached line style translation table.



File menu/Save As...
--------------------

Opens the Save Style Table File As dialog box, which is used to save the 
line style mapping to a new line style translation table.



Settings menu/Width / Weight...
-------------------------------

Opens the Weights dialog box, which is used to control how polyline widths 
in the drawing file are converted to MicroStation line weights.

Note:
If a polyline segment is tapered, the width to weight mapping is ignored 
and the segment is converted to a filled shape. This ensures that 
arrowheads and other tapered polyline segments are represented correctly.

Note:
Polyline widths are specified by their thickness in drawing units. 
MicroStation line weights are not associated with a specific thickness, but 
instead determine the relative line weight of a line with respect to other 
line weight values. This lets the line weight be tailored to the display 
hardware. For hard copy, the WEIGHT_STROKES (*Xref) record in the plotter 
configuration file defines the thickness at which a line with a given line 
weight is plotted.

   Table File
   Current Width toWeight Mapping
   Edit
   New
   Clear
   OK
   Cancel
   File menu/Attach...
   File menu/Save
   File menu/Save As...


Table File
----------

Identifies the attached polyline width to line style translation table. To 
attach a different polyline width to line style translation table, use File 
menu/Attach....



Current Width toWeight Mapping
------------------------------

Lists the MicroStation line weights to which drawing file polyline widths 
are converted. To change the mapping of a polyline width, you must first 
select it.



Edit
----

Opens the ??? dialog box, which lets you edit TBD.



New
---

TBD



Clear
-----

TBD



OK
--

Makes the specified changes. The changes remain in effect ???



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without making any changes.



File menu/Attach...
-------------------

Opens the Attach Weight Table File dialog box, which is used to attach a 
polyline width to line weight translation table.



File menu/Save
--------------

Saves the polyline width to line weight mapping to the attached polyline 
width to line weight translation table.



File menu/Save As...
--------------------

Opens the Save Weight Table File As dialog box, which is used to save the 
polyline width to line weight to a new translation table.



Settings menu/Weight / Color
----------------------------

Opens the Color to Line Weight dialog box, which is used to set the mapping 
between colors in the drawing file and MicroStation line weights.

Rest TBD



Import > IGES...
----------------

TBD



Import IGES File dialog box
---------------------------

Used to import a IGES file. Opens when OK is clicked in the dialog box. The 
dialog boxes that can be opened from its menus are used to adjust settings 
that control how IGES files are opened. 

Note:
(that identifies MDL application)

   Input File
   Translation Units
   Subfigure Output
   Drawings
   Scale Factor
   Stroke Tolerance
   Maximum Line Width
   File menu/Settings File / Attach...
   File menu/Settings File / Save
   File menu/Settings File / Save As...
   File menu/Log File...
   Settings menu/Cell Names...
   Settings menu/Exclude IGES Entities...
   Settings menu/Exclude uSTN Elements...
   Settings menu/Text Fonts...
   Settings menu/Levels...
   Settings menu/Line Styles...


Input File
----------

Shows the filename and other information -- Author, Organization, Creator, 
Measuring System, Drafting Standard, IGES Version, Creation Data, Number of 
Entities, and Time -- in the IGES file's global data section.



Translation Units
-----------------

Sete the manner in which IGES file units are equated to MicroStation 
working units:
*  Master -- equates IGES file units to the master units of the active 
design file.
*  Sub -- equates IGES file units to the sub-units of the active design 
file.
*  Calculate -- sets the working units in the design file so that one 
positional unit is equal to the minimum resolution parameter in the IGES 
file's Global data section . The master units name is set to the units 
parameter (also in the Global data section) and the number of sub-units per 
master unit is 1. This option should be used with care as it is likely to 
produce design files with non-standard working units.
   


Subfigure Output
----------------

Sets the method in which subfigures are translated. Subfigures can be 
translated to
*  Library Cells -- added to the attached cell library as graphic cells and 
added to the design file as unshared cells. If a cell library is not 
attached, Library Cells is dimmed (not available).
*  Shared Cells -- added to the design file as shared cell definitions and 
instances.
*  Components -- added to the design file as individual elements; in other 
words, the cells are dropped.
   
Note:
In IGES, subfigure (type 308) or network subfigure (type 320) entities are 
used to store a group of entities that occur repetitively within a file, 
performing about the same function as MicroStation cells. 

Note:
The maximum size of MicroStation cells is 65,000 words (1 word = 2 bytes). 
If an IGES subfigure exceeds this limit, it is placed as individual 
components rather than as a cell.



Drawings
--------

Sets the manner in which IGES drawing entities and entities with views 
visible attributes are translated
*  Ignore -- drawing entities and associated annotation entities are 
omitted. 
*  Sheet-View Visibility -- a separate sheet file is created for each 
drawing entity. Entities whose view visibility varies in different views 
are omitted from the model file and are instead placed in the sheet file 
with the correct orientation and view symbology.
*  Sheet-No Visibility -- a separate sheet file is created for each drawing 
entity. Entities with view visibility and view symbology attributes are 
placed in the model file and display with the same symbology in every view.
*  Merge -- drawing entities are merged into the design file by 
transforming the model geometry for each view and placing it in the design 
file. The elements in the design file represent the drawing sheet(s) rather 
than the model itself. Merging drawing information is usually less 
efficient since entities are repeated for each view rather than being 
created just once and referenced in sheet files. Merged drawing entities 
are omitted from a view(s) based on their view visibility, and their 
symbology is set to the appropriate symbology for each view.
   
Sheet files are created with the same filename as the model file with the 
extension ".Sxx," where "xx" is the drawing sheet number. For example, the 
first sheet file for "test.dgn" would be "test.s01," the second "test.s02," 
and so on. If the MS_SHEETSEED configuration variable is set, the sheet 
file is created from the seed file it points to. Otherwise, the sheet file 
is created by copying the header information from the model file.

Note:
See Drawing sheets and view visibility for general information about 
drawing sheets and view visibility.



Scale Factor
------------

Sets the scale factor that is applied to imported IGES entities; can be 
used to tailor the translation to accept geometry from systems that 
generate data at a different scale or in a different coordinate system. 

By default, the scale factor is set to 1.0 (no scaling is performed).



Stroke Tolerance
----------------

The maximum deviation, in Translation Units, between the actual curve and 
the approximating line segments used to represent excluded arc, curve, 
B-spline curve, or B-spline surface entities in the design file.

If any of these IGES entities are excluded in the Exclude IGES Entities 
dialog box (opened by choosing Settings menu/Exclude IGES Entities... in 
the Import IGES File dialog box), they are approximated by line segments, 
referred to as strokes, in line string or shape elements.

If stroke      Number of      Approximation 
tolerance is:  segments is:[a]quality:

Decreased      Increased      Finer

Increased      Reduced        Coarser

[a]And also, of course, the size of the design file.
   
Note:
See Excluding IGES entities for more information about excluding IGES 
entities.



Maximum Line Width
------------------

Sets the IGES line weight (thickness) in millimeters (mm) that is assigned 
to MicroStation line weight 31. The other MicroStation line weights are 
assigned thicknesses that are proportional to this value.

An inverse relationship exists between the Maximum Line Width and the 
MicroStation line weight that is assigned to a line from the IGES file. 
Consider a line in an IGES file that has a thickness of 2.5 mm:
*  If Maximum Line Width is set to 5 mm (the default, about 0.2"), the line 
is assigned to MicroStation line weight 15.
*  If Maximum Line Width is set to 10 mm, the line is assigned to 
MicroStation line weight 7.
   
Thus, increasing the Maximum Line Width setting decreases the MicroStation 
line weight assigned to a given line.

Note:
IGES line weights are specified by the actual line thickness. MicroStation 
Line Weight not associated with a specific thickness, but instead 
determines the relative line weight of a line with respect to other line 
weight values.



File menu/Settings File / Attach...
-----------------------------------

Opens the Attach Settings File dialog box, which is used to attach an 
import settings file. 



File menu/Settings File / Save
------------------------------

Saves the import settings in the attached import settings file.



File menu/Settings File / Save As...
------------------------------------

Opens the Save Settings File dialog box, which is used to save the import 
settings in a new import settings file.



File menu/Log File...
---------------------

Opens the Log File dialog box, which is used to specify an alternate Log 
File.



Settings menu/Cell Names...
---------------------------

Opens the Cell Names dialog box, which can be used to customize how IGES 
subfigure names are converted to MicroStation cell names.

By default, subfigure names are truncated. See Converting subfigure names 
for general information about how subfigures are converted.

   Subfigure Name
   Cell Name
   Delete
   Add
   Done


Subfigure Name
--------------

Sets the IGES subfigure name. Key in a name in the text field below the 
list box.



Cell Name
---------

Sets the cell name to which to convert the subfigure name. Key in a cell 
name in the text entry field below the list box.



Delete
------

Deletes the selected cell name mapping.



Add
---

Adds the specified cell name mapping.



Done
----

Closes the dialog box.



Settings menu/Exclude IGES Entities...
--------------------------------------

Opens the Exclude IGES Entities dialog box, which is used to exclude types 
of IGES entities--that is, omit them from the design file. 

By default, all entities are included. A warning is inserted in the Log 
File each time an entity is omitted.

   Included Entities
   Excluded Entities
   Exclude
   Include
   Done 


Included Entities
-----------------

Lists included entity types. Double-clicking an entity type excludes it. 



Excluded Entities
-----------------

Lists excluded entity types. Double-clicking an entity type includes it.



Exclude
-------

Excludes the entity type that is selected in the Included Entities list 
box.



Include
-------

Includes the entity type that is selected in the Excluded Entities list 
box.



Done 
-----

Closes the dialog box.



Settings menu/Exclude uSTN Elements...
--------------------------------------

Opens the Exclude MicroStation Elements dialog box, which is used to 
exclude types of MicroStation elements--that is, translate them to a 
different type of element(s). Examples are stroking a curved element into a 
line string or breaking up (dropping) a complex element into its components 
-- done usually because an application does not recognize that particular 
type of element.

   Included Elements
   Excluded Elements
   Exclude
   Include
   Done 


Included Elements
-----------------

Lists included element types. Double-clicking an element type excludes it.



Excluded Elements
-----------------

Lists excluded element types. Double-clicking an element type includes it. 



Exclude
-------

Excludes the element type that is selected in the Included Elements list 
box.



Include
-------

Includes the element type that is selected in the Excluded Elements list 
box.



Done 
-----

Closes the dialog box.



Settings menu/Text Fonts...
---------------------------

Opens the Text Fonts dialog box, which can be used to define the 
MicroStation Font to which an IGES text font(s) are converted.

Note:
See Converting text for information about making text font conversion as 
"clean" as possible.

   IGES Font(s)
   Min(imum)
   Max(imum)
   uSTN Font
   Delete
   Add
   Done


IGES Font(s)
------------

Lists the MicroStation fonts to which IGES fonts are converted. To change 
the mapping of a font(s), you must first select it.



Min(imum)
---------

Sets the IGES text font to convert or the minimum of a range of IGES text 
fonts to convert.



Max(imum)
---------

Sets the maximum of a range of IGES text fonts to convert.



uSTN Font
---------

Sets the MicroStation font number to which to convert the IGES text font or 
range of text fonts.



Delete
------

Deletes the font mapping that is selected in the list box.



Add
---

Adds the specified text font mapping to the list.



Done
----

Closes the dialog box.



Settings menu/Levels...
-----------------------

Opens the Levels dialog box, which is used to specify mappings between 
levels in the IGES file and the design file.

Note:
See Levels for general information about converting from levels in an IGES 
file to levels in a design file.

   IGES Level(s)
   Min(imum)
   Max(imum)
   uSTN Font
   Delete
   Add
   Done


IGES Level(s)
-------------

Lists the design file levels to which IGES are converted. To change the 
mapping of a level(s), you must first select it.



Min(imum)
---------

Sets the IGES level to map or the minimum of a range of IGES levels to map.



Max(imum)
---------

Sets the maximum of a range of IGES levels to map.



uSTN Font
---------

Sets the design file level to which to map the IGES level(s).



Delete
------

Deletes the level mapping that is selected in the list box.



Add
---

Add the specified level mapping to the list.



Done
----

Closes the dialog box.



Settings menu/Line Styles...
----------------------------

Opens the Line Styles dialog box, which can be used to adjust how an IGES 
line font pattern(s) is converted to a MicroStation line Style. The option 
menus let you choose a MicroStation line style to convert each line font 
pattern to.

   Done


Done
----

Click when you are finished.



Import > CGM...
---------------

TBD

Note:
(that identifies MDL application)



Import CGM File dialog box
--------------------------

Used to adjust CGM import settings. Opens when you .... The dialog boxes 
than can be opened from its menus are used to adjust setting that control 
how CGM files are opened.

   Computer Graphics Metafile
   Translation Units
   Background Color
   Color Palette
   Status
   Open
   Cancel
   File menu/Settings File/Attach...
   File menu/Settings File/Save
   File menu/Settings File/Save As...
   File menu/Log File
   Settings menu/Text Fonts...
   Settings menu/Levels...
   Settings menu/Line Styles...
   Settings menu/Weights...


Computer Graphics Metafile
--------------------------

Shows the CGM file's name, version, description, and scale factor.



Translation Units
-----------------

Sets the manner in which units in the CGM file are mapped
*  Master -- equates CGM file units to the master units of the active 
design file.
*  Sub -- equates CGM file units to sub-units of the active design file.
   


Background Color
----------------

Sets the RGB Value of the color in the design file's color table used as 
the background color, if the CGM file does not have a color table.



Color Palette
-------------

Sets whether to use the color palette in the CGM file or active design 
file.



Status
------

During the file conversion, displays messages about its progress.



Open
----

Imports the CGM file.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without importing the CGM file.



File menu/Settings File/Attach...
---------------------------------

Opens the Attach Settings File dialog box, which is used to attach an 
import settings file. 



File menu/Settings File/Save
----------------------------

Saves the import settings in the attached import settings file.



File menu/Settings File/Save As...
----------------------------------

Opens the Save Settings File dialog box, which is used to save the import 
settings in a new import settings file.



File menu/Log File
------------------

Opens the Log File dialog box, which is used to specify an alternate Log 
File.



Settings menu/Text Fonts...
---------------------------

SeeSettings menu/Text Fonts....



Settings menu/Levels...
-----------------------

SeeSettings menu/Levels....



Settings menu/Line Styles...
----------------------------

SeeSettings menu/Line Styles....



Settings menu/Weights...
------------------------

SeeSettings menu/Width / Weight....



Import > Image...
-----------------

Opens the Select Image File dialog box, which is used to import a bitmapped 
(raster) file and place the image contained in the file as a raster 
element. 

Key-in: MDL LOAD PLAIMAGE

Note:
The Select Image file dialog box is the MDL application, "plaimage,ma," 
which opens when this menu item is chosen.

   Image
   Current Color Palette
   Transparent Background
   File


Image
-----

The items in this group box let you control how the image is imported.



Current Color Palette
---------------------

If on, the active color table is imposed on the imported image. 

If off, the optimum colors for the imported image are computed and appended 
to the end of the active color table. A maximum of 240 colors are appended, 
leaving the first 16 colors in the color table intact.



Transparent Background
----------------------

If on, the image's background -- defined as all pixels with the same color 
as the upper left-most pixel -- is transparent. 



File
----

The items in this group box are analogous to the items in the Open Design 
File dialog box (File menu/Open...).

The Type field sets the image file format (see supported file formats 
(*Xref)).

Clicking Import opens the selected image -- enter a data point to define a 
corner, and another to define the opposite corner. The image is scaled as 
indicated but is placed with the correct aspect ratio.



Import > Text...
----------------

Opens the Include Text File dialog box, which is used to place text from a 
text file in the design. This lets you use a text editor or word processor 
to enter lengthy text that is to be placed in the design. The dialog box 
controls are analogous to those in the Open Design File dialog box (see 
Open...).

Key-in: INCLUDE [filename]

   If filename is omitted, the Import Text File dialog box opens.
   
Note:
To build and place commonly used text strings and combinations of text 
strings, choose Utilities > Glossary from the User menu.

   Files
   OK
   Cancel


Files
-----

TBD



OK
--

Imports the selected text file. The text displays dynamically.

Enter a data point to position the text.
*  If the file is larger than 128 lines or 2048 characters, the text is 
placed as a graphic group and the data point positions the upper left 
corner of the text block.
*  Otherwise, the text is placed as a text node and the data point 
positions the text node origin.
   
Note:
The file can include MicroStation key-in strings to set text attributes 
(such as the font, text size, line spacing, and line length). Each key-in 
string must follow a period (".") that begins a line. One key-in string is 
allowed per line. All text following a key-in string is placed with the 
specified attribute. For information about text attributes, see Text. Other 
text placement controls can be included: INDENT # indents by the specified 
number of columns. NEWGG begins a new graphic group.

>> To set the number of space characters that are substituted for each 
horizontal tab:

1. Key in ACTIVE TAB [spaces] or TB=[spaces] before opening the Include 
Text File dialog box.
   


Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without placing text.



Export > DWG or DXF...
----------------------

Opens the Save As DWG or DXF File dialog box, which lets you export the 
active design file as an AutoCAD drawing file or a DXF file and adjust 
export settings before exporting.

Note:
(identifying MDL application)

   Name
   Directory
   Filter
   Type
   Directories
   OK
   Cancel


Name
----

TBD



Directory
---------

TBD



Filter
------

TBD



Type
----

The file format to export -- DWG or DXF.



Directories
-----------

Use this list box to choose a different directory in which to save the 
exported drawing file.



OK
--

Click to open the Export Drawing File dialog box .



Cancel
------

Click if you decide not to export the design file.



Export Drawing File dialog box 
-------------------------------

The Export Drawing File dialog box has dialog boxes that can be opened from 
its menus with items for setting options for converting a design file to a 
DWG or DXF file.

   Output File
   Status
   Export
   Cancel
   File menu/Settings File>Attach...
   File menu/Settings File>Save
   File menu/Settings File>Save As...
   File menu/Log File...
   Settings menu/General...
   Settings menu/Text Fonts...
   Settings menu/Layers...
   Settings menu/Line Styles...
   Settings menu/Weight /Width...
   Settings menu/Weight / Color...


Output File
-----------

The Name, Version, and Type of the file to be exported.



Status
------

During the conversion, displays messages about its progress, which are also 
saved in the Log File (see page 10-6 in the User's Guide).



Export
------

Click to export the design file.



Cancel
------

Click if you decide not to export the design file.



File menu/Settings File>Attach...
---------------------------------

Opens the Attach Settings File dialog box, which is used to attach an 
export settings file.



File menu/Settings File>Save
----------------------------

Saves the export settings in the attached export settings file.



File menu/Settings File>Save As...
----------------------------------

Opens the Save Settings File As dialog box, which is used to save the 
export settings in a new export settings file.



File menu/Log File...
---------------------

Opens the Log File dialog box, which is used to specify an alternate Log 
File.



Settings menu/General...
------------------------

Opens the Drawing File Settings box, which is used to adjust general 
drawing file export settings.

   Version
   Translation Units
   Convert Shapes To
   Number of Colors
   Splines
   Reference File Attachments
   Clipped
   Self-Referencing
   All Other
   View


Version
-------

The exported drawing file's version, release 9, 10, or 11 or 12 (the 
release 11 and 12 formats are identical).



Translation Units
-----------------

Determines whether units in the drawing file are based on either of the 
following in the active design file
*  Master -- equates drawing units to master units.
*  Sub -- equates drawing units to sub-units.
   


Convert Shapes To
-----------------

Determines the entity type that shapes and complex shapes are converted to
*  Polylines -- When possible, closed polylines are used to represent 
shapes or complex shapes with more then four vertices. This is usually the 
best way to convert closed elements if rendering is not important. 
   If a complex shape contains elements that cannot be represented by a 
polyline (for example, curves, elliptical arcs, or NURBS curves), then it 
is broken into a series of equivalent entities and the closed area 
intelligence is lost.
*  Polyface -- Shapes or complex shapes with more than four vertices are 
broken into a series of quadrilateral faces and represented as polyface 
meshes. The interior edges are made invisible so that only the edges are 
visible (unless SPLFRAME is set to a non-zero value).
*  Polyface Mesh -- Shapes or complex shapes with more than four vertices 
are converted to a polyface mesh.
   Choose Polyface Mesh if you do not require closed elements to be 
represented by "opaque" entities. A disadvantage of polyface meshes is that 
a large amount of data is required to represent any complex area, 
particularly if the bounding elements are curved. When curved elements are 
represented as a polyface mesh, they are stroked into a series of 
approximating line segments the number of which is controlled by Splines.
   
Note:
See Differences in the way closed areas are represented for more 
information about how closed elements are represented in drawing files.



Number of Colors
----------------

Specifies the number of standard colors in the drawing file to which colors 
in the design file are automatically matched. In most cases, it should be 
set to the number of colors displayed by the system AutoCAD is run on to 
avoid greyed out entities on systems that display fewer than 255 colors.

MicroStation supports 255-color color table that can be configured for each 
design file. AutoCAD supports 255 entity colors from a single palette for 
all drawing files, the first eight of which are assigned standard meanings. 
The rest of the colors are somewhat standardized, although many graphic 
card vendors provide utilities for remapping the colors.

Note:
The design file's color table is controlled by choosing Colors > Color 
Table... from the Settings menu.



Splines
-------

You can control the value of variables that affect the display of splines 
in the exported drawing file. 

Setting:  Variable:  Controls:

Segments  SPLINESEGS Number of vertices used to 
                     approximate a curve. 

SurfU     SURFU      Number of faces used to 
                     approximate a surface 
                     (U-direction)

SurfV     SURFV      Number of faces used to 
                     approximate a surface  
                     (V-direction)



Note:
A higher value for any of these settings produces a more exact fit in the 
drawing file, but causes slower updates and increases the storage space 
required.

Hint:
To translate between MicroStation and another package that supports NURBS, 
using IGES instead of DXF usually results in a more exact translation. See 
IGES File Exchange for information about IGES.



Reference File Attachments
--------------------------

These settings control how reference file attachments are converted to 
Xrefs in the drawing file.



Clipped
-------

The options for converting clipped reference file attachments are as 
follows
*  Xref -- An Xref insert is created for each clipped reference file 
attachment. Clipping information is discarded; the receiving application 
may display elements that were clipped in the design file.
*  Merge -- Clipped reference file attachments are merged into the drawing 
file.
*  Ignore -- Clipped reference file attachments are not included in the 
drawing file.
   


Self-Referencing
----------------

The options for converting self-referencing attachments are as follows
*  Xref -- An Xref insert is created for each self-referencing attachment. 
As of this writing, Some receiving applications cannot resolve 
self-referencing Xrefs.
*  Merge -- Self-referencing attachments are merged into the drawing file.
*  Ignore -- Self-referencing attachments are not included in the drawing 
file.
   


All Other
---------

The options for converting reference file attachments that are neither 
clipped nor self-referencing are as follows
*  Xref -- Reference file attachments that are neither clipped nor 
self-referencing are converted to Xrefs. This usually works satisfactorily.
*  Merge -- Reference file attachments that are neither clipped nor 
self-referencing are merged into the drawing file.
*  Ignore -- Reference file attachments that are neither clipped nor 
self-referencing are not included in the drawing file.
   


View
----

Determines the view from which level and clipping information are used if 
reference files are merged into the drawing file; that is if Merge is 
chosen for Clipped, Self-Referencing, or All Other.

The View setting has no effect on reference file attachments that are 
converted to Xrefs. In 3D designs, the orientation of the clipping region 
depends on the orientation of the view.



Settings menu/Text Fonts...
---------------------------

Opens the Font-Text Style Mapping dialog box, which can be used to adjust 
the text style that a MicroStation Font is converted to.

Note:
If the AutoCAD text styles exist in a prototype drawing file (the 
equivalent of a MicroStation seed file), the text style properties defined 
there are used. If the text style does not exist in a prototype drawing 
file, the shape filename defaults to the style name and the other style 
settings are set to standard default values.

   Current Font Mapping
   Unnamed field
   Unnamed list box
   OK
   Cancel
   File menu/Attach
   File menu/Save
   File menu/Save As


Current Font Mapping
--------------------

Lets you select a MicroStation font to text style conversion to edit.



Unnamed field
-------------

Key in the text style to convert selected font to.



Unnamed list box
----------------

Double-click the name of the text style to convert selected font to.



OK
--






Cancel
------






File menu/Attach
----------------

Opens the Attach Font Table File dialog box, which is used to attach a font 
translation table.



File menu/Save
--------------

Saves the font mapping to the attached font translation table.



File menu/Save As
-----------------

Opens the Save Font Table File dialog box, which is used to save the font 
mapping to a new translation table.



Settings menu/Layers...
-----------------------

Opens the Level-Layer Mapping dialog box, which is used to adjust the 
mapping between MicroStation design file levels and drawing file layer 
names.

Hint:
If the levels in the design file have names, elements are placed on layers 
in the drawing file that have the same names. If you use named levels, it 
is unnecessary to use the controls in the Level-Layer Mapping dialog box, 
unless you wish to override the naming. For more information about named 
levels, see Level structure.

   Current Layer Mapping
   Unnamed field
   Unnamed list box
   Override Level Names
   OK
   Cancel
   File menu/Attach
   File menu/Save
   File menu/Save As


Current Layer Mapping
---------------------

The list box lets you select the layer that a level is converted to.

Both the level number and name (if a name exists) are displayed in the 
MicroStation column. 



Unnamed field
-------------

TBD



Unnamed list box
----------------

TBD



Override Level Names
--------------------

If on, elements on the level are placed on the corresponding mapped AutoCAD 
layer regardless of the level's name.



OK
--






Cancel
------






File menu/Attach
----------------

Opens the Attach Level Table File dialog box, which is used to attach a 
level translation table.



File menu/Save
--------------

Saves the level mapping to the attached level translation table.



File menu/Save As
-----------------

Opens the Save Level Table File As dialog box, which is used to save the 
level mapping to a new level translation table.



Settings menu/Line Styles...
----------------------------

Opens the Line Style-Linetype Mapping dialog box, which lets you to adjust 
mapping between MicroStation line styles and AutoCAD linetype names.

   Current Line Style Mapping
   Unnamed field
   Unnamed list box
   OK
   Cancel
   File menu/Attach
   Save
   Save As


Current Line Style Mapping
--------------------------

The list box lets you select a linetype to convert the layer to.



Unnamed field
-------------






Unnamed list box
----------------






OK
--






Cancel
------






File menu/Attach
----------------

Opens the Attach Style Table File dialog box, which is used to attach a 
line style translation table.



Save
----

Saves the line style mapping to the attached line style translation table.



Save As
-------

Opens the Save Style Table File As dialog box, which you use to save the 
line style mapping to a new line style translation table.



Settings menu/Weight /Width...
------------------------------

Opens the Weights dialog box, which lets you adjust the mapping between 
MicroStation line weights and polyline widths.

   Current Weight Width Mapping
   Unnamed field
   OK
   Cancel
   File menu/Attach
   File menu/Save
   File menu/Save As


Current Weight Width Mapping
----------------------------






Unnamed field
-------------






OK
--






Cancel
------






File menu/Attach
----------------

Opens the Attach Weights File dialog box, which lets you attach a weights 
translation table.



File menu/Save
--------------

Saves the weights mapping to the attached weights translation table.



File menu/Save As
-----------------

Opens the Save Weights File As dialog box, which lets you save the weights 
mapping to a new weights translation table.



Settings menu/Weight / Color...
-------------------------------

Opens the Weight/Color dialog box, which lets you adjust the mapping 
between MicroStation line weights and drawing file colors.

   Current Weight Color Mapping
   Unnamed field
   OK
   Cancel
   File menu/Attach
   File menu/Save
   File menu/Save As


Current Weight Color Mapping
----------------------------






Unnamed field
-------------






OK
--






Cancel
------






File menu/Attach
----------------

Opens the Attach Weight/Color Table File dialog box, which lets you attach 
a weight to color translation table.



File menu/Save
--------------

Saves the weights mapping to the attached weights translation table.



File menu/Save As
-----------------

Opens the Save Weight/Color Table File As dialog box, which lets you save 
the weight to color mapping to a new weight to color translation table.



Export > IGES...
----------------

TBD

Note:
(identifying MDL application)



Export IGES File dialog box
---------------------------

The Export IGES File dialog box and the dialog boxes that can be opened 
from its menus let you set IGES export settings. 

   Filename
   Author
   Organization
   Product Name
   Drafting Standard
   Measuring System
   IGES Version
   Name
   Decimal Accuracy
   Settings File
   Reference Files
   Translation Units
   Scale Factor
   Stroke Tolerance
   Maximum Line Width
   Flattening
   Fence Contents
   Standard Colors
   Default Drawing
   File menu/Settings File/Attach...
   File menu/Settings File/Save
   File menu/Settings File/Save As...
   File menu/Log File...
   File menu/Export As...
   File menu/Start Section File...
   Settings menu/Cell Names...
   Settings menu/Exclude IGES Entities...
   Settings menu/Text Fonts...
   Settings menu/Levels...
   Settings menu/Line Styles...
   Settings menu/Start Section...


Filename
--------

The directory and filename that the IGES file will be saved in. By default, 
the filename is the design file name with the extension ".igs." A different 
directory and filename can be specified by choosing Export As from the File 
menu.



Author
------

The name of the person responsible for the creation of the data in the 
file. 



Organization
------------

The author's organization, group, or company. 



Product Name
------------

The name of the product. 



Drafting Standard
-----------------

Choose the desired drafting standard from the option menu.



Measuring System
----------------

Choose the desired measuring system from the option menu. 



IGES Version
------------

The version of IGES (4.0 or 5.0) for the exported IGES file. 

IGES Version 4.0 does not support copious data entities (type 106) in 
composite curves. This makes it necessary to translate line strings in 
complex chains as multiple line entities (type 110). In IGES Version 5.0, 
this restriction is removed, allowing more compact translation of line 
strings in complex chains. This is the only difference between choosing 
IGES version 4.0 or version 5.0.



Name
----

Name of the measuring system in the IGES file.



Decimal Accuracy
----------------

Accuracy in number of decimal places with which coordinates from the design 
file are stored in the IGES file. 

By default, Decimal Accuracy is set so that the maximum error is less than 
1 positional unit. Changing this value is usually not necessary. See 
Working units for more information about how MicroStation defines 
coordinates.



Settings File
-------------

Path and filename of the attached export settings file. To attach a 
different export settings file, choose File menu/Settings File/Attach....



Reference Files
---------------

Two options are available for translating reference files
*  Ignore -- any attached reference files are not translated and no 
attachment information is saved in the IGES file.
*  Merge -- all reference file information is merged into the IGES file.
   


Translation Units
-----------------

You can select whether to equate IGES file units to either the master units 
or sub-units of the active design file. 

For example, to export an architectural design with master units of feet 
and sub-units of inches to an IGES file with file units of inches, set 
Translation Units to Sub-Units.

Note:
IGES has no equivalent for MicroStation sub-units.



Scale Factor
------------

Applied to all exported elements. This can be used to tailor the 
translation to create geometry for target systems that read data at a 
different scale or in a different coordinate system. 

By default, set to 1.0 (no scaling).



Stroke Tolerance
----------------

The maximum deviation, in Translation Units, between the actual curve and 
the approximating line segments for arc, curve, B-spline curve, or B-spline 
surface entities, if they are excluded.

If any of these IGES entities are excluded in the Exclude IGES Entities 
dialog box (opened by choosing Settings menu/Exclude IGES Entities... in 
the Export IGES File dialog box), they are approximated by line segments, 
referred to as strokes, in line string or shape elements.

If stroke      Number of      Approximation 
tolerance is:  segments is:[a]quality:

Decreased      Increased      Finer

Increased      Reduced        Coarser

[a]And also, of course, the size of the design file.
   
Note:
See Excluding IGES entities for more information about excluding IGES 
entities.



Maximum Line Width
------------------

The IGES line thickness in millimeters (mm) that is assigned to 
MicroStation line weight 31. The other line weights are assigned 
thicknesses that are proportional to this value. For example, if Maximum 
Line Width is set to 5 mm (the default, about 0.2"), lines of weight 31 and 
15 in the design file are 5.0 mm and 2.5 mm thick, respectively, in the 
IGES file.

MicroStation line weights are not associated with a specific thickness, but 
instead determine the relative line weight of a line with respect to other 
line weight values. This lets line weight display be tailored to the 
display hardware. In contrast, line weights in IGES are specified by the 
actual line thickness.



Flattening
----------

Lets you translate a 3D design file to a 2D IGES file. Flattening is 
necessary if the receiving application does not support 3D.
*  None -- Perform no flattening and export to a 3D IGES file.
*  One of the standard 3D views (Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left, Right, or 
Iso) can be chosen to flatten the design file in that orientation. 
   
This item is dimmed if the active design file is 2D.



Fence Contents
--------------

If a fence is active, Fence Contents is on by default and only the fence 
contents are exported. The fence contents are determined by the Fence 
(Selection) Mode.

If Fence Contents is off, the entire design file is exported.



Standard Colors
---------------

If on, the color of each element in the design file is mapped to the 
closest IGES standard color.

IGES       
Standard 
Colors

1. Black   5. Yellow

2. Red     6. Magenta

3. Green   7. Cyan

4. Blue    8. White



Standard Colors should only be turned off if the receiving system supports 
the IGES color definition entity (type 314). If Standard Colors is turned 
off, each color in the active color table is mapped to a color in the IGES 
color definition entity.



Default Drawing
---------------

If on, a default drawing (type 404) and view entity (type 410) are added to 
the IGES file. These entities are required for CALS-compliant IGES files 
(see Exporting CALS-compliant IGES files for more information) and by some 
receiving systems.



File menu/Settings File/Attach...
---------------------------------

Opens the Attach Settings File dialog box, which is used to attach an 
export settings file.



File menu/Settings File/Save
----------------------------

Saves the export settings in the attached export settings file.



File menu/Settings File/Save As...
----------------------------------

Opens the Save Settings File dialog box, which lets you save the export 
settings in a new export settings file.

Note:
If "cals1.sfo" or "cals2.sfo" is chosen, a CALS-compliant IGES file is 
exported. See Exporting CALS-compliant IGES files.



File menu/Log File...
---------------------

Opens the Log File dialog box, which is used to specify an alternate Log 
File.



File menu/Export As...
----------------------

Opens the Export IGES File As dialog box, which is used to specify the file 
and directory into which the IGES file is saved.

By default, the IGES file is saved in the directory pointed to by the 
MS_IGESOUT configuration variable with the same filename as the design file 
and the extension ".igs." 



File menu/Start Section File...
-------------------------------

Opens the Select Start Section File dialog box, which is used to designate 
a text file as the IGES file's Start section .



Settings menu/Cell Names...
---------------------------

Opens the Cell Names dialog box, which can be used to customize how 
MicroStation cell names are translated to IGES subfigure names.

Note:
See Converting subfigure names for general information about converting 
between cell and subfigure names.

   Cell Name
   Subfigure Name
   Delete
   Add
   Done


Cell Name
---------

The MicroStation cell name to convert. Key in a cell name in the text entry 
field below the list box.



Subfigure Name
--------------

The IGES subfigure name to convert the cell name to. Key in a name to map 
in the text entry field below the list box.



Delete
------

Click to delete the selected cell name conversion.



Add
---

Click to add the cell name conversion.



Done
----

Click when you are finished.



Settings menu/Exclude IGES Entities...
--------------------------------------

Opens the Exclude IGES Entities dialog box, which is used to exclude entity 
types that are not supported by the receiving application. 

If an entity type is excluded, it is approximated with an alternate entity. 
If an appropriate alternate entity does not exist or is excluded, the 
entity is omitted from the IGES file and a warning is inserted in the Log 
File.

Note:
See Excluding IGES entities and Alternate entities for excluded IGES 
entities (export) for more information about exlcuding IGES entities.

   Exclude
   Include
   Done


Exclude
-------

Click to exclude the entity type that is selected in the Included Entities 
list box, or double-click the entity type.



Include
-------

Click to include the entity type that is selected in the Excluded Entities 
list box, or double-click the entity type.



Done
----

Click when you are finished.



Settings menu/Text Fonts...
---------------------------

Opens the Text Fonts dialog box, which is used to define the mapping 
between MicroStation and IGES text font numbers.

By default, the MicroStation fonts 100-102 are translated as graphic 
entities in the IGES file. Blank enter data fields are exported as underbar 
"_" characters.

   uSTN Font(s)
   Min(imum)
   Max(imum)
   IGES Font
   Stroke
   Delete
   Add
   Done


uSTN Font(s)
------------

List of MicroStation fonts that are mapped.



Min(imum)
---------

Key in the MicroStation font number or the minimum of a range of 
MicroStation font numbers.



Max(imum)
---------

If desired, key in the maximum of a range of MicroStation font numbers.



IGES Font
---------

Key in the IGES font number.



Stroke
------

If on, text is in this MicroStation font(s) is converted to graphic 
entities in the IGES file.



Delete
------

Click to delete the selected font mapping.



Add
---

Click to add the specified font mapping to the list.



Done
----

Click when you are finished.

Note:
For general infomation about about converting text fonts between 
MicroStation and IGES files, see Converting text.



Settings menu/Levels...
-----------------------

Opens the Levels dialog box, which is used to specify mappings between 
levels in the design file and the exported IGES file.

   Min(imum)
   Max(imum)
   IGES Level
   Delete
   Add
   Done


Min(imum)
---------

Key in the MicroStation level or the minimum of a range of MicroStation 
levels.



Max(imum)
---------

If desired, key in the maximum of a range of levels.



IGES Level
----------

Key in the IGES level number to which to map the level(s).



Delete
------

Click to delete the selected level mapping.



Add
---

Click to add the specified level mapping to the list.



Done
----

Click when you are finished.



Settings menu/Line Styles...
----------------------------

Opens the Line Styles dialog box, which is used to adjust the mapping from 
the eight MicroStation line styles to the six IGES line font patterns.



Settings menu/Start Section...
------------------------------

Opens the Start Section dialog box, which is used to edit the text that 
goes into the IGES file's start section. If a start section file is 
selected, its contents are displayed and can be edited. 

Editing functions are the same as those in MicroStation's Text Editor 
window (*Xref).

Changes made in the Start Section dialog box are not saved. Start section 
files can be permanently customized using a text editor outside of 
MicroStation. This is useful if your organization has a standard start 
section that is customized slightly (for example, the drawing's name 
entered) for each IGES file.



Export > CGM...
---------------

TBD

Note:
(identiying MDL application)



Export CGM File dialog box
--------------------------

Lets you adjust CGM export settings.

   CGM File
   Version
   Description
   Settings File
   Translation Units
   VDC Type
   Integer Precision
   VDC Integer Precision
   Splines
   Color Mode
   View
   Number of Colors
   Real Format
   VDC Real Format
   Export
   Cancel


CGM File
--------

The CGM file's name and directory.



Version
-------

CGM Version 1.0 is supported.



Description
-----------

A description can be saved in the CGM. By default, the description is 
"Created in MicroStation." If desired, you can key in your own description.



Settings File
-------------

The active CGM export settings file. See *Xref for information about how to 
specify a different export settings file.



Translation Units
-----------------

You can select whether units in the CGM file are based on either
*  Master -- equates CGM units to the master units of the active design 
file.
*  Sub -- equates CGM units to sub-units of the active design file.
   


VDC Type
--------

The virtual device coordinates -- 2D Cartesian coordinates -- in the CGM 
file can be Integer or Real.



Integer Precision
-----------------

TBD



VDC Integer Precision
---------------------

TBD



Splines
-------

These settings control how B-splines are translated to the CGM file. 

Setting:  Variable:  Controls:

Segments  SPLINESEGS Number of vertices used to 
                     approximate a curve. 

SurfU     SURFU      Number of faces used to 
                     approximate a surface 
                     (U-direction)

SurfV     SURFV      Number of faces used to 
                     approximate a surface  
                     (V-direction)





Color Mode
----------

Can be one of the following
*  Index
*  Direct
   


View
----

In 3D, the view that determines the design file orientation that is used in 
the CGM picture.



Number of Colors
----------------

TBD



Real Format
-----------

Can be one of the following
*  Float -- TBD
*  Fixed -- TBD
   


VDC Real Format
---------------

Can be one of the following
*  Float -- TBD
*  Fixed -- TBD
   


Export
------

Click to export the design file to a CGM file.



Cancel
------

Click if you decide not to export the design file.



Export > 2D...
--------------

(3D only) Opens the Save 3D As 2D dialog box, which is used to save the 
active 3D design file or attached 3D cell library (if any) as a 2D design 
file. The results of 3D to 2D file translation are covered in *Xref in the 
User's Guide. 

Note:
If the active design file is 2D, this item is Export > 3D....

Note:
The Save 3D as 2D dialog box is part of the MDL application "cnvdgn.ma," 
which loads when 2D or 3D is chosen from the File menu's Export sub-menu.

   File Information
   Source
   View
   Reference Files
   OK
   Cancel


File Information
----------------

The default destination directory for the new file is pointed to by the 
MS_DEF configuration variable. This can be changed in the Directories list 
box.



Source
------

Sets the type of file to convert
*  Design File -- The active design file.
*  Attached Cell Library -- the active cell library.
   


View
----

Sets the view that determines the orientation of the design plane upon 
which 3D elements are projected.



Reference Files
---------------

Controls the conversion of reference files
*  No Conversion -- Attache reference files are not converted and 
attachment information is discarded.
*  Merge Attached Files -- Elements in attached reference files are 
translated and merged into the 2D design file.


OK
--

Creates the 2D design file or cell library. The source 3D design file 
remains active.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without exporting to 2D.



Export > 3D...
--------------

(2D only) Opens the Save 2D As 3D dialog box, which is used to save the 
active 2D design file or active cell library (if any) as a 3D file. The 
results of 2D to 3D file translation are covered in "*Xref" in the user's 
guide. 

Note:
If the active design file is 3D, this item is Export > 2D....

Note:
The Save 2D as 3D dialog box is part of the MDL application, 
"cnvdgn.ma,"which loads when 3D or 2D is chosen from the file menu's Export 
sub-menu.

   File Information
   Source
   View Orientation
   Z Depth Options
   Reference Files
   Maintain Reference File Type
   OK
   Cancel


File Information
----------------

The default destination directory for the new file is pointed to by the 
MS_DEF configuration variable. This can be changed in the Directories list 
box.



Source
------

Sets the type of file to convert
*  Design File -- The active design file
*  Attached Cell Library -- the active cell library.
   


View Orientation
----------------

Sets the views that determines the orientation of the plane on which 2D 
elements are placed.



Z Depth Options
---------------

Each converted element is placed along the Z-axis of the Top view at a 
depth that can be the same or vary from element to element. 

To specify a fixed depth, choose Fixed from the option menu and key in the 
depth, in working units (MU:SU:PU), in the value field. The default depth 
is 0:0:0--the center of the design cube. Choosing Contour Z Low or Contour 
Z High from the option menu fixes the depth for all elements at the design 
file's lower or upper Z contour limit. These limits equal the bottom and 
top of the design cube, respectively, unless modified with EdG (*XRef) or 
by an application.

Choosing Element Z Low or Element Z High places each converted element at 
the depth that equals its lower or upper Z range limit. These limits equal 
the bottom and top of the design cube, respectively, unless modified with 
the EdG (*XRef) utility or by an application.



Reference Files
---------------

Controls the conversion of reference files into the new design file. 
*  No Conversion -- reference files are not converted and reference file 
attachment information is discarded.
*  Merge Attached Files -- attached reference file information is 
translated and merged into the output 3D design file.
*  Convert Attachment Info -- allows the conversion of the reference file 
attachment information (type 5 level 9 and type 66 level 5 elements).
*  Convert Attached Files -- all attached reference files are converted 
from 2D to 3D and you are prompted for new names to be associated with the 
converted reference files
   


Maintain Reference File Type
----------------------------

Controls the conversion of reference file attachment information. Enabled 
if Reference Files is set to Convert Attachment Info.
*  If on, reference file attachment information is converted to indicate 
that the reference files attached to the output 3D file are 2D design 
files.
*  If off, reference file attachment information is converted to indicate 
that the reference files attached to the 2D design file are 3D design 
files. The attached reference files must be converted separately. If this 
is not done, MicroStation will treat the attached reference files as 3D 
even though they are in fact 2D design files, yielding unpredictable 
results.
   


OK
--

Creates the 3D design file or cell library. The source 2D design file 
remains active.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without exporting to 3D.



Export > RIB
------------

Opens the RenderMan settings box, which is used to save the contents of a 
view in a RenderMan Interface Bytestream (RIB) file for rendering with a 
RenderMan-compatible package. This item is dimmed if the active design file 
is not 3D.

Key-in: 

Note:
(identifying "rman.ma")

   Render Options
   Generate Shadow Maps 
   Stroke Linear Elements 
   Shading Prefs
   Format
   View
   Resolution
   Create RIB Output


Render Options
--------------

Contains controls used to specify TBD.



Generate Shadow Maps 
---------------------

If on, a shadow map is generated for the solar light source, if present, 
and for each distant and spot light cell that has a filename in its 
ShadowMap field. The renderer uses shadow maps to determine if surfaces are 
illuminated by the light source(s) or are in the shadow of other objects.

The shadow map for the solar light source is named "filename.sun." Shadow 
maps are saved in the directory pointed to by the RMAN_SHADERS 
configuration variable. If RMAN_SHADERS is not defined, shadow maps are 
saved in the directory pointed to by MS_SCR.

Once shadow maps are created, they need to be regenerated only if a light 
source in the source view is moved or the model is changed. Otherwise, 
Generate Shadow Maps should be turned off.



Stroke Linear Elements 
-----------------------

If on, open elements such as text, lines, and line strings are rendered. If 
off, open elements (those that do not define a closed polygon or a surface) 
do not appear in the rendered image. Rendering open elements is a slow 
process that uses a lot of disk space. 

Hint:
If you want to render objects that would normally be drawn as open 
elements, it is better to redraw them as polygons or surfaces.



Shading Prefs
-------------

Opens the RMan Shading Prefs (RenderMan Shading Preferences) settings box, 
which is used to set shading preferences

   Shading Rate
   Pixel Sample
   Bucket Size
   Shadow Map
   Eye Splits
   Texture Mem(ory), KB
   Grid Size
   Shading Type 
   Hider
   Quick Set


Shading Rate
------------

Sets the shading frequency per pixel. A value of 1 computes shading once 
for each pixel. Values less than 1 are rarely useful.



Pixel Sample
------------

Sets the TBD. 

Controls hidden surface anti-aliasing (between 1x1 and 8x8).



Bucket Size
-----------

Sets the size of the image chunks that are processed at once (between 2x2 
and 32x32).



Shadow Map
----------

Sets the shadow map resolution. High resolution shadow maps greatly improve 
image quality but take more processing time and increase file size (to 
about 4 MB for a 1024x1024 shadow map).



Eye Splits
----------

Sets the number of smaller pieces into which objects that cross the camera 
plane are split. A high value splits objects that cross the camera plane 
more precisely but substantially increases processing time. The minimum 
number of eye splits is 1 and the practical maximum is 10.



Texture Mem(ory), KB
--------------------

Sets the amount of memory for texture cache (32-8192 KB).



Grid Size
---------

Sets the amount of geometry, in micropolygons, that is rendered at a time 
(9-1024).



Shading Type 
-------------

Sets the shading method--Smooth (Gouraud) or Constant.



Hider
-----

Hidden or zBuffer. If there are no transparent surfaces and no motion blur, 
a Z-buffered hidden surface algorithm is more efficient than the standard 
stochastic "hidden" algorithm.



Quick Set
---------

The Quick Set buttons change the settings in the RenderMan Shading 
Preferences settings box to common ones for draft or presentation purposes. 

   Draft -- settings appropriate for a draft-quality images. These are good 
to use for creating test images, since images are produced much faster with 
the Draft settings.
   Presentation -- settings appropriate for final presentation images.
   


Format
------

The following choices send output to a file

File           Default File Format

TIFF           Tagged Image File Format

PostScript     Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

Color PostScripEncapsulated Color PostScript

ModelView RGB  Intergraph ModelView RGB



The following choices send output to a screen:

File           Default File Format

Frame Buffer   Adapter defined in /
               displaytype/framebuffer 

Targa          TrueVision Targa 

Vista          TrueVision Vista 

VGA            IBM VGA**


RIB files can be created in ASCII or binary format. ASCII files are easy to 
read and edit but are substantially larger than binary files.



View
----

Sets the source view used to create the RIB file.



Resolution
----------

Sets the resolution, in pixels, of the image. 
   X -- Horizontal resolution
   Y -- Vertical resolution. 
   
Because the image's aspect ratio is determined by the source view, these 
fields are not independent. Changing one automatically updates the other. 
If set to zero, the image resolution is determined by the default 
resolution of the output driver (640x480 for standard VGA).



Create RIB Output
-----------------

Click to opens the Save RIB File dialog box, which lets you save the View 
as RIB file. 

   Name
   Directories
   OK
   Cancel


Name
----

By default, the view contents are specified to be saved in the file that 
has the same name as the active design file with the ending ".rib" 
substituted for ".dgn."



Directories
-----------

The default destination directory is pointed to by the MS_SCR configuration 
variable. This can be changed in the list box.



OK
--

Click to create the RIB file.



Cancel
------

Click to close the Save RIB File dialog box without creating a RIB file.



Export > Visible Edges
----------------------

Opens the Visible Edge File Generation dialog box, which is used to export 
a view's visible edges.

This item is dimmed if the active design file is not 3D.

Hint:
Visible edges design file creation is much faster if adequate memory is 
available, especially if the design is large or has many curved surfaces. 
The amount of memory used is difficult to quantify exactly, since the 
visible edges model is stored as polygons. 

*  Example: In a visible edges model of an architectural design that 
consists mostly of flat surfaces, there is about a one-to-one 
correspondence between elements and polygons.
*  Example: In a mechanical design with many curved surfaces, where a 
single curved surface can require hundreds or thousands of polygons, 
causing even a relatively small design file to require large amounts of 
memory and processing time for visible edges design file creation.
   
Note:
Creating a visible edges design file can be time-consuming. It is faster to 
render a hidden line display at screen resolution by choosing Render > 
Hidden Line  from the View menu.

Note:
Visible edges are generated by the MDL application "edges.ma," which loads 
when Visible Edges is chosen from the File menu's Export sub-menu. 

   Settings
   View
   Rule Lines
   Calculate Intersections
   Include Hidden Edges
   Output Format
   Store in Active Design
   File Dimension
   Visible Edge Overrides
   Hidden Edge Overrides
   Export
   Cancel


Settings
--------

This controls in this group box are used to set the view and whether to 
draw rule lines, intersections, or hidden edges.



View
----

Sets the view that determines the orientation of the visible edges.



Rule Lines
----------

TBD



Calculate Intersections
-----------------------

If on, intersections between elements are automatically calculated in the 
visible edges design file. This significantly increases processing time. 
Off is the default.



Include Hidden Edges
--------------------

If on, hidden edges are drawn. The Hidden Edge Overrides group box appears 
at the bottom of the dialog box, with controls to set the Level, Color, 
Line Style, or Line Weight of the hidden edges.



Output Format
-------------

The controls in this group box set whether the visble edges are stored in 
the model file or another design file and whether that design file is 2D or 
3D.



Store in Active Design
----------------------

If on, the visible edges are saved in the model file (the active design 
file).

If off, a visible edges design file is generated.

The visible edges can be saved in a 2D or 3D design file. The dimension is 
chosen from the File Dimension option menu.



File Dimension
--------------

Sets whether the exported visible edges design file is either 2D or 3D (the 
default).


Visible Edge Overrides
----------------------

The Level, Color, Line Style, or Line Weight of the hidden edges can be 
changed by the override controls that resemble those in the Element 
Attributes settings box.

If the check button to the left of a control is on, the corresponding 
setting is effective for all hidden edges. If the check button is off, the 
corresponding attribute is saved as is, and the control is dimmed.



Hidden Edge Overrides
---------------------

The Level, Color, Line Style, or Line Weight of the hidden edges can be 
changed by the override controls that resemble those in the Element 
Attributes settings box.

If the check button to the left of a control is on, the corresponding 
setting is effective for all hidden edges. If the check button is off, the 
corresponding attribute is saved as is, and the control is dimmed.



Export
------

Creates the visible edges design file.

If Store in Active Design is off, the Save Visible Edges Design File dialog 
box opens. By default, the visible edges design file has the same name as 
the active design file with the ending ".hln" substituted for ".dgn" in the 
directory is pointed to by the MS_DEF configuration variable

The controls in the Save Visible Edges Design File dialog box are similar 
to those in the Save Design File dialog box, which is opened by choosing 
Save As... from the File menu. 



Cancel
------

Click to close either dialog box without creating a visible edges design 
file.



Display > Image...
------------------

Opens the Display Image File dialog box, which lets you display a bitmapped 
(raster) image in a window.

   Name
   Directory
   Filter
   Type
   Directories
   Display
   Cancel


Name
----

The image file's name.



Directory
---------

By default, the directory pointed to by the MS_SCR configuration variable. 



Filter
------

TBD



Type
----

Sets the image file format.



Directories
-----------

You can select a different directory.



Display
-------

Opens a window in which the selected image is displayed.

An image can take several moments to fully display. To stop an image from 
displaying after it has started, Reset.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without displaying an image.

Key-in: DIALOG IMAGE [rgbFile]

If rgbFile is omitted, the Display Image File dialog box opens.



Display > Movie...
------------------

Opens the Movies window, which is used to play back an animated sequence.

Note:
(identifying "movies.ma")

   Stop (||) button
   Play (>) button
   File menu/Load...
   File menu/Preview...
   File menu/Save As...
   Edit menu/Delete Frame
   Edit menu/Insert Frame...
   Edit menu/Insert Sequence...
   Settings menu/Playback
   Settings menu/Editing


Stop (||) button
----------------

Stops playback of a sequence.



Play (>) button
---------------

Plays back the loaded sequence.



File menu/Load...
-----------------

Opens the Load Movie dialog box, which is used to load a sequence. Its 
controls are analogous to those in the Open Design File dialog box (see 
Open...).



File menu/Preview...
--------------------

Opens the Preview Movie dialog box, which is used to preview a sequence. 
Its controls are analogous to those in the Open Design File dialog box (see 
Open...).



File menu/Save As...
--------------------

Opens the Save Movie As dialog box, which is used to save changes to the 
current sequence. Its controls are analogous to those in the Save Design As 
dialog box (see Save As...).



Edit menu/Delete Frame
----------------------

Deletes the current frame. 



Edit menu/Insert Frame...
-------------------------

Opens the Open Frame dialog box, which is used to insert a frame in the 
current sequence. Its controls are analogous to those in the Open Design 
File dialog box.



Edit menu/Insert Sequence...
----------------------------

Opens the Open Sequence dialog box, which is used to insert another 
sequence in the current sequence. Its controls are analogous to those in 
the Open Design File dialog box.



Settings menu/Playback
----------------------

Opens the Movie Playback Settings box, which is used to adjust settings 
that affect movie playback.

   Speed (Ticks/Frame)
   Loop Sequence


Speed (Ticks/Frame)
-------------------

Sets the amount of time, in 1/60 second ticks, that each frame in a 
sequence is displayed during playback. The fastest playback speed setting 
is 60 frames per second. However, the actual playback speed possible on 
your system depends upon the speed of its CPU, the speed of the graphics 
adapter, and the amount of information that changes between frames.



Loop Sequence
-------------

If on, the sequence is continually played.



Settings menu/Editing
---------------------

Opens the Movie Edit Settings box, which is used to adjust settings that 
affect movie editing.

   Type
   Frames
   Still


Type
----

Sets the manner in which a sequence is joined when it is inserted into the 
current sequence.
*  Cut -- The sequences are joined without any transition frames; the 
current sequence "cuts" immediately to the inserted sequence.
*  Horizontal Wipe -- The inserted sequence is "wiped" horizontally onto 
the current sequence.
   
*  Vertical Wipe -- The inserted sequence is "wiped" vertically onto the 
current sequence.
*  Fade -- The current sequence fades out and the inserted sequence fades 
in.


Frames
------

Sets the number of transition frames, which determines the duration of a 
wipe or fade transition. The more transition frames, the slower and more 
gradual the transition. A value of zero is equivalent to a cut transition.



Still
-----

If on, the sequence transition is made between the last frame of the 
current sequence and the first frame of the inserted sequence. This is 
equivalent to freezing the current sequence at the last frame and wiping or 
fading to the first frame of the new sequence. 

If off, apparent motion continues, and the beginning and end of the joined 
sequences overlap during the transition.



Display > Text...
-----------------

Opens the Display Text File dialog box, which is used to display text from 
an ASCII file in a window that has controls for scrolling. The dialog box 
controls are analogous to those in the Open Design File dialog box (see 
Open...).

Key-in: TYPE [filename] or DR=[filename]

If filename is omitted, the Display Text File dialog box opens.

   Files
   Filter
   Directories
   OK
   Cancel


Files
-----

The files listed are in the current working directory.



Filter
------

A file filter can be specified in the field. 



Directories
-----------

Use the list box to choose a different directory.



OK
--

Opens a window in which the selected text is displayed.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without displaying text.



Save Image As...
----------------

Opens the Save Image dialog box, which is used to save the contents of a 
shaded view to a file.

You can save multiple shaded views on most systems. See *Xref in 
"Introducing MicroStation" for more information.

Key-in: 

   View
   Format
   Mode
   Shading
   Resolution
   Anti-alias
   Stereo
   Save
   Cancel


View
----

Sets the source view.



Format
------

Sets the image file format.



Mode
----

TBD



Shading
-------

Sets the shading method -- constant, smooth (Gouraud), or Phong. See *Xref 
in UG for information about rendering methods.



Resolution
----------

Sets the resolution, in pixels, at which to save the image. When you set 
the X or Y resolution, Y or X is automatically adjusted to match the view 
aspect ratio.



Anti-alias
----------

If on, the image is anti-aliased (see Phong Anti-aliased shading).



Stereo
------

If on, a stereo (*Xref) image is produced.



Save
----

Click to open the Save Image As dialog box, which lets you save the image 
file. 

   Name
   Directories


Name
----

By default, the image is saved in the file with the same name as the active 
design file with the standard suffix for the selected Format substituted 
for ".dgn." 



Directories
-----------

The default destination directory is pointed to by the MS_SCR configuration 
variable.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without creating an image field.



#
-

<filename>:Opens the specified design file. There are menu items for each 
of as many as the last four opened design files.



Exit
----

Exits MicroStation.

To save settings changes in the design file, you must choose Save Settings 
from the File menu before exiting.

Key-in: EXIT























Edit Menu
---------

The Edit menu has items for undoing and redoing changes to the design or a 
text field. There are also items for cutting and pasting text, defining and 
discontinuing groups, and locking and unlocking elements.

To:                      Select in the Edit 
                         menu:

Negate (undo) the last drUndo (action)
operation.

Undo drawing operations  Undo Other > To Mark
performed after a mark was set.

Undo all of the drawing  Undo Other > All
operations recorded in the undo 
buffer.

Negate the effect of the Redo (action)
undo operation. 

Set a mark in the undo buSet Mark
back to which subsequent 
drawing operations can be 
negated.

Remove (cut) the selectedCut
element(s) and put them on the 
Clipboard for subsequent 
pasting.[a] 

Copy the selected elementCopy
the Clipboard for subsequent 
pasting.a

Copy the Clipboard contenPaste
the design.a

Delete selected elements Clear
the design without putting them 
on the Clipboard. 

Duplicate each selected  Duplicate
element.

Select or locate elementsSelect By
on element type, level, 
symbology, properties, class, 
or tag values.

Select all elements in thSelect All
design.

Find text in text elementReplace Text
replace it with different text.

Consolidate selected elemGroup
into a group for manipulation 
as a single entity.

Discontinue selected grouUngroup

Lock selected elements.  Lock

Unlock selected locked   Unlock
elements.

Display the Clipboard    Show Clipboard
contents.a

[a]Cut, Copy, Paste, and Show Clipboard use the system Clipboard, if one 
exists, and may not operate exactly as described here. For information 
about Clipboard operations on your system, see *Xref in Introducing 
MicroStation. The descriptions here assume the system does not have a 
Clipboard and the operations use MicroStation's "private Clipboard."
   
   Undo (action)
   Undo Other > To Mark
   Undo Other > All
   Redo (action)
   Set Mark
   Cut
   Copy
   Paste
   Clear
   Duplicate
   Select By
   Replace Text
   Select All
   Group
   Ungroup
   Lock
   Unlock
   Show Clipboard


Undo (action)
-------------

Negates the last drawing operation. The tool used to perform the operation 
is shown (for example, Undo place line).

You cannot undo the following:
*  Reference file operations.
*  Settings changes or Save Settings.
   
After you undo a drawing operation, the operation previous to the negated 
operation can be undone. You can, therefore, undo a series of previous 
operations by repeatedly choosing Undo. The size of the undo buffer 
determines how many operations can be negated.

Note:
To negate the last undo operation, choose Redo (action) from the Edit menu.

Note:
To undo a text editing action in a single line field of a settings box or 
dialog box, press <Ctrl-Z>.

Key-in: UNDO

If you know how many drawing operations you want to undo, key in UNDO n, 
where n is the number of operations.



Undo Other > To Mark
--------------------

Negates drawing operations performed after a mark was set by choosing Set 
Mark from the Edit menu.

Key-in: UNDO MARK



Undo Other > All
----------------

Opens an alert box that lets you negate all of the drawing operations 
recorded in the undo buffer (*XRef).

Key-in: UNDO ALL

Note:
To undo the last viewing operation, choose Previous from the View menu.



Redo (action)
-------------

Negates the last undo operation. The tool used to perform the redoable 
operation is shown (for example, Redo place line).

You can redo a series of negated operations by repeatedly choosing Redo.

Key-in: REDO

Note:
Each undo operation is a single redoable operation regardless of the number 
of negated drawing operations. For example, the following sequence of 
key-ins does not change the design at all:

Key-in: UNDO 2 UNDO 4 REDO REDO



Set Mark
--------

Sets a mark in the undo buffer back to which subsequent drawing operations 
can be undone by choosing Undo Other > To Mark from the Edit menu. 

Consider setting a mark after you complete part of a drawing.

Key-in: MARK



Cut
---

Removes (cuts) the selected element(s) to the Clipboard for subsequent 
pasting (from the Edit menu, choose Paste). The element(s) remain on the 
Clipboard until another Cut or Copy is performed.

Cut is dimmed if no elements are selected.

Note:
In the Text Editor window, you can cut selected text by pressing <Ctrl-X>.

Key-in: DMSG CLIPBOARD CUT



Copy
----

Copies the selected element(s) to the Clipboard for subsequent pasting 
(from the Edit menu, choose Paste). The element(s) remain on the Clipboard 
until another Copy or Cut is performed.

Copy is dimmed if no elements are selected.

Note:
In the Text Editor window, you can copy selected text by pressing <Ctrl-C>.

Key-in: DMSG CLIPBOARD COPY



Paste
-----

Copies the contents of the Clipboard to the design. After choosing Paste, 
you must enter a data point to place the element(s). Because the element(s) 
remain on the Clipboard after pasting, you can paste repeatedly.

Paste is dimmed if there are no elements on the clipboard.

Note:
In the Text Editor window, you can paste text at the insertion point by 
pressing <Ctrl-V>. If any text is selected, it is replaced.

Key-in: DMSG CLIPBOARD PASTE



Clear
-----

Deletes selected elements from the design without copying them to the 
clipboard.

Clear is dimmed if no elements are selected.

Note:
In the Text Editor window, you can clear selected text by pressing 
<Delete>.

Key-in: DMSG CLIPBOARD CLEAR



Duplicate
---------

Duplicates each selected element. Each copy is located next to the 
corresponding original and is automatically selected. (The tools in the 
Manipulate Element sub-palette (*XRef) should be used for copying 
operations that require more precision.)

Duplicate is dimmed if no elements are selected.

Key-in: DUPLICATE



Select By
---------

Opens the Selector settings box, which is used to do the following, based 
on specific element type, level, symbology (attributes), properties, class, 
or tag value criteria.
*  Select elements (in a sense, extend the Element Selection tool)
*  Locate elements
*  Filter the elements that are displayed.
   
Selector settings can be saved (not yet implemented).

Key-in: MDL LOAD SELECTOR DIALOG SELECTOR

Note:
For criteria settings to be effective, the third unlabeled option menu 
under Mode must be set to On.

Note:
When you close Selector settings box, an alert box is displayed:

*  Click OK to continue to apply the Selector settings.
*  Click Cancel to unload the "selector.ma" MDL application.
   
Note:
The Selector settings box is the MDL application "selector.ma," which loads 
when Select By is chosen from the Edit menu.

   Levels
   Clear All/Select All
   Types
   Symbology
   Mode
   Execute
   Properties
   Tags
   Tools menu/Set Selector from Element
   Tools menu/Selector Save Sets... 
   Settings menu/Cell
   Settings menu/Shared Cell
   Settings menu/Text
   Settings menu/Text Node


Levels
------

Used to specify level criteria.

To toggle:             Do this:

A single level         Click the level.

Many levels at once    Drag through the level 
                       map.

A rectangular block of Press <Shift> while 
levels                 dragging.



Key-in: SELECTOR LEVEL <level_list> 



Clear All/Select All
--------------------

Turns off or on all levels in the level map.



Types
-----

Used to specify criteria based on element type

To select:             Do this:

A single type          Click the type.

Many types at once     Drag through the types.



Element type criteria can also be set with key-ins

Control     Key-in

(No type    SELECTOR TYPE NONE 
criteria)

All Types   SELECTOR TYPE ALL 

Arc         SELECTOR TYPE ARC 

B-Spline    SELECTOR TYPE BSPLINE 

B-Spline    SELECTOR TYPE BSPLINESURFACE 
Surface

Cell        SELECTOR TYPE CELLNAME <cellname> 

Complex ShapSELECTOR TYPE COMPLEXSHAPE 

Complex ChaiSELECTOR TYPE COMPLEXSTRING 

Cone        SELECTOR TYPE CONE 

Curve       SELECTOR TYPE CURVE 

Dimension   SELECTOR TYPE DIMENSION 

Ellipse     SELECTOR TYPE ELLIPSE 

Line        SELECTOR TYPE LINE 

Line String SELECTOR TYPE LINESTRING 

Multi-line  SELECTOR TYPE MULTILINE 

Raster      SELECTOR TYPE RASTER 

Shape       SELECTOR TYPE SHAPE 

Shared Cell SELECTOR TYPE SHAREDCELL <cell_name> 

Solid       SELECTOR TYPE SOLID 

Surface     SELECTOR TYPE SURFACE 

Text        SELECTOR TYPE TEXT 

Text Node   SELECTOR TYPE TEXTNODE 

:



Symbology
---------

Used to specify criteria based on element color, (numbered) line style, and 
line weight.

Note:
These controls operate the same way as the analogous controls in the 
Element Attributes settings box, which is opened by choosing Attributes 
from the Element menu.

Element symbology criteria can also be set with key-ins:

Control     Key-in

Color       SELECTOR COLOR <color> 

Style       SELECTOR STYLE <line_style> 

Weight      SELECTOR WEIGHT <line_weight> 





Mode
----

Three unlabeled option menus control the following

Option      Description:
menu:

Top         Controls which elements are selected, 
            displayed, or located when the Execute 
            button is clicked.Inclusive -- All 
            elements that match search 
            criteria.Exclusive -- All elements that 
            do not match search criteria.

Middle      Contols how criteria are used for when 
            the Execute button is clicked:Selection 
            -- Elements are selected based on 
            Selector criteria.[a]Location -- Filters 
            location of elements based on Selector 
            criteria.Display -- Filters display of 
            elements based on Selector criteria.

Bottom      If set to On, Selector criteria are 
            effective. If set to Off, Selector 
            criteria are ignored.

[a]To graphically select individual elements, use the Element Selection 
tool (*XRef).
   
Key-in: SELECTOR MODE [INCLUSIVE | EXCLUSIVE] SELECTOR OPTIONS [SELECTION | 
LOCATION | DISPLAY]



Execute
-------

Selects, Locates, or Displays elements in accordance with the specified 
search criteria and Mode.

Note:
For criteria settings to be effective, the bottommost unlabeled option menu 
under Mode must be set to On.

Key-in: SELECTOR ON



Properties
----------

Opens the Select Properties settings box, which is used to specify criteria 
based on less promintent element attributes, such as area and class.

   Properties
   Select All/Clear All
   Class


Properties
----------

This group box has controls for specifying criteria based on element 
properties.

Option menu:    Criteria specified:

1               Filled or Not Filled

2.              Solid or Hole
(Area)

3.              Snappable or Nonsnappable

4.              Planar or Nonplanar

5.              View-dependent or 
                View-independent

6.              No Attributes or Attributes

7.              Not Modified or Modified

8.              New or Not New

9.              Not Locked or Locked



Note:
For more information about element properties, see *Xref: Development & 
Support Guide.

Key-in: SELECTOR PROPERTIES <ALL | NONE | NONFILLED | FILLED | SOLID | HOLE 
| SNAPPABLE | NONSNAPPABLE | PLANAR | NONPLANAR | VIEWDEPENDENT | 
VIEWINDEPENDENT | NOATTRIBUTES | ATTRIBUTES | NOTMODIFIED | MODIFIED | 
NOTNEW | NEW | NOTLOCKED | LOCKED]



Select All/Clear All
--------------------

Turns on or off all check buttons in the Properties section.



Class
-----

Contains controls for specifying criteria based on element Class.

Control     Key-in

(No class   SELECTOR CLASS NONE 
criteria)

All Classes SELECTOR CLASS ALL 

Primary     SELECTOR CLASS PRIMARY 

ConstructionSELECTOR CLASS CONSTRUCTION 

Dimension   SELECTOR CLASS DIMENSION 

Linear PatteSELECTOR CLASS LINEARPATTERN 

Pattern     SELECTOR CLASS PATTERNCOMPONENT 
Component



Note:
For information about classes other than Primary and Construction, see 
*Xref: Development & Support Guide



Tags
----

Opens the Select Tags settings box, which is used to specify criteria based 
on tag values. If selection criteria based on tag values are specified, 
elements that do not have attached tags with the specified tag name(s) will 
not be selected, located, or displayed.

   Tag
   Operator
   Expression
   Insert
   Criteria
   Delete
   And
   Or


Tag
---

Sets the tag name for a new criterion.



Operator
--------

Sets the relationship between the Tag and the Expression in a new 
criterion.



Expression
----------

Sets the tag value for a new criterion.



Insert
------

Inserts the criterion specified by Tag, Operator, and Expression in the 
Criteria list box.



Criteria
--------

Lists specified criteria and shows exclusivity between criteria. To delete 
a criterion or to change the exclusivity between a criterion and the next 
listed criterion, you must first select it.



Delete
------

Deletes the criterion selected in the Criteria list box.



And
---

Makes the criterion selected in the Criteria list box mutually exclusive to 
the next listed criterion.



Or
--

Makes the criterion selected in the Criteria list box not mutually 
exclusive to the next listed criterion.



Tools menu/Set Selector from Element
------------------------------------

Opens the Set Selector settings box, which is used to set the search 
criteria so they match an element's attributes.

Control:   Criteria matched if on:

Level      Levels

Symbology  Symbology

Type       Types

Properties Properties

Class      Class



After you turn on the controls for the desired criteria, identify the 
element whose attributes you want to specify as criteria.



Tools menu/Selector Save Sets... 
---------------------------------

(not yet implemented) Opens a dialog box, which is used to save several 
sets of criteria settings for future use.



Settings menu/Cell
------------------

Opens the Selector Cell settings box, which is used to specify a criterion 
based on the name of an unshared cell.

Key-in: SELECTOR SETTINGS CELL

   Cell Name


Cell Name
---------

Sets the cell name for a criterion based on the name of an unshared cell.

Key-in: SELECTOR TYPE CELLNAME <cellname>



Settings menu/Shared Cell
-------------------------

Opens the Selector Shared Cell settings box, which is used to specify a 
criterion based on the name of a shared cell.

Key-in: SELECTOR SETTINGS SHAREDCELL

   Cell Name


Cell Name
---------

Sets the cell name for a criterion based on the name of a shared cell.

Key-in: SELECTOR TYPE SHAREDCELL <cellname>



Settings menu/Text
------------------

Opens the Selector Text settings box, which is used to specify criteria 
based on element attributes specific to text elements. Its controls operate 
the same as the analogous controls in the Text settings box, which is 
opened by choosing Text from the Element menu.

Control     Key-in

Font        SELECTOR TEXTFONT <font> 

Height      SELECTOR TEXTHEIGHT <text_width> 

Width       SELECTOR TEXTWIDTH <text_width> 

JustificatioSELECTOR TEXTJUST <text_justification> 

String      SELECTOR TEXTSTRING <text_string> 



Key-in: SELECTOR SETTINGS TEXT



Settings menu/Text Node
-----------------------

Opens the Selector Text settings box, which is used to specify criteria 
based on element attributes specific to text node elements. Its controls 
operate the same as the analogous controls in the Text settings box, which 
is opened by choosing Text from the Element menu.

Control     Key-in

Font        SELECTOR TEXTNODEFONT <font> 

Height      SELECTOR TEXTNODEHEIGHT <text_width> 

Width       SELECTOR TEXTNODEWIDTH <text_width> 

JustificatioSELECTOR TEXTNODEJUST 
            <text_justification> 



Key-in: SELECTOR SETTINGS TEXTNODE



Replace Text
------------

Opens the Replace Text settings box, which is used to find text in text 
elements and replace it with different text. 

Key-in: 

Note:
The Replace Text settings box is the MDL application, "chngtxt.ma," which 
loads when Replace Text is chosen from the Edit menu.

   Old String
   New String
   Comparison
   Interactive
   Text in Cells
   Tools menu/All
   Tools menu/Single
   Tools menu/Fence
   Tools menu/Exit


Old String
----------

Sets the text to search for.



New String
----------

Sets the text to replace the Old String.



Comparison
----------

Sets case sensitivity for search purposes and whether regular expressions 
are interpreted, if specified.
*  Case Insensitive -- Case is disregarded when searching.
*  Case Sensitive -- Case is taken into account when searching.
*  Regular Expression -- Regular expressions, if specified, are 
interpreted.
   
This table lists the regular expressions and their meanings:

CharacterMeaning

c        any non-special character c matches itself 

\c       turn off special meaning of character c 

^        beginning of line 

$        end of line 

.        any single character 

:a       any alphabetical character [a-z|A-Z] 

:d       any digit [0-9] 

:n       any alphanumeric character [a-z|A-Z|0-9] 

:<space> A colon followed by a space also matches any 
         punctuation character 

[...]    any one of the characters in ...; ranges 
         such as a-z are legal 

[^...]   any single character not in ...; ranges are 
         legal 

s*       zero or more occurrences of string s 

s+       one or more occurrences of string s

st       string s followed by string t





Interactive
-----------

If on, an alert box is displayed for each instance of the old string when 
All or Fence is chosen from the Tools menu. The alert box is used to accept 
or reject replacement of a particular instance.



Text in Cells
-------------

If on, text strings in cells can be replaced.



Tools menu/All
--------------

Searches for each instance of the old string in the design.



Tools menu/Single
-----------------

Prompts for identification of a single element that contains the old 
string.



Tools menu/Fence
----------------

Searches for each instance of the old string in text elements contained in 
the fence. If the fence is not placed, an error message is displayed.



Tools menu/Exit
---------------

Closes the settings box.



Select All
----------

Selects all elements in the design.

Select All is useful mainly for sketching and for testing tools and should 
be used with care for a large design because: 
*  It may take a long time to add many elements to the selection set.
*  Elements are selected regardless of whether they are visible.
   
Hint:
It is usually much more efficient to use a fence to manipulate a very large 
number of elements. See Using the fence to group elements for manipulation 
for information about fence manipulations.

Note:
To select individual elements, use the Element Selection tool.

Key-in: CHOOSE ALL



Group
-----

Consolidates selected elements into a group (orphan cell) for manipulation 
as a single entity.

Handles appear on a group's boundary while the group is selected. You can 
scale a group by dragging any of its handles.

You can store a group in a cell library as a cell, but before doing so, you 
must define the cell origin with the Define Cell Origin tool. When using 
this method of cell creation, be sure that only the group is selected. See 
To create a cell: for more information about cell creation.

This item is dimmed if no elements are selected.

Key-in: GROUP SELECTION



Ungroup
-------

Discontinues selected groups. Each ungrouped element can be manipulated by 
itself.

This item is dimmed if no elements are selected.

Key-in: UNGROUP



Lock
----

Locks selected elements. The attributes and location of a locked element 
cannot be changed. Locking is useful for preventing accidental element 
manipulation. If you try to manipulate a locked element, MicroStation beeps 
to alert you that the element is locked.

Grayed handles appear on a locked element's boundary when the element is 
selected. When you group a locked element with other unlocked elements, the 
group is locked.

This item is dimmed if no elements are selected.

Key-in: LOCK

>> To lock the fence contents:

1. Key in FENCE CHANGE LOCK.
   


Unlock
------

Unlocks selected locked elements. Each unlocked element can be manipulated.

This item is dimmed if no elements are selected.

Key-in: CHANGE UNLOCK

>> To unlock the fence contents:

1. Key in FENCE CHANGE UNLOCK.
   


Show Clipboard
--------------

Opens the Show Clipboard window, which displays the elements on the 
Clipboard.



















Element Menu
------------

The Element menu has items for controlling the attributes of elements being 
placed in the design.

Attribute settings are savable except where noted.

To:                      Choose from the 
                         Element menu:

Set the Active Color and Color
the colors of selected 
elements.

Set the Active Line StyleLine Style > <internal_line_style>
change the line styles of 
selected elements.

Browse and activate line Line Style > Custom
and set line style modifiers.

Define and modify line stLine Style > Edit

Set the Active Line WeighLine Weight
change the line weights of 
selected elements.

Control the attributes ofAttributes
elements being placed in the 
design.

Control B-spline-specificB-splines
attributes of B-splines being 
placed in the design.

Control settings for     Dimensions > Placement
dimensioning.

Control the attributes ofDimensions > Attributes
dimensions being placed in the 
design.

Control settings related Dimensions > Geometry
dimension geometry.

Control the display formaDimensions > Text Format
units, and accuracy of 
dimension text.

Control the generation ofDimensions > Tolerance
toleranced dimensions.

Build feature control fraDimensions > Geometric Tolerance
with geometric tolerance 
symbols.

Specify symbols as prefixDimensions > Custom Symbols
suffixes for dimension and 
tolerance text.

Specify symbols as dimensDimensions > Custom Terminators
line terminators.

Control dimension settingDimensions > Tool Settings
associated with individual 
dimensioning tools.

Control the definition ofMulti-lines
multi-line elements being 
placed in the design.

Control text-specific    Text
attributes of text being placed 
in the design.

Change the attributes of Information
element and review data 
associated with the element.



   Color
   Line Style > <internal_line_style>
   Line Style > Custom
   Line Style > Edit
   Line Weight
   Attributes
   B-splines
   Dimensions > Placement
   Dimensions > Attributes
   Dimensions > Geometry
   Dimensions > Text Format
   Dimensions > Tolerance
   Dimensions > Geometric Tolerance
   Dimensions > Custom Symbols
   Dimensions > Custom Terminators
   Dimensions > Tool Settings
   Multi-lines
   Text
   Information


Color
-----

Opens a color palette which is used to set the active color and change the 
colors of selected elements. 

The active color specifies the color of an element upon placement and is 
stored as a value in the 0-255 range.

If one element is selected, the color highlighted in the color palette is 
the color of the selected element and not the active color. If more than 
one element is selected, a color is highlighted only if all selected 
elements are the same color.

Key-in: ACTIVE COLOR CSELECT

Note:
To set the active color without changing the color of selected elements, 
use the Color control in the Element Attributes settings box, which is 
opened by choosing Attributes from the Element menu.

Note:
The color palette represents the active color table, which can have up to 
256 colors. The active color table can be modified in the Color Table 
settings box, which is opened by choosing Colors > Color Table... from the 
Settings menu.



Line Style > <internal_line_style>
----------------------------------

Sets the Active Line Style to the chosen internal line style and changes 
the line styles of selected elements.

The Active Line Style specifies the line style of an element upon 
placement, and if set to an internal line style, is stored as a value in 
the 0-7 range.

If one element is selected, the item checked in the sub-menu is the 
selected element's line style and not the Active Line Style. If more than 
one element is selected, an item is checked only if all selected elements 
have the same line style.

If one or more elements are selected, the line style of each is changed to 
the line style chosen from the sub-menu.

Key-in: ACTIVE STYLE CSELECT

Note:
To set the Active Line Style without changing the line style of selected 
elements, use the Style control in the Element Attributes settings box, 
which is opened by choosing Attributes from the Element menu.



Line Style > Custom
-------------------

Opens the Line Styles settings box, which is used to browse and activate 
line styles and set line style modifiers.

Key-in: MDL LOAD LSTYLE LSTYLE DIALOG SETUP

Note:
The Line Styles settings box is part of the MDL application, "lstyle.ma," 
which loads when Custom or Edit is chosen from the Element menu's Line 
Style sub-menu or from the Style sub-menu in the Element Attributes 
settings box.

   Names
   Show Details
   Origin
   End
   Scale Factor
   Shift
   Sample (click to activate)
   Description


Names
-----

Lists the names of line styles in the open line style libraries. 
MicroStation searches for and automatically opens the line style libraries 
specified in the MS_SYMBRSRC configuration variable settings. If MS_SYMBRSC 
is not defined or the specified file(s) are not found, MicroStation 
searches for and automatically opens "lstyle.rsc" in the directory 
specified in the MS_RSRCPATH setting.

Double-clicking a line style name makes the line style the Active Line 
Style for element placement.

Key-in: ACTIVE STYLE [line_style_name] or LC=[line_style_name]



Show Details
------------

When turned on, the settings box enlarges to make visible the Origin, End, 
Scale Factor, Shift, and Sample (click to activate) controls. When turned 
off, the settings box shrinks to its default size.



Origin
------

Sets the starting width, in master units, of each dash stroke displayed 
with width in the active line style (thereby modifying the starting widths 
specified for these strokes in the line style definition).

While the check button is off, Origin cannot be adjusted (the field is 
dimmed).



End
---

Sets the ending width, in master units, of each dash stroke displayed with 
width in the active line style (thereby modifying the ending widths 
specified for these strokes in the line style definition).

While the check button is off, End cannot be adjusted (the field is 
dimmed).



Scale Factor
------------

Sets the scale factor applied to all displayable characteristics (dash 
length and width, point symbol size) of the active line style.

While the check button is off, Scale Factor cannot be adjusted (the field 
is dimmed).



Shift
-----

Sets the distance or fraction by which each stroke pattern in the active 
line style is shifted or adjusted. If Distance or Fraction is chosen, a 
field is displayed for setting the distance or fraction.
*  None -- Stroke patterns are not shifted.
*  Distance -- the distance, in master units, that stroke patterns are 
shifted relative to the beginning of elements or element segments (thereby 
modifying all such distances specified in the line style definition). For 
example, if the distance is equal to half the length of a stroke pattern 
component of the active line style, only the second half of the stroke 
pattern is displayed at the start of elements before the stroke pattern 
begins to repeat.
*  Fraction -- the fraction, in decimal, of the first strokes in stroke 
patterns that are displayed at the start and end of elements or element 
segments (thereby modifying all such fractions specified in the line style 
definition).
   


Sample (click to activate)
--------------------------

Shows the line style selected in the Names list box with active modifiers 
(Origin/End, Scale Factor, Shift) applied. Clicking this button makes the 
line style the Active Line Style for element placement.

Key-in: ACTIVE STYLE [line_style_name] LC=[line_style_name]



Description
-----------

Shows the line style description (technically, the description of the line 
style component to which the line style selected in the Names list box is 
directly linked).

Note:
In 3D, the surface normal vector that defines the plane used for line 
offsets and point symbol orientation is automatically set based on the 
z-axis of the view in which the element is placed.



Line Style > Edit
-----------------

Opens the Line Style Editor settings box, which is used to define and 
modify line styles.

Line style definitions are stored in line style libraries. The settings box 
lets you open and define or modify line styles in only one line style 
library at a time. If a line style library is open, its file specification 
is displayed in the title bar.

Key-in: MDL LOAD LSTYLE LSTYLE DIALOG EDIT

Note:
The Line Style Editor settings box is part of the MDL application, 
"lstyle.ma," which loads when Edit or Custom is chosen from the Element 
menu's Line Style sub-menu or from the Style sub-menu in the Element 
Attributes settings box.

   Styles
   Name
   Components
   Description
   File menu/New...
   File menu/Open...
   File menu/Close
   File menu/Save
   File menu/Save As...
   Edit menu/Create > Name
   Edit menu/Create > Stroke Pattern
   Stroke Pattern
   Add
   Delete
   Length
   Stroke Type
   Dash Caps
   Corners
   Width
   Start
   End
   Shift
   Repetitions
   Single Segment
   Edit menu/Create > Point
   Base...
   Stroke Pattern
   Origin
   X Offset
   Y Offset
   Rotation
   Select Symbol...
   Remove Symbol
   Edit menu/Create > Compound
   Sub-Components
   Offset
   Insert...
   Remove
   Edit menu/Delete
   Edit menu/Duplicate
   Edit menu/Link
   Sort menu/By Type
   Sort menu/By Description


Styles
------

Lists the names of all line styles in the open line style library. 
Selecting a name causes a sample of the line style to be displayed, the 
Name field to be updated with the selected name, and the directly linked 
line style component to be selected in the Components list box.



Name
----

Sets the name for the selected line style. The maximum valid number of 
characters is 64.



Components
----------

Lists the types and descriptions of all line styles components in the open 
line style library. If >> is displayed next to the entry for a component 
(to the left of its Type), the component is directly linked to the line 
style whose name is selected in the Styles list box.

Selecting a component causes a sample line with the component to be 
displayed, the Description field to be updated with the component 
description, and the controls for working with the component type to be 
made accessible if they were not already. To modify a component, you must 
first select it.

Note:
Nine "Internal" components are listed. The first eight are "standard" line 
styles -- Line code 0 through Line code 7. The ninth is Default solid line. 
Of these, only Default solid line supports true width through line style 
modifiers in the same manner as custom line styles.



Description
-----------

The field below the list box is used to key in a (new or modified) 
description of the selected component. The maximum valid number of 
characters is 128.



File menu/New...
----------------

Opens the Create Line Style Library dialog box, which is used to create and 
open a line style library. The controls are analogous to those in the 
Create Design File dialog box.



File menu/Open...
-----------------

Opens the Open Line Style Library dialog box, which is used to open a line 
style library. The controls are analogous to those in the Open Design File 
dialog box (see Open...).



File menu/Close
---------------

Closes the open line style library.



File menu/Save
--------------

Saves new or modified line styles in the open line style library.



File menu/Save As...
--------------------

Opens the Save Symbology File As dialog box, which is used to save the open 
line style library with a different name or on a different volume. The 
controls are analogous to those in the Save Design As dialog box (see Save 
As...).



Edit menu/Create > Name
-----------------------

Inserts an undefined line style named "Unnamed" in the list box. Unnamed is 
automatically selected and also automatically linked to the Default solid 
line Internal component. Choose this menu item to start defining a line 
style "from scratch."



Edit menu/Create > Stroke Pattern
---------------------------------

Accesses controls that are used to create, modify, and delete stroke 
pattern line style components.



Stroke Pattern
--------------

Graphical controls for modifying the stroke pattern and stroke attributes 
are located below the sample of the stroke pattern component. Each dash 
stroke is represented by a filled bar. Each gap stroke is represented by an 
unfilled bar.

The stroke selected for modification is highlighted. Clicking a stroke (or 
a handle above or below its ending point) selects the stroke.

Dragging a stroke's handle changes the stroke's length.



Add
---

Adds a new gap stroke at the (right) end of the stroke pattern. The maximum 
number of strokes is 32.



Delete
------

Deletes the selected stroke.



Length
------

Sets the length, in master units, of the selected stroke. 

You can also change the length of a stroke by dragging its handle in the 
stroke pattern display.

These options are in the option menu:
*  Fixed -- The stroke length is fixed.
*  Variable -- The stroke length may be adjusted if the stroke pattern is 
fractionally shifted or if a specific number of repetitions of the pattern 
must be displayed.
   


Stroke Type
-----------

Sets the stroke type (dash or gap).
*  Dash -- Dash strokes are displayed.
*  Gap -- Gap strokes are not displayed.
   


Dash Caps
---------

Sets the type of end cap on the selected stroke when displayed with width.
*  Butt -- The stroke end is perpendicular to the direction of the stroke.
*  Round -- An arc, with a radius of half the width, is appended to the end 
of the stroke.
*  Octagon -- An octagonal shape, with a radius of half the width, is 
appended to the end of the stroke.
*  Square -- The butt end cap is extended, by half the width, from the end 
of the stroke.
   


Corners
-------

Controls the behavior of the selected stroke when it extends farther an 
element vertex.
*  Break -- The stroke is broken (or "bent"). 
*  Bypass -- The stroke bypasses the vertex and continues straight to the 
nearest point on the element.
   


Width
-----

Controls the effect of width settings on the selected stroke.
*  None -- Width settings are ignored: The stroke is displayed without 
width.
*  Full -- The stroke is displayed with the specified widths.
*  Left -- Only the left half of the stroke is displayed (with the 
specified widths).
*  Right -- Only the right half of the stroke is displayed (with the 
specified widths).
   


Start
-----

Sets the starting width, in master units, of the selected stroke. This 
field is disabled (dimmed) if Width is set to None.

Setting Start and End to different values tapers the stroke.

If the lock control to the right is in the locked position, the stroke 
cannot be tapered; any change to Start is also applied to End below. 
Clicking the lock control toggles its position.

This setting can be temporarily overridden by setting the Origin modifier 
in the Line Styles settings box.



End
---

Sets the ending width, in master units, of the selected stroke. This field 
is dimmed if Width is set to None.

Setting End and Start to different values tapers the stroke.

If the lock control to the right is in the locked position, the stroke 
cannot be tapered; any change to End is also applied to Start above. 
Clicking the lock control toggles its position.

This setting can be temporarily overridden by setting the End modifier in 
the Line Styles settings box.



Shift
-----

Sets the distance or fraction by which the stroke pattern is shifted or 
adjusted.
*  Distance -- the distance, in master units, that the stroke pattern is 
shifted relative to the beginning of an element or element segment. For 
example, if the distance is set to half the length of the stroke pattern 
component, only the second half of the stroke pattern is displayed at the 
start of elements before the stroke pattern begins to repeat.
*  Fraction -- the fraction, in decimal, of the first stroke that is 
displayed at the start and end of an element or element segment. Each 
variable length stroke is scaled.
   
Note:
This setting can be temporarily overridden by setting the Shift modifier in 
the Line Styles settings box.



Repetitions
-----------

Sets the number of times the stroke pattern is repeated throughout the 
length or an element or element segment. The number of repetitions does not 
have to be fixed.

These options are in the option menu:
*  Unlimited -- The stroke pattern is repeated as many times as necessary 
to display the element.
*  Count -- A fixed number of repetitions is set in the field to the right 
of the option menu. Each variable length stroke is scaled.
   


Single Segment
--------------

If on, the stroke pattern is truncated at the end of each element segment 
(displayable vector) and restarted at the beginning of each segment. If 
off, strokes are continued uninterrupted from one segment to the next.


Edit menu/Create > Point
------------------------

Accesses controls that are used to create, modify, and delete point symbol 
line style components.



Base...
-------

Opens the Base Stroke Pattern dialog box, which is used to select the 
stroke pattern component on which the selected point symbol component is 
based.

   Descriptions


Descriptions
------------

Lists descriptions of all stroke pattern components in the open line style 
library. A sample line with the selected component is displayed below the 
list box.



Stroke Pattern
--------------

Used to select a stroke with which a point symbol can be associated. Each 
dash stroke is represented by a filled bar. Each gap stroke is represented 
by an unfilled bar. The selected stroke is highlighted.

If a point symbol is associated with the selected stroke, the point symbol 
is displayed (below left), and the controls used to adjust the related 
settings (below right) are enabled.

Clicking a stroke selects it.



Origin
------

Sets the location of the origin of the associated point symbol on the 
selected stroke.
*  Center -- the midpoint of the stroke.
*  Left -- the starting point (left end) of the stroke.
*  Right -- the ending point (right end) of the stroke.
   
X Offset and Y Offset are horizontal and vertical offsets from the chosen 
location.



X Offset
--------

Sets the horizontal offset (distance), from the location set with the 
Origin option menu, by which the origin of the associated point symbol is 
located on the selected stroke. The distance is specified in master units 
measured in the direction of the stroke pattern (x-axis).



Y Offset
--------

Sets the vertical offset (distance), from the location set with the Origin 
option menu, by which the origin of the associated point symbol is located 
on the selected stroke. The distance is specified in master units measured 
in the direction perpendicular to the stroke pattern (x-axis) and its 
plane.



Rotation
--------

Sets the angle, in degrees, by which the associated point symbol is rotated 
about its z-axis, on the selected stroke.



Select Symbol...
----------------

Opens the Select Point Symbol dialog box, which is used to select a point 
symbol with which to associate with the selected stroke.

Note:
To create a point symbol, use the CREATE SYMBOL key-in. For more 
information, see *Xref:115_CMod.fra.

   Names
   Symbol Information


Names
-----

Lists names of all point symbols in the open line style library. The 
selected point symbol is displayed below the list box.



Symbol Information
------------------

TBD. Not yet implemented.



Remove Symbol
-------------

Cancels the association between a point symbol and the selected stroke.



Edit menu/Create > Compound
---------------------------

Accesses controls that are used to create, modify, and delete compound line 
style components.



Sub-Components
--------------

Lists offsets, types, and descriptions of all sub-components of the 
compound component selected in the Components list box.



Offset
------

Sets the distance, in master units measured perpendicularly from the work 
line, by which the selected component is displayed parallel to the work 
line. If Offset is zero, the selected component is displayed on the work 
line.



Insert...
---------

Opens the Select Component dialog box, which is used to select a 
sub-component to insert in the compound component selected in the 
Components list box.

   Components
   Sort by


Components
----------

Lists types and descriptions of all line style components in the open line 
style library.



Sort by
-------

Sets the attribute by which components are sorted in the Components list 
box.
*  Type -- sort by type (Stroke [pattern], [point] Symbol, Compound).
*  Description -- sort by description.
   


Remove
------

Removes the sub-component selected in the Sub-Components list box from the 
compound component selected in the Components list box.



Edit menu/Delete
----------------

Deletes the selected line style.



Edit menu/Duplicate
-------------------

Duplicates the component selected in the Components list box. The duplicate 
is inserted after the original in the Components list box and is 
automatically selected.



Edit menu/Link
--------------

Directly links the component selected in the Components list box to the 
line style whose name is selected in the Styles list box. As indication of 
the link, >> is displayed next to the component Type.



Sort menu/By Type
-----------------

Sorts the components in the Components list box by component type (Stroke 
[pattern], [point] Symbol, Compound).



Sort menu/By Description
------------------------

Sorts the components in the Components list box by description.



Line Weight
-----------

Opens a sub-menu, which is used to set the Active Line Weight and change 
the line weights of selected elements.

If one element is selected, the item checked in the sub-menu is the 
selected element's line weight and not the Active Line Weight. If more than 
one element is selected, an item is checked only if all selected elements 
have the same line weight.

If one or more elements are selected, the line weight of each is changed to 
the line weight chosen from the sub-menu.

Key-in: ACTIVE WEIGHT CSELECT

Note:
The Weight sub-menu has items for line weights 0-15 only. Use The ACTIVE 
WEIGHT (WT=) key-in to set the active line weight to a value greater than 
15.

Note:
To set the active line weight without changing the line weight of selected 
elements, use the Weight control in the Element Attributes settings box, 
which is opened by choosing Attributes from the Element menu.



Attributes
----------

Opens the Element Attributes settings box, which is used to control the 
attributes of elements placed in the design.

The controls in the Element Attributes settings box do not affect existing 
elements.

Key-in: DIALOG ATTRIBUTES

Note:
Most of the active element attribute settings are displayed in the Command 
Window (*XRef).

Hint:
The active color, line style, and/or line weight can be set to match the 
attributes of an element with the Match Element Attributes tool.

Note:
To change an element's attributes to the active attribute settings, use the 
Change Element Attributes tool.

   Level
   Color
   Style
   Weight
   Class
   Attributes that are specific to closed elements


Level
-----

Sets the Active Level--the level (from 1-63), on which an element is 
placed.

Key-in: ACTIVE LEVEL [level] LV=[level]

Note:
The Active Level can also be set in the View Levels settings box, which is 
opened by choosing Levels from the View menu.



Color
-----

Sets the Active Color--the color of an element upon placement. Color is 
stored as a value in the 0-255 range. You can key in a numerical value in 
the field or choose a color, without regard for numerical values, from the 
color palette. To open the color palette, press on the colored button.

Key-in: ACTIVE COLOR [color | color table value] CO=[color | color table 
value]

Note:
The Active Color can also be set by choosing Color from the Element menu, 
which also lets you change the color of selected elements.

Note:
The color palette represents the active color table, which can be modified 
by choosing Colors > Color Table... from the Settings menu.



Style
-----

Sets the Active Line Style--the line style of an element upon placement. 
Line style is stored as a value in the 0-7 range. You can key in a 
numerical value in the field or choose a line style, without regard for 
numerical values, from the option menu.

Key-in: ACTIVE STYLE [value] LC=[value]

Note:
The Active Line Style can also be set by choosing Line Style > 
<internal_line_style> from the Element menu, which also lets you change the 
line style of selected elements.



Weight
------

Sets the Active Line Weight--the line weight of an element upon placement. 
Line weight is stored as a value in the 0-31 range, where 0 is lightest 
(narrowest) and 31 is heaviest. You can key in a numerical value in the 
field or choose (0-15 only) from the option menu.

Key-in: ACTIVE WEIGHT [value] WT=[value]

Note:
MicroStation line weight is not associated with a specific thickness, but 
instead determines the relative line weight of a line with respect to other 
line weight values. This allows line weight display to be tailored to the 
display hardware. For hard copy, the WEIGHT_STROKES record (*XRef) in the 
plotter configuration file defines the thickness at which a line of a given 
line weight is plotted.

Note:
The Active Line Weight can also be set by choosing Line Weight from the 
Element menu, which also lets you change the line weight of selected 
elements.



Class
-----

Sets the Active Class--the class of an element upon placement. 
*  Primary -- In general, the elements composing a design.
*  Construction -- Elements that are placed as "guidelines" to help draw 
elements composing a design.
   
Key-in: ACTIVE CLASS [CONSTRUCTION | PRIMARY]

Note:
The display of construction elements typically is turned off in a view 
before plotting or rendering. The Constructions control in the View 
Attributes settings box is used to turn the display of constructions on or 
off in a view. The View Attributes settings box is opened by choosing 
Attributes from the View menu.

Note:
For information about classes other than Primary and Construction, see 
*Xref: Development & Support Guide



Attributes that are specific to closed elements
-----------------------------------------------

Thes Area and Fill attributes affect only closed, planar elements, and are 
tool settings (*Xref to the User's Guide) for the tools in the Polygons 
sub-palette and the Circles and Ellipses sub-palette.

   Area
   Fill Type
   Fill Color


Area
----

Sets the Active Area, which specifies whether a closed elements is a solid 
or hole upon placement.
*  Solid -- Contains the area in which it is placed and can be patterned.
*  Hole -- Without area; eliminate area when placed within a solid element. 
Cannot be patterned.
   
Key-in: ACTIVE AREA [HOLE | SOLID]

Note:
To change an element to the Active Area, use the Change to Active Area 
(Solid/Hole) tool in the Change Element sub-palette.

Hint:
To associate a solid element a hole element so that the hole element(s) can 
be manipulated along with the solid element, use the Group Holes tool in 
the Chain sub-palette.



Fill Type
---------

Controls whether and how a closed element is filled upon placement.

Fill       Closed elements are:
Type:

TransparentNot filled.

Opaque     Filled with the Active 
           Color.

Outlined   Filled with the Active 
           Fill Color 
           and outlined with the Active 
           Color.



Key-in:  ACTIVE FILL [OFF | ON]

Note:
Element fill is displayed in views for which Area Fill is on. Area Fill is 
turned on or off for a view in the View Attributes settings box, which is 
opened by choosing Attributes from the View menu.



Fill Color
----------

Sets the Active Fill Color--the color with which a closed element is 
filled, if the Fill Type is Outlined. You can key in a numerical value int 
he field or choose a color from the color palette. To open the color 
palette, press on the colored button

Fill Color is diabled (dimmed), if the Fill Type is not set to Outlined.

Key-in: ACTIVE FILLCOLOR [color | color table value | OUTLINE]

Note:
To match the Active Fill Color to the Active Color, key in ACTIVE FILLCOLOR 
OUTLINE.



B-splines
---------

Opens the B-splines settings box, which is used to control 
B-spline-specific attributes of B-splines being placed in the design.

Note:
Individual attributes are determined graphically with some B-spline 
placement tools; the settings in the B-spline settings box are disregarded 
in those cases. See Xref.

Note:
B-spline settings cannot be saved; the default settings are in effect the 
first time the settings box is opened or one of the B-spline palettes is 
opened during a session.

Key-in: MDL LOAD SPLINES ELEMENT

Note:
The B-splines settings box is part of the MDL application, "splines.ma," 
which loads when this menu item is chosen or one of the B-splines palettes 
opens.

   Display Control Polygon
   Tolerance
   Curves
   Type
   Order
   Poles
   Surfaces
   Periodicity
   Order
   Poles
   Rules


Display Control Polygon
-----------------------

If on (the default), a B-spline is placed with its control polygon or net 
displayed.

Key-in: MDL LOAD SPLINES ACTIVE BSPLINE POLYGON [OFF | ON]



Tolerance
---------

Sets the active tolerance, in working units, for B-spline tools. The 
default is 0
*  When the Place Curve tool is used with the Least Squares Method, the 
error distance between data points and the curve are reported if they 
exceed the Tolerance. 
*  The tolerance also affects the imposing or extracting of surface 
boundary curves.
Key-in: MDL LOAD SPLINES ACTIVE BSPLINE TOLERANCE [mu:su:pu]



Curves
------

Contains controls that are used to set attributes that are specific to 
B-spline curves.


Type
----

Sets the periodicity of a curve upon placement; can be open or closed. The 
default is open.

Key-in: ACTIVE BSPLINE [OPEN|CLOSED]



Order
-----

Sets the order of the equation that defines a curve (2-15) upon placement. 
The default is 3.

Key-in: ACTIVE BSPLINE ORDER [order]



Poles
-----

Sets the number of poles upon placement, which equal or exceed the order 
with a maximum of 101. The default is 3.

Key-in: ACTIVE BSPLINE POLE [poles]



Surfaces
--------

Contains controls that are used to set attributes, in the U and V 
directions, that are specific B-spline surfaces.
Note:
The default Type, Order, and Poles in each direction are the same as those 
for curves. 



Periodicity
-----------

Sets the periodicity of a surface; can be open or closed in each direction.

Key-in: MDL LOAD SPLINES ACTIVE BSPLINE [UOPEN | VOPEN | UCLOSED | VCLOSED]



Order
-----

Sets the order of the equation that defines a surface (2-15) in each 
direction.

Key-in: MDL LOAD SPLINES ACTIVE BSPLINE [UORDER | VORDER] [order]



Poles
-----

Sets the number of poles in each direction upon placement (must equal or 
exceed the order with a maximum of 101).

Key-in: MDL LOAD SPLINES ACTIVE BSPLINE UPOLE [poles] ACTIVE BSPLINE VPOLE 
[poles]



Rules
-----

Sets the number of rule lines in each direction upon placement (default in 
each direction is 2).

Key-in: MDL LOAD SPLINES ACTIVE BSPLINE URULES [rule_lines] ACTIVE BSPLINE 
VRULES [rule_lines]



Dimensions > Placement
----------------------

Opens the (Dimension) Placement settings box, which is used to control 
settings for dimensioning.

Key-in: MDL LOAD DIMSET DIALOG DIMPLACE

Note:
The active dimension settings can be set to match those of a dimension 
element with the Match Dimension Settings tool (*XRef).

Note:
The dimension settings boxes compose the MDL application, "dimset.ma," 
which loads when the Element menu's Dimensions sub-menu is first opened.

   Text
   Orientation
   Justification
   Location
   Text Frame
   Alignment
   Reference File Units
   Extension Lines
   Relative dimension line
   Underline text (NTS)
   Adjust dimension line
   Style menu/Select...
   Style menu/Edit
   Settings menu/Attributes
   Settings menu/Geometry
   Settings menu/Text Format
   Settings menu/Tolerance
   Settings menu/Geometric Tolerance
   Settings menu/Custom Symbols
   Settings menu/Custom Terminators
   Settings menu/Tool Settings


Text
----

Contains controld that are used to control how dimension text is placed.


Orientation
-----------

 Sets the orientation of dimension text relative to the dimension line -- 
In Line, Above, and Horizontal.



Justification
-------------

Sets the justification of dimension text--Left, Center, or Right justified.

Key-in: DIMENSION JUSTIFICATION [CENTER | LEFT | RIGHT]



Location
--------

Controls the location of dimension text:
*  Semi-Automatic -- Dimension text is automatically placed according to 
the Justification setting if the text fits between the extension lines. If 
the text does not fit, you position the text in response to the Command 
Window prompt.
*  Automatic -- Dimension text is automatically placed according to the 
Justification setting.
*  Manual -- You position dimension text in response to the Command Window 
prompt.
   
Key-in: DIMENSION PLACEMENT [AUTO | MANUAL | SEMIAUTO]



Text Frame
----------

Controls the framing of dimension text:
*  None -- No frame.
*  Box -- Sometimes used to designate a reference dimension.
*  Capsule -- Typically used to designate a dimension for quality control.
   
Key-in: DIMENSION TEXT BOX [OFF | ON | TOGGLE] DIMENSION TEXT CAPSULE [OFF 
| ON | TOGGLE]



Alignment
---------

Controls alignment of linear dimensions (the illustrations were drawn using 
the Dimension Size with Arrows tool.):
*  View -- Aligns linear dimensions parallel to the view x- or y- axis. 
This setting is useful when dimensioning 3D reference files with dimensions 
parallel to the viewing plane.
*  Drawing -- Aligns linear dimensions parallel to the design plane x- or 
y- axis. The design's rotation determines the alignment axis for a 
particular dimension.
*  True -- Allows linear dimensions to be placed parallel to the element 
being dimensioned. The extension lines are constrained to be at right 
angles to the dimension line. 
*  Arbitrary (2D only) -- Lets linear dimensions be placed parallel to the 
element being dimensioned. The extension lines are not constrained to be at 
right angles to the dimension line. Arbitrary alignment is useful when 
dimensioning elements in 2D "isometric" drawings.
   
Key-in: DIMENSION AXIS [ARBITRARY | DRAWING | TRUE | VIEW]



Reference File Units
--------------------

If on, dimensions are computed in the units of the reference file that 
contains the element that is snapped to when the first data point is 
entered with the dimensioning tool.

Key-in: DIMENSION FILE [ACTIVE | REFERENCE]



Extension Lines
---------------

If on, extension lines (also called witness or projection lines) are 
placed. 

If off, extension lines are not placed. When placing interior dimensions, 
it is often useful to suppress extension line placement to avoid an 
intersecting extension line.

Key-in: DIMENSION WITNESS [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]

Note:
Extension lines can also be turned on or off in the (Dimension) Geometry 
settings box, which is opened by choosing Dimensions > Geometry from the 
Element menu. Also, extension line Offset, Extension, and Join When Text 
Outside can be adjusted.



Relative dimension line
-----------------------

If on, a dimension line is relative, so that it moves when the base of the 
first extension line is moved; the length of the extension line remains 
constant. 

If off, a dimension line stays in the same place when the first extension 
line is moved; the length of the extension line changes.



Underline text (NTS)
--------------------

If on, dimension text is underlined (a dimensioning convention for 
indicating a value that is not to scale).



Adjust dimension line
---------------------

If on, the dimension line and text are dynamically moved and the extension 
lines are dynamically extended if there is insufficient space to fit the 
dimension text without overlaying existing dimension text.



Style menu/Select...
--------------------

Opens the Select Dimension Style dialog box, which is used to load a 
dimension style and make its settings the active dimension settings.

Key-in: DIALOG ???

Note:
The Select Dimension Style is part of the MDL application, "style.ma," 
which loads when an item is chosen from the style menu in the (Dimension) 
Placement settings box or the Multi-lines settings box.

   Styles (list box)
   OK
   Cancel


Styles (list box)
-----------------

Lists the name, and descriptions of styles in the active style library. 
Double-clicking a style loads it and closes the dialog box.



OK
--

Loads the selected style. 



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without loading a style.

Note:
Dimension styles and style libraries are created, loaded, and edited in the 
Styles settings box, which is opened by choosing Style menu/Edit in the 
Dimension Placement settings box.



Style menu/Edit
---------------

Opens the Styles settings box, which is used to create, load, edit, and 
delete dimension and multi-line styles and create and activate style 
libraries. 

The name of the active style library is displayed in the title bar of the 
Style settings box. One style library can be active at a time.

Key-in: MDL LOAD STYLE STYLE DIALOG

Note:
The identity of the active style library is stored between MicroStation 
sessions, but style libraries cannot be attached to design files.

Hint:
If there is a dimension or multi-line element in the design whose settings 
are saved as a style, the Match Dimension Settings tool (*Xref) or Match 
Multi-line Definition tool can be used, respectively, to set the active 
settings to match the style.

Note:
The styles settings box is part of the MDL application, "style.ma," which 
loads when an item is chosen from the Style menu in the Dimension Placement 
settings box or the Multi-lines settings box.

   Styles (list box)
   Name
   (Style) Type
   Description
   Load
   Save
   New 
   Delete
   File menu/New...
   File menu/Open...


Styles (list box)
-----------------

Lists the names and descriptions of previously defined styles of the 
specified Type in the active style library. To change a style's Name or 
Description, you must first select it.



Name
----

Sets the name of the style that is selected in the list box.



(Style) Type
------------

Sets the type of styles that are listed in the list box. A style library 
can contain dimension and multi-line styles.
*  Dimension -- Each dimension style encompasses all dimension settings.
*  Multi-line -- Each multi-line style is a complete multi-line definition 
consisting of all of the attributes set in the Multi-lines settings box.
   


Description
-----------

Sets the optional description of the style that is selected in the list 
box.



Load
----

Loads the selected style and make its settings the active settings.

Key-in: MDL LOAD STYLE STYLE LOAD [DIMENSION | MLINE]<style_name> 



Save
----

Overwrites the selected style with the active dimensioning or multi-line 
settings. 



New 
----

Creates a new style, "style#," of the specified Type. The new style is 
automatically selected in the list box.


Delete
------

Deletes the selected style from the active style library.



File menu/New...
----------------

Opens a dialog box that is used to create a style library and open it as 
the active style library. Its controls are analogous to those in the Create 
Design File dialog box (see New...).



File menu/Open...
-----------------

Opens a dialog box that is used to open a style library as the active style 
library. Its controls are analogous to those in the Open Design File dialog 
box (see Open...).

Key-in: STYLEFILE<style_library>



Settings menu/Attributes
------------------------

Opens the Dimension Attributes settings box, which can also be opened by 
choosing Dimensions > Attributes from the Element menu.



Settings menu/Geometry
----------------------

Opens the Geometry settings box, which can also be opened by choosing 
Dimensions > Geometry from the Element menu.



Settings menu/Text Format
-------------------------

Opens the Text Format settings box, which can also be opened by choosing 
Dimensions > Text Format from the Element menu.



Settings menu/Tolerance
-----------------------

Opens the Tolerance settings box, which can also be opened by choosing 
Dimensions > Tolerance from the Element menu



Settings menu/Geometric Tolerance
---------------------------------

Opens the Geometric Tolerance settings box, which can also be opened by 
choosing Dimensions > Geometric Tolerance from the Element menu.



Settings menu/Custom Symbols
----------------------------

Opens the Custom Symbols settings box, which can also be opened by choosing 
Dimensions > Custom Symbols from the Element menu.



Settings menu/Custom Terminators
--------------------------------

Opens the Custom Terminators settings box, which can also be opened by 
choosing Dimensions > Custom Terminators from the Element menu.



Settings menu/Tool Settings
---------------------------

Opens the Tool Settings box, which can also be opened by choosing 
Dimensions > Tool Settings from the Element menu.



Dimensions > Attributes
-----------------------

Opens the Dimension Attributes settings box, which is used to control the 
attributes of dimensions being placed in the design.

Key-in: MDL LOAD DIMSET DIALOG DIMATTRIB

Note:
The active dimension settings can be set to match those of a dimension 
element with the Match Dimension Settings tool. *XRef

   Dimension Line
   Extension Lines
   Terminators
   Dimension Text
   Level


Dimension Line
--------------

Contains controls that can be used to override the active element 
attributes for the dimension line -- the line between the terminators that 
contains the dimension value. 

Note:
If a check button to the left of a control is off, dimensions are placed 
with the active attribute, and the control to the right are dimmed. If the 
check button is on, the contol for setting the override is enabled. Each of 
these controls is analogous to a control for setting an acrive element in 
theElement Attributes settings box, which is opened by choosing Attributes 
from the Element menu.

Setting:Range:        Key-in:

Color   From 0-255    DIMENSION COLOR [ACTIVE | 
                      <color> | <value>] 

(Line)  From 0-7      None
Style

(Line)  From 0-31     DIMENSION WEIGHT [ACTIVE | 
Weight                <value>] 



If no Extension Lines, Terminators, or Dimension Text overrides are on, 
those components are placed with the active dimension line attributes, or 
if the dimension line attributes settings are off, the active element 
attributes.



Extension Lines
---------------

Contains controls that can be used to override the Dimension Line and 
active settings for color, line style, and line weight for extension lines. 
For example, this lets you use an extension line as a center line. The 
controls are analogous to those in the Dimension Line section.



Terminators
-----------

Contains controls that can be used to override the Dimension Line and 
active settings for color, line style, and line weight for dimension 
terminators. The controls are analogous to those in the Dimension Line 
section.



Dimension Text
--------------

Contains controls that can be used to override the Dimension Line and 
active settings for color and line weight for dimension text, and also the 
active text Font, Height and Width:

Setting:Values:       Key-in:

Color   From 0-255    DIMENSION TEXT COLOR [ACTIVE 
                      | <color> | <value>] 

Weight  From 0-31     DIMENSION TEXT WEIGHT 
                      [ACTIVE | <value>] 

Font    From 0-127    DIMENSION FONT [ACTIVE | 
                      <value>] 

Height[aIn working uniNone

Widtha  In working uniNone

[a]If the lock control to the right of the Height and Width fields is in 
the locked position, Height and Width are forced to be the same value and 
keying in one size factor changes the other. If unlocked, a different 
Height and Width can be keyed in. To turn the lock control on or off, click 
it.
   
Note:
The active text Font, Height and Width are set in the Text settings box, 
which is opened by choosing Text from the Element menu. 



Level
-----

If on, sets the level on which dimensions are placed, overriding the Active 
Level.

Key-in: DIMENSION LEVEL [ACTIVE | <level>] LD= [ACTIVE | <level>]



Dimensions > Geometry
---------------------

Opens the Dimension Geometry settings box, which is used to control 
settings related to witness lines, text margins, terminators, offsets, 
leaders, and center size.

Key-in: MDL LOAD DIMSET DIALOG DIMGEOM

   Extension Lines
   Extension Lines
   Offset
   Extension
    Join When Text Outside
   Text Margins
   Terminators
   General


Extension Lines
---------------

Contains controls that are used to affect the placement and appearance of 
extension lines.

Note:
Placement of extension lines for the Place Center Mark tool is controlled 
in the Tool Settings box, which is opened by choosing Dimensions > Tool 
Settings from the Element menu.



Extension Lines
---------------

If on, extension lines (also called witness lines or projection lines) are 
placed. If off, extension lines are not placed. 

Key-in: DIMENSION WITNESS [OFF | ON]

Hint:
When you place interior dimensions, it is often useful to suppress witness 
line placement to avoid an intersecting extension line. 

Note:
This setting is the same as the Extension Lines setting in the (Dimension) 
Placement settings box.



Offset
------

The distance, in text height units, between the start of the extension line 
and the identified element. 



Extension
---------

The distance, in text height units, that the extension line extends beyond 
the dimension line.



 Join When Text Outside
-----------------------

If on, a connecting line between extension lines and text placed outside 
extension lines is placed. 

If off, no connecting line is placed.



Text Margins
------------

Contains controls that are used to set dimension text margins.

Control:   Sets:

Left       Space, in text height units, between 
           leader line and text.

Lower      Space, in text height units, between 
           dimension line and the bottom of text.

Tolerance  Horizontal space, in text height units, 
Left       between tolerance and text.

Tolerance  Vertical space, in text height units, 
Sep(arationbetween tolerance values.





Terminators
-----------

Contains controls that are used to set the appearance of the default 
dimension terminators.

Control:   Sets:

Width      Width, in text height units. 

Height     Height, set in text height units. 

Arrowhead  Appearance of the default arrowhead 
           terminator--Open, Closed, or Filled.



Note:
Custom dimension terminators can be specified in the Custom Terminators 
settings box, which is opened by choosing Dimensions > Custom Terminators 
from the Element menu.



General
-------

Conatins the following controls

Control:   Sets:

Stack OffseSpace, in working units, between dimension 
           lines in stacked dimensions. If 0 (the 
           default), a reasonable value based on text 
           size and orientation is computed. Set 
           Stack Offset to a value other than 0 only 
           if you need constant spacing between 
           dimension lines.

Min(imum)  Space, in text height units, between 
Leader     extension lines and text. If the leader is 
           shorter than this minimum, text is forced 
           outside the extension line.

Center SizeSize, in working units, of the center 
           mark.[a]

[a]You can also key in DIMENSION CENTER SIZE [mu:su:pu].
   
   

Dimensions > Text Format
------------------------

Opens the Dimension Text Format settings box, which is used to control the 
display format, units, and accuracy of dimension text.
   
   Key-in: MDL LOAD DIMSET DIALOG DIMTEXT
   
   Hint:
   The active dimension settings can be set to match those of a dimension 
element with the Match Dimension Settings tool. *XRef
   
   Length Format
   Format
   AEC Labels
   Units
   English (accuracy)
   Metric (accuracy)
   Angle Format
   Accuracy
   Display
   Angle Measure
   Scale Factor
   Leading Zero
   Trailing Zeros
   Comma for Decimal


Length Format
-------------

Contains controls that are used to specify the appearance of linear 
dimensions.



Format
------

Sets the dimension text length format:
*  AEC -- Provides units of feet and inches for English dimensions and 
millimeters for metric dimensions. You can set working units any way that 
provides the desired accuracy, but for dimensioning purposes, sub-units 
must represent inches or millimeters. The Sub-Units per Master Unit setting 
is ignored for AEC dimensioning.
*  Mechanical -- Provides units of inches for English dimensions and 
millimeters for metric dimensions. You can set working units any way that 
provides the desired accuracy, but for dimensioning purposes, master units 
must represent inches or millimeters.
   
Format   Master            Sub-Units
         Units

         English  Metric   English  Metric 

AEC      Feet              Inches   Millimeters

MechanicaInches   Millimeters





AEC Labels
----------

Sets the manner in which AEC-format linear dimensions are labled:

AEC        Example:
Labels:

x-x        2-3

x'x"       2'3"

x'-x"      2'-3"

x1/2       2 1/4'

x1/2'      2 1/4'



Note:
AEC Labels is disabled (dimmed) if the dimension text length Format is 
Mechanical. 



Units
-----

Sets the measurement systems for dimension text.
The following choices are valid if Format is set to AEC and sub-units 
represent inches or if Format is set to Mechanical and master units 
represent inches:
*  English
*  English/Metric (dual dimensioning)
   
The following choices are valid if Format is set to AEC and sub-units 
represent millimeters or if Format is set to Mechanical and master units 
represent millimeters:
*  Metric
*  Metric/English (dual dimensioning)
   


English (accuracy)
------------------

Sets the accuracy, from zero to eight decimal places or from 1/2" to 1/64" 
for linear dimensions in the English system.



Metric (accuracy)
-----------------

Sets the accuracy, from zero to eight decimal places, for linear dimensions 
in the metric system.



Angle Format
------------

Contains controls that are used to specify format for angular dimension 
text expressed as degrees (see Angle Measure).



Accuracy
--------

Sets the accuracy, from zero to four decimal places, of angular dimension 
text.



Display
-------

Sets the display format for angular dimention text. 

Choices are as follows:

Display    Example:

D.DDD      45.00d

DDdMM'-SS"[45d0'-00"

[a] Referred to as "degrees, minutes, and seconds."
   
   

Angle Measure
-------------

Sets the type of measurement for angular dimension:
   
Angle        This is Dimensioned:
Measure:

Length       The length of the dimensioned arc, in 
             working units.

Degrees      The angle, in degrees, encompassed by 
             the dimensioned arc.


Key-in: DIMENSION UNITS [DEGREES | LENGTH]



Scale Factor
------------

Sets the scale factor that is applied to dimension length.

Key-in: DIMENSION SCALE [factor]



Leading Zero
------------

If on, dimension text for a dimension of less than 1.0 is preceded by a 
leading zero.



Trailing Zeros
--------------

If on, dimension text is filled with zeros, if necessary, to the number of 
decimal places specified by the English (accuracy) or Metric (accuracy).



Comma for Decimal
-----------------

If on, decimal points in dimension text are replaced with commas to conform 
to European standards.



Dimensions > Tolerance
----------------------

Opens the Tolerance settings box, which is used to control the generation 
of toleranced dimensions. 

This menu item is dimmed if the linear dimension Format is set to AEC. The 
linear dimension Format is set in the Text Format settings box, which 
opened by choosing Dimensions > Text Format from the Element menu.

Key-in: MDL LOAD DIMSET DIALOG DIMTOLERANCE

Note:
The active dimension settings can be set to match those of a dimension 
element with the Match Dimension Settings tool. *XRef

   Tolerance Generation
   Type
   Upper
   Lower
   Text Size


Tolerance Generation
--------------------

If on, or either Upper or Lower is set to a non-zero value, tolerances are 
generated. 

If off, or both Upper and Lower are set to zero, tolerances are not 
generated.



Type
----

Sets the tolerance type:
*  Plus/Minus -- The dimension and the upper and lower limits are expressed 
as positive and negative limits.
*  Limit -- The dimension is expressed plus and minus the limits.
   


Upper
-----

Sets the upper tolerance limit, in working units.

Key-in: DIMENSION TOLERANCE UPPER [mu:su]



Lower
-----

Sets the lower tolerance limit, in working units.

Key-in: DIMENSION TOLERANCE LOWER [mu:su]

Hint:
The TV=[mu:su, mu:su] alternate key-in is used to simultaneously set the 
upper and lower dimension tolerances.



Text Size
---------

Sets the tolerance text size, specified as a multiple of the dimension text 
Height and Width. The dimension text Height and Widthare set in the 
Dimension Attributes settings box, which is opened by choosing Dimensions > 
Attributes from the Element menu.

Key-in: DIMENSION TOLERANCE SCALE [factor]



Dimensions > Geometric Tolerance
--------------------------------

Opens the Geometric Tolerance settings box, which is used to build feature 
control frames with geometric tolerance symbols.

Feature control frames are most commonly built with the Place Note tool, 
although the Place Text tool can also be used.

Key-in: MDL LOAD GEOMTOL

Note:
The Geometric Tolerance settings box is the MDL application, "geomtol.ma," 
which loads when this menu item is chosen. 

   Font menu


Font menu
---------

Sets the geometric tolerance font. When a new font is chosen, the buttons 
change to show the symbols it contains. When the Geometric Tolerance 
settings box is closed, the active Font is set back to the font that was 
previously the active Font.

Font:Contents:

100  Geometric tolerance symbols for feature control 
     frames. Left ( [ ) and right ( ] ) brackets form 
     the ends of compartments. Vertical line (|) 
     separates compartments. (The default font)

101  ANSI symbols. 





Dimensions > Custom Symbols
---------------------------

Opens the Custom Symbols settings box, which is used to specify symbols 
(characters from symbol fonts or cells) as the following:
*  Prefixes or suffixes.
*  Symbols for "diameter" and "plus-or-minus" (alternates to MicroStation's 
defaults, which are "o" and " ," respectively).
   
Key-in: MDL LOAD DIMSET DIALOG DIMSYMBOL

   Prefix
   Suffix
   Diameter
   Plus/Minus
   Lower half of dialog box


Prefix
------

Controls the specification of a custom suffix symbol.

Prefix:  Choose to display a field(s) to key 
         in:

None     No prefix.

Symbol   Character and Font (by number). 

Cell     Cell name.[a] 

[a]When a dimension is placed, the specified cell is placed as a shared 
cell, so its definition must exist in the design file.
   
   

Suffix
------

Controls the specification of a custom suffix symbol.
   
Suffix:  Choose to display a field(s) to key 
         in:

None     No suffix.

Symbol   Character and Font (by number). 

Cell     Cell name.[a] 

[a]When a dimension is placed, the specified cell is placed as a shared 
cell, so its definition must exist in the design file.
   
   

Diameter
--------

Controls the specification of an alternate diameter symbol.
   
Diameter:Symbol in dimensions:

Default  Default diameter symbol "o".

Symbol   Character and Font (by number) that are 
         keyed in.





Plus/Minus
----------

Controls the specification of an alternate plus or minus symbol.

Diameter:Symbol in dimensions:

Default  Default plus/minus symbol " ".

Symbol   Character and Font (by number) that are 
         keyed in. 





Lower half of dialog box
------------------------

Contains fields for specifying additional (single) characters as dimension 
text prefixes and suffixes. Prefixes and suffixes can be placed in the 
following locations
*  Main -- Before a single line of dimension text.
*  Tolerance -- Around both lines of tolerancing text.
*  Upper -- On the upper line of dimension text (for example, in 
English/Metric dimensions).
*  Lower -- On the lower line of dimension text.
   
Note:
In the font library supplied with MicroStation, fonts 101 and 102 contain 
symbols. The symbols in font 101 correspond to lowercase keyboard 
characters.



Dimensions > Custom Terminators
-------------------------------

Opens the Custom Terminators settings box, which is used to specify 
alternate symbols (characters from symbol fonts or cells) for each of the 
four default dimension terminators.

Key-in: MDL LOAD DIMSET DIALOG DIMTERMINATORS

Note:
Font 102 is the symbol font in the font library supplied with MicroStation 
that contains terminator symbols.

Note:
Various terminator types are associated with particular dimensioning tools; 
some of the tool names even specify a terminator type. See "Dimensions > 
Tool Settings for more information.

Hint:
The active dimension settings can be set to match those of a dimension 
element with the Match Dimension Settings tool (*Xref).

   Arrow
   Stroke
   Origin
   Dot


Arrow
-----

COntrols the specification of an alternate to MicroStation's default 
arrowhead:

Arrowhead: Used in dimensions:

Default    Default arrowhead.

Symbol     Character and Font (by number) that are 
           keyed in. 

Cell       Cell whose name is keyed in.[a] 

[a]When a dimension is placed, the specified cell is placed as a shared 
cell, so its definition must exist in the design file.
   
   

Stroke
------

Controls the specification of an alternate to MicroStation's default stroke 
terminator symbol (choices are the same as for Arrow).
   
   

Origin
------

TBD
   
   

Dot
---

TBD
   
   

Dimensions > Tool Settings
--------------------------

Opens the Dimension Tool settings box, which is used to control settings 
associated with individual dimensioning tools.
   
   Key-in: MDL LOAD DIMSET DIALOG DIMTEMPLATE
   
   Note:
   Because MicroStation assumes dimensions are placed from left to right, 
the first dimension line endpoint defines the dimension's "left" end and 
the second endpoint defines the "right" end.
   
   Tool
   Terminators
   Prefix
   Suffix
   Text
   Left extension
   Right extension
   Top Extension
   Bottom  Extension
   Stack Dimensions
   Arc symbol
   Center mark


Tool
----

Sets the tool whose associated settings are displayed -- you can choose a 
tool from either the graphical or textual option menu. The controls show 
only the settings for the chosen tool.



Terminators
-----------

Contains controls for setting the optional dimension line terminators. For 
each dimensioning tool, only the relevant terminator(s) can be set

Terminator:Optional Terminator for:     Key-in:

Left       Left end of dimension lines. DIMENSION TERMINATOR LEFT [OFF | 
                                        ARROW | DOT | ORIGIN | STROKE] 

Right      Right end of dimension lines.DIMENSION TERMINATOR RIGHT [OFF | 
                                        ARROW | DOT | ORIGIN | STROKE] 

First      Beginning of dimension stringDIMENSION TERMINATOR FIRST [OFF | 
                                        ARROW | DOT | ORIGIN | STROKE] 

Joint      Where the left and right     DIMENSION TERMINATOR JOINT [OFF | 
           terminators meet (at internalARROW | DOT | ORIGIN | STROKE] 
           extension lines) or at the 
           intersection of an extension line 
           and a dimension line to replace two 
           arrows pointing toward each other.

Leader     Radius and diameter dimensions when 
           the external leader line is drawn 
           outside the element being 
           dimensioned.





Prefix
------

Sets the optional symbol for placement before dimension text. 

Key-in: DIMENSION PRE [OFF | DIAMETER | RADIUS | SQUARE]



Suffix
------

Sets the optional symbol for placement after dimension text.

Key-in: DIMENSION POST [OFF | DIAMETER | RADIUS | SQUARE]



Text
----

Sets the orientation of dimension text:

Text:    All Dimension Text is Placed:

Standard Horizontally in the dimension line.

Vertical Vertically (in line with and above the 
         extension line).

Mixed    Vertically only if it does not fit 
         horizontally in the dimension line.


Key-in: DIMENSION VERTICAL [OFF | MIXED | ON]



Left extension
--------------

If on and Extension Lines is on, dimensions are placed with an extension 
line at the left end (start of the dimenstion). 

Key-in: DIMENSION WITNESS LEFT [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]



Right extension
---------------

If on and Extension Lines is on, dimensions are placed with an extension 
line at the right end (end fo the dimension). 

Key-in: DIMENSION WITNESS RIGHT [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]



Top Extension
-------------

If Top Extension and Center mark are both on, and Extension Lines in the 
Dimension Placement and Geometry settings boxes is on, the center marks in 
radial dimensions are placed with a vertical extension line extending 
upward. 

Key-in: DIMENSION WITNESS TOP [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]



Bottom  Extension
-----------------

If Bottom witness and Center mark are both on, and Extension Lines (can be 
set in the Dimension Placement or Dimension Geometry settings boxes) is on, 
the center marks in radial dimensions are placed with a vertical extension 
line extending downward.

Key-in: DIMENSION WITNESS BOTTOM [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]



Stack Dimensions
----------------

If on, stacked dimensions are placed. Otherwise, in-line (unstacked) 
dimensions are placed.

Key-in: DIMENSION STACKED [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]



Arc symbol
----------

If on, arc dimension text is placed with an arc length accent above.

Key-in: DIMENSION ARCLENGTH [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]



Center mark
-----------

If on, radial dimensions are placed with a center mark. Center mark Size is 
set in the Dimension Geometry settings box, which is opened by choosing 
Dimensions > Geometry from the Element menu.

Key-in: DIMENSION CENTER <OFF | ON>



Multi-lines
-----------

Opens the Multi-lines settings box, which is used to control the active 
multi-line definition. A sample of the multi-line is displayed in the lower 
left corner.

Key-in: DIALOG MULTILINE

Note:
The Multi-lines settings box is the MDL application, "mlineset.ma," which 
loads when this menu item is chosen.

   Lines
   Add
   Delete
   Offset
   Fill Color
   Component Attributes
   Component Type
   Color
   (Line) Style
   (LIne) Weight
   Level
   Class
   Start Cap
   Line
   Outer Arc
   Inner Arcs
   Angle
   End Cap
   Display Joints
   Style menu/Select...
   Style menu//Edit


Lines
-----

Lists the attributes of Component lines in the active multi-line 
definition. A multi-line can have up to 16 component lines. To modify the 
attributes of a component line, you must first select it.

Column  Description of Attribute:

#       The component's line number.

Offset  Distance from the work line.

Clr     Color

S       Numbered Line style

Wt      Line weight

Lv      Level



If a component line's color, line style, line weight, level, or class is 
not shown, the "active" setting (such as the active color) is effective for 
placement.

When you select a line in the list box, the Component Type is set to Line 
and you can use the controls in the Component Attributes section to adjust 
the selected component line's attributes.



Add
---

Adds a component line to the active multi-line definition. 



Delete
------

Deletes the selected component line from the active multi-line definition.



Offset
------

Sets the distance, in working units, from the work line to the selected 
component line.



Fill Color
----------

If on, the entire area between the outermost component lines of the 
multi-line is filled with the Color chosen with the controls that are 
enabled when Fill is on. These controls are analogous to those for setting 
the active color in the Element Attributes settings box, which is opened by 
choosing Attributes from the Element menu.



Component Attributes
--------------------

Contains controls for setting the attributes of multi-line components. If 
the check button to the left of a control is on, the corresponding setting 
is effective for the chosen component. If the check button is off, the 
"active" setting (such as the active color) is effective, and the control 
is dimmed.

The controls are analogous to those in the Element Attributes settings box, 
which is opened by choosing Attributes from the Element menu.



Component Type
--------------

Sets the component type whose attributes can be modified-- Line, Start Cap, 
End Cap, or Joint.

Note:
If you select a component line in the list box for Lines, the Component 
Type is set to Line, and the attributes for that component line are 
displayed.



Color
-----

Sets the component's color.



(Line) Style
------------

Sets the component's numbered line style.



(LIne) Weight
-------------

Sets the component's line weight.



Level
-----

Sets the level on which the component is placed.



Class
-----






Start Cap
---------

Contains controls for specifying the appearance of the start cap. Start 
caps can have any or all of the available parts.



Line
----

If on, the cap is drawn as a line.



Outer Arc
---------

If on, an arc connects the outermost component lines.



Inner Arcs
----------

If on, arcs connect pairs of inside component lines. If there is an even 
number of inside component lines, all are connected. If there is an odd 
number of inside component lines (three or more), the middle line is not 
connected.



Angle
-----

Sets the caps' line angle, in degrees. 



End Cap
-------

COntains sontrols for specifying the appearance of the end cap. The end cap 
can have the same parts as the Start Cap.



Display Joints
--------------

If on, joint lines are displayed at vertices.



Style menu/Select...
--------------------

Opens the Select Multi-line Style dialog box, which is used to load a 
multi-line style as the active multi-line definition. Its controls are 
analogous to those in the select Dimension Style dialog box (see Style 
menu/Select...).

Note:
The Select Multi-line Style dialog box is part of the MDL application, 
"style.ma," which loads when an item is chosen from the Style menu in the 
Multi-lines settings box or the (Dimension) Placement settings box.



Style menu//Edit
----------------

Opens the Styles settings box, which is used to create, load, edit, and 
delete multi-line and dimension styles and create and activate style 
libraries. See Style menu/Edit.



Text
----

Opens the Text settings box, which is used to control text-specific 
attributes of text being placed in the design.

Key-in: DIALOG TEXT

Hint:
The active text attributes can also be set with key-ins. Using alternate 
key-ins (xx=), in particular, can be faster than opening the settings box 
and using its controls.

   Font
   Height
   Width
   Lock control
   Intercharacter Spacing
   Line Spacing
   Line Length
   Slant
   Vertical Text
   Mirror Text
   Fractions
   Underline
   Match
   Justification


Font
----

Sets the font number of text upon placement.

Key-in: ACTIVE FONT [font_number] or FT=[font_number]

Hint:
You can view the appearance of a font's characters and set the active font 
in the Fonts settings box, which is opened by choosing Fonts from the 
Settings menu.



Height
------

Sets the active text height -- the height, in working units, of text upon 
placement.

Key-in: ACTIVE TXHEIGHT [mu:su:pu] or TH=[mu:su:pu]

>> To set the active text height with two data points:

1. Key in ACTIVE TXHEIGHT PT2.
2. Enter a data point.
3. Enter a second data point to define the height. The active text height 
is set to the distance between the two points.
   


Width
-----

Sets the active text width -- the width, in working units, of text upon 
placement.

Key-in: ACTIVE TXWIDTH [mu:su:pu] or TW=[mu:su:pu]

>> To set the active text width with two data points:

1. Key in ACTIVE TXWIDTH PT2.
2. Enter a data point.
3. Enter a second data point to define the width. The active text width is 
set to the distance between the two points.
   
Note:
Setting the active text width to three-quarters of the active text height 
generally produces the desired appearance with traditional MicroStation 
fonts.



Lock control
------------

If locked, active text height and width are constrained to the same value; 
keying in one size factor changes the other. To toggle the lock control, 
click it.

Key-in: ACTIVE TXSIZE [mu:su:pu] or TX=[mu:su:pu]



Intercharacter Spacing
----------------------

TBD



Line Spacing
------------

Sets the active line spacing -- the vertical spacing, in working units, 
between:
*  Lines in a multi-line text element (text node) when it is placed. 
*  Text and an identified element, when the Place Text tool is used with 
any of these Methods: Above Element, Below Element, or Along Element.
   
Key-in: ACTIVE LINE SPACE [mu:su:pu] or LS=[mu:su:pu]



Line Length
-----------

Sets the active line length -- the maximum number of characters per line in 
a multi-line text element (text node).

Key-in: ACTIVE LINE LENGTH [character_count] or LL=[character_count]



Slant
-----

TBD



Vertical Text
-------------






Mirror Text
-----------

If on, the Mirror tool operates on text.

Key-in: SET MIRTEXT [OFF | ON]



Fractions
---------

If on, numeric characters separated by a slash (/) are placed as single 
characters (numerator over denominator).

Key-in: SET STACKFRACTIONS [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]



Underline
---------

TBD



Match
-----

Used to change the active text settings to match the text attributes of a 
text element in the design (seeMatch Text Attributes). 

Key-in: ACTIVE TEXT



Justification
-------------

Sets the orientation of a text element relative to its origin. The active 
text justification and active text node justification determine the 
justification of a single text line and multi-line text node, respectively, 
upon placement.

Key-in: ACTIVE TXJ [CB | CC | CT | LB | LC | LT | RB | RC | RT]

Key-in: ACTIVE TNJ [CB | CC | CT | LB | LC | LT | LMB | LMC |  LMT | RB | 
RC | RT | RMB | RMC | RMT]

For each attribute, the current setting is graphically displayed in the 
active font and is also shown in a pair of option menus. To change a 
setting, click in the quadrant that corresponds to the desired setting or 
choose from the menus.



Information
-----------

Opens the Element Information settings box, which is used to change the 
attributes of an element(s) and review design file data associated with 
them, such as geometry and database attributes.

If a single element is selected when Information is chosen, the displayed 
data peratins to that element.

If more than one element is selected, the displayed data pertains to the 
first element selected, if the elements were selected individually, or 
otherwise to the element stored closest to the beginning of the design 
file. (If there aren't any selected elements, you are prompted to identify 
an element. After you do so, the settings box opens.)

The element type is shown in the title bar. The type number is shown in the 
upper left corner of the settings box.

Key-in: ANALYZE

Note:
The Element Information settings box is the MDL application, "analyze.ma," 
which loads when this menu item is chosen.

   Range
   Words to Follow
   File
   Positions
   Symbology
   Properties
   GGroup
   Class
   Fill
   Element Data
   Previous
   Next
   Apply


Range
-----

Shows the coordinates, in absolute units of resolution (UORs), of the lower 
left corner and upper right corner of the element's range block.



Words to Follow
---------------

Shows the size, in words, of the element in the design file. The value is 
two less than the number of words composing the element. See *XRef.



File
----

Identifies the file in which the element is stored. If zero, the element is 
in the active design file. A non-zero value identifies the attachment 
number of the reference file in which the element is stored.



Positions
---------

Shows the position of the element in the design file or reference file. In 
[ ] is the position in blocks and bytes. In [ ]is the position in bytes 
only.



Symbology
---------

Contains controls for changing the element's level, color, numbered line 
style, and line weight. These controls are analogous to those in the 
Element Attributes settings box, which is opened by choosing Attributes 
from the Element menu.



Properties
----------

Contains option menus that are used to change the element's properties. 
Properties are element attributes that are manipulated mainly by 
MicroStation and applications. The No Attributes/Attributes property cannot 
be changed in this settings box. For more information about properties, see 
*XRef.



GGroup
------

If zero, the element is not in a graphic group. A non-zero value is the 
number of the graphic group of which the element is a member.

To create a graphic group, use the Add To Graphic Group tool (*XRef).



Class
-----

Sets the element class. For more information about element class, see 
Attributes *XRef and "User Commands" *XRef.



Fill
----

If on, the element is closed and filled attribute. Closed elements with 
this attribute are filled in views for which Area Fill (*XRef) is on. Area 
Fill is set in the View Attributes setting box, which is open by choosing 
Attributes from the View menu.



Element Data
------------

Shows the element's geometry, tag values, database attributes, and 
attributes specific to the element type.



Previous
--------

Displays data for the previous component element of a complex element. 
Previous is disabled (dimmed) if the element is not a complex component or 
is the complex "header".



Next
----

Displays data for the next component element of a complex element. Next is 
disabled (dimmed) if the element is not a complex component or is the last 
component.

If the element is complex, click to display information for the next 
element. 

Note:
The notation, "x of y", in the upper right-hand corner of the settings box 
indicates the number of components (y) including the "header", and the 
relative position of the component for which information is shown (x). The 
nesting level of the complex element is shown in parentheses to the right 
of the element type number. 



Apply
-----

Applies changes to the element's attributes. An alert box opens to inform 
you that changes cannot be undone and asks you to confirm the changes.



















Settings Menu
-------------

The Settings menu has items for reviewing and changing 
non-element-specific, non-view-dependent settings.

Settings are savable except where noted.

To:                      Choose from the 
                         Settings menu:

Review and adjust settingTool Settings
the selected tool.

Select a settings group aGroups > Select
associated drawing tool, if 
any.

Define, modify, and deletGroups > Edit
settings groups.

Set the active angle.    Active Angle

Set the active scale factActive Scale

Set up auxiliary coordinaAuxiliary Coordinates
systems.

Create, browse, and activCells
cells.

Modify the active color tColors > Color Table...
and set exact.

Set the format and accuraCoordinate Readout
with which coordinates, 
distances, and angles are 
displayed.

Control settings related Database
linkages between elements and 
rows in a non-graphical 
database.

Control settings related Digitizing
digitizing and start procedures 
for setting up and testing 
digitizing tablet.

Set Grid Lock and the griGrid
spacing and configuration.

Assign names to levels anLevel Names
define a level structure.

Modify level symbology.  Level Symbology...

Set locks and the fence  Locks > Full
selection mode.

Turn locks on and off.   Locks > Toggles

Control general renderingRendering > General
settings.

Control rendering-specifiRendering > View Attributes
attributes.

Assign materials to elemeRendering > Assign Materials
based on their level and color.

Create or modify a materiRendering > Define Materials
palette.

Control ambient, flashbulRendering > Global Lighting
solar lighting.

Control the placement of Rendering > Source Lighting
point, or distant light 
sources.

Create, edit, and remove Tag Sets
set definitions.

Specify "real world" workWorking Units...
units and working resolution 
for drawing.

Precisely enter data poinPrecision Input



   Tool Settings
   Groups > Select
   Groups > Edit
   Edit Components settings box
   Edit Scale dialog box
   Edit Working Units Group dialog box
   Active Angle
   Active Scale
   Auxiliary Coordinates
   Cells
   Colors > Color Table...
   Modify Color dialog box
   Coordinate Readout
   Database
   Digitizing
   Fonts
   Grid
   Level Names
   Level Symbology...
   Locks > Full
   Locks > Toggles
   Rendering > General
   Rendering > View Attributes
   Rendering > Assign Materials
   Rendering > Define Materials
   Rendering > Global Lighting
   Rendering > Source Lighting
   Tag Sets
   Define Tag dialog box
   Working Units...
   Precision Input


Tool Settings
-------------

Opens the Tool Settings window, which is used to review and adjust settings 
for the selected tool. This window is an alternative to palette pop-downs. 
The title bar shows the tool name.

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLSETTINGS



Groups > Select
---------------

Opens the Settings Groups window, which is used to select a settings group 
and its associated drawing tool, if any.

The Settings Groups window can be resized and its split bar moved to change 
the relative height of the list boxes.

Note:
The Settings Groups window is part of the MDL application, "setmgr.ma," 
which loads when an item is chosen from the Settings menu's Groups 
sub-menu.

Key-in: MDL LOAD SETMGR SETMGR SELECT SETTINGS

   Group
   Sort
   Component
   File menu/Open...
   Categories menu/Scale...
   Categories menu/Working Units...


Group
-----

Lists the names of drawing settings groups in the open settings file, which 
by default is the file indicated by the MS_SETTINGS configuration variable. 
The selected group is the active drawing settings group.



Sort
----

Sets the manner in which components of the selected group are sorted in the 
Component list box -- by name or by type.



Component
---------

Lists the name and type of each component of the active drawing settings 
group.

Selecting a component does the following:
*  All settings associated with the component are set as specified in the 
component definition.
*  If a Key-in is defined for the component, the corresponding tool is 
selected, letting you place an element(s) without using a tool palette.
   


File menu/Open...
-----------------

Opens the Open Settings File dialog box, which is used to open a settings 
file. The default directory is pointed to by the MS_STGDIR configuration 
variable. The dialog box controls are analogous to those in the Open Design 
File dialog box, which opens when Open... is chosen from the File menu in 
the Command Window.

Key-in: MDL LOAD SETMGR SETMGR FILE OPEN



Categories menu/Scale...
------------------------

Opens the Select Scale dialog box, which is used to select a scale settings 
group and make its settings active. These settings specify the relationship 
between plotting units and design master units.

   List box
   OK
   Cancel


List box
--------

Lists the scale settings groups in the open settings file that have design 
units that match the active design file's master units. Double-clicking a 
group makes its settings active and closes the dialog box.



OK
--

Makes the settings in the selected group active and closes the dialog box.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without adjusting the scale settings.



Categories menu/Working Units...
--------------------------------

Opens the Select Working Units dialog box, which is used to select a 
working units settings group and make its settings active.

   List box
   OK
   Cancel


List box
--------

Lists the working units settings groups in the open settings files. 
Double-clicking a group makes its settings active and closes the dialog 
box.



OK
--

Makes the settings in the selected group active and closes the dialog box. 
An alert box opens for confirming the adjustment of the working units 
settings.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without adjusting the working units settings.



Groups > Edit
-------------

Opens the Edit Settings Groups settings box, which is used to define, 
modify, and delete settings groups.

Key-in: MDL LOAD SETMGR SETMGR EDIT SETTINGS

Note:
The Edit Settings Group settings box is part of the MDL application, 
"setmgr.ma," which loads when an item is chosen from the Settings menu's 
Groups sub-menu.

   Category
   Groups
   Create...
   Edit
   Rename...
   Delete...
   File menu/New...
   File menu/Open...
   Units menu/Edit


Category
--------

Sets the category for the listing of groups in the Groups list box.
*  Drawing (the default)
*  Scale
*  Working Unit
   


Groups
------

Lists the settings groups in the chosen Category that are in the open 
settings file. To modify, rename, or delete a group, you must first select 
it.



Create...
---------

Opens the Create dialog box, which is used to create a group.

   Name
   OK
   Cancel


Name
----

Sets the group name. The maximum valid number of characters is 31.



OK
--

Saves the newly created group in the open settings file and closes the 
dialog box.

The group is added to the Groups list box in the Edit Settings Group 
settings box. To modify the group definition, select the group, and choose 
Modify from the Edit menu.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without creating a group.



Edit
----

Open a dialog box that is used to modify the selected group. The name of 
the dialog box and the controls contained within depend on the Category 
setting

If Category is  Clicking Edit opens the:
set to:

Drawing         Edit Components settings box

Scale           Edit Scale dialog box

Working Unit    Edit Working Units Group dialog box





Rename...
---------

Opens the Rename dialog box, which is used to rename the selected group.

   Name
   OK
   Cancel


Name
----

Sets the group name. The maximum valid number of characters is 31.



OK
--

Saves the change in the open settings file and closes the dialog box.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without renaming the group.



Delete...
---------

Deletes the selected group from the open settings file. An alert box is 
displayed for confirming the deletion.



File menu/New...
----------------

Opens the Create Settings File dialog box, which is used to create a 
settings file. The default destination directory is pointed to by the 
MS_STGDIR configuration variable. The dialog box controls are analogous to 
those in the Create Design File dialog box, which opens when New... is 
chosen from the File menu in the Command Window.

Key-in: MDL LOAD SETMGR SETMGR FILE NEW



File menu/Open...
-----------------

Opens the Open Settings File dialog box, which is used to open a settings 
file. The default directory is pointed to by the MS_STGDIR configuration 
variable. The dialog box controls are analogous to those in the Open Design 
File dialog box, which opens when Open... is chosen from the File menu in 
the Command Window.

Key-in: MDL LOAD SETMGR SETMGR FILE OPEN



Units menu/Edit
---------------

TBD



Edit Components settings box
----------------------------

Used to modify a drawing settings group. Opens when a drawing settings 
group is selected in the Edit Settings Groups settings box and the Edit 
button is clicked. The title bar identifies the group.

   Sort
   Component (list box)
   Create...
   Edit
   Rename...
   Delete...


Sort
----

Sets the manner in which components are sorted in the Component list box -- 
by name or by type.



Component (list box)
--------------------

Lists the name and type of each component in the group. To modify, rename, 
or delete a component, you must first select it.



Create...
---------

Opens the Create dialog box, which is used to add a component to the group.

   Name
   Type
   OK
   Cancel


Name
----

Sets the component name. The maximum valid number of characters is 31.



Type
----

Sets the component type -- Linear, Text, Cell, Point, Terminator, Area 
Pattern, Hatch, Multi-line, or Dimension.



OK
--

Adds the newly created component to the group and closes the dialog box.

The component is added to the Component list box in the Edit Settings Group 
settings box. To modify the component definition, select the component, and 
click the Edit button.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without adding a component.



Edit
----

Opens the Modify Component dialog box, which is used to define or modify 
the selected component.

   Key-in
   Use Paper Size (text and cell components only)
   Units (text component only)
   Scale (cell component only)
   X (cell component only)
   Y (cell component only)
   Z (cell component only)
   Cell Work Units (cell component only)
   OK
   Cancel


Key-in
------

If on, sets the key-in that corresponds to the tool that will be 
automatically selected when the component is selected in the Settings 
Groups window's Component list box. Key-ins are listed with tool reference 
material in *[Xref various chapters use a table].



Use Paper Size (text and cell components only)
----------------------------------------------

If on, sizes and scales are adjusted by the active drawing scale.



Units (text component only)
---------------------------

Sets the units for the specified sizes.



Scale (cell component only)
---------------------------

If on, the x, y, and z scale factors take effect.



X (cell component only)
-----------------------

Sets the active x scale factor.



Y (cell component only)
-----------------------

Sets the active y scale factor.



Z (cell component only)
-----------------------

Sets the active z scale factor.



Cell Work Units (cell component only)
-------------------------------------

Sets the TBD.



OK
--

Accepts the changes to the component definition. This button is disabled 
(dimmed) unless changes have not been saved.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without changing the component definition.



Rename...
---------

Opens the Rename dialog box, which is used to rename the selected 
component.

   Name
   OK
   Cancel


Name
----

Sets the component name. The maximum valid number of characters is 31.



OK
--

Accepts the new component name and closes the dialog box.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without renaming the component.



Delete...
---------

Deletes the selected component from the group. An alert box is displayed 
for confirming the deletion.



Edit Scale dialog box
---------------------

Used to modify a scale settings group. Opens when a drawing settings group 
is selected in the Edit Settings Groups settings box and the Edit button is 
clicked.

   Paper Unit = Dgn Unit
   OK
   Cancel


Paper Unit = Dgn Unit
---------------------

Sets the relationship between plotting units and design master units.



OK
--

Accepts the changes to the group definition and closes the dialog box. This 
button is disabled (dimmed) unless changes have not been saved.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without changing the group definition.



Edit Working Units Group dialog box
-----------------------------------

Used to modify a working unit settings group. Opens when a working unit 
settings group is selected in the Edit Settings Groups settings box and the 
Edit button is clicked.

The dialog box controls are analogous to those in the Working Units 
settings box, which opens when Working Units... is chosen from the Command 
Window's Settings menu.

   OK
   Cancel


OK
--

Accepts the changes to the group definition and closes the dialog box. This 
button is disabled (dimmed) unless changes have not been saved.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without changing the group definition.



Active Angle
------------

Opens the Active Angle settings box, which is used to set the Active Angle 
and to toggle Angle Lock.

Key-in: DIALOG ACTIVEANGLE

   Angle
   Angle Lock
   Tolerance
   To set the Active Angle by entering two data points:
   To set the Active Angle by entering three data points:


Angle
-----

Sets the Active Angle--the angle, in degrees, used with tools that require 
an angle specification, including Place Line ???, Place Active Cell Place 
Text, Rotate, and Construct Array.

The Active Angle can be set by dragging the arrow indicator dial or keyed 
in the Angle field. As the dial is dragged, the value in the field changes. 


Key-in: ACTIVE ANGLE [angle] AA=[angle]

Hint:
Using the AA=<angle> alternate key-in to set the active angle can be faster 
than using the controls in the Active Angle settings box. For example, to 
set the active angle to 45d, key in AA=45 in the Command Window. If angle 
is omitted, the current setting is displayed in the Command Window. 

Note:
In illustrations of tools that are affected by the Active Angle, the active 
angle is denoted by "AA."



Angle Lock
----------

If on, the Active Angle is rounded to the nearest multiple, in degrees, of 
the specified Tolerance.

Key-in: LOCK ANGLE [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]

If the optional argument is omitted, the current setting is toggled.



Tolerance
---------

If Angle Lock is on, the Active Angle is constrained to multiple of this 
value. For example, if Tolerance is 5 and Angle Lock is on, the Active 
Angle can be 0, 5, 10, 15, and so on.



To set the Active Angle by entering two data points
---------------------------------------------------

1. Key in ACTIVE ANGLE PT2.
2. Enter a data point to define the origin of an imaginary line.
3. Enter a data point to define the endpoint of the line.
   The Active Angle is set to the angle measured counter-clockwise between 
this line and the positive view x-axis.
   


To set the Active Angle by entering three data points
-----------------------------------------------------

1. Key in ACTIVE ANGLE PT3.
2. Enter a data point to define the endpoint of the first leg of the angle.
3. Enter a data point to define the vertex of the angle.
4. Enter a data point to define the endpoint of the second leg of the 
angle.
   The Active Angle is measured counter-clockwise from the first data point 
to the third data point.
   


Active Scale
------------

Opens the Active Scale settings box, which is used to set the active scale 
factors and to toggle Scale Lock.

The active scale factors are applied when placing cells with the Place 
Active Cell tool or scaling elements with the Scale tool.

If a scale factor  Size in that direction 
is:                is:

0-1 (for example, 0Decreased

1                  Unchanged

Greater than 1     Increased

 
Key-in: DIALOG ACTIVESCALE

   X Scale
   Y Scale
   Z Scale
   Lock  control
   1.0
   Halve
   Double
   Scale Lock
   Tolerance
   To set the active scale factors graphically: 


X Scale
-------

Sets the active scale factor along the view x-axis (horizontal).

Key-in: ACTIVE XSCALE [factor] XS=[factor]



Y Scale
-------

Sets the active scale factor along the view y-axis (vertical).

Key-in: ACTIVE YSCALE [factor] YS=[factor]



Z Scale
-------

(3D Only) Sets the active scale factor along the view z-axis (depth).

Key-in: ACTIVE ZSCALE [factor] ZS=[factor]



Lock  control
-------------

If locked, the scale factors are constrained to the same value; keying in 
one changes all. To turn the lock control on or off, click it.

Hint:
You can also change all scale factors at once by keying in ACTIVE SCALE 
[factor] or AS=[factor]. If factor is omitted, the active scale factors are 
displayed in the Command Window.



1.0
---

Sets the active scale factors to 1.0.



Halve
-----

Multiplies the active scale factors by 0.5. 



Double
------

Multiplies the active scale factors by 2.



Scale Lock
----------

If on, scale factors are rounded to the nearest multiple of the specified 
tolerance.

Key-in: LOCK SCALE [ON | OFF | TOGGLE]

If the optional argument is omitted, the current setting is toggled.



Tolerance
---------

If Scale Lock is on, the active scale factors are constrained to multiples 
of this value. For example, if Tolerance is 0.25 and Scale Lock is on, the 
active scale factors are constrained to 0, 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, and so on.



To set the active scale factors graphically 
--------------------------------------------

1. Key in ACTIVE SCALE DISTANCE.
2. Enter a data point to define a known location or keypoint.
3. Enter a data point to define a second known location or keypoint.
4. Enter a data point to define the active scale factors.
   The active scale factors are computed by dividing the distance between 
the first and third points by the distance between the first and second 
points and are displayed in the Command Window.
   


Auxiliary Coordinates
---------------------

Opens the Auxiliary Coordinate Systems settings box, which is used to name, 
save, attach, or delete an auxiliary coordinate system (ACS) and to select 
ACS tools.

Key-in: DIALOG COORDSYS

Note:
The display of the ACS Triad in a view is set in the View Attributes 
settings box, which is opened by choosing Attributes from the View menu.

   Active ACS
   Name
   Type
   Description
   Origin
   Save
   Saved ACS
   Attach
   Delete
   Tools menu/Define By Element >
   Tools menu/Define By Points >
   Tools menu/Define By View >
   Tools menu/Move
   Tools menu/Rotate...
   Tools menu/Select


Active ACS
----------

Contains controls for setting the name, type, and origin of the active ACS, 
if one exists.



Name
----

Sets the name of the active ACS so it can be saved for future attachment. 
The name is limited to six uppercase alphabetic and numeric characters and 
the "_", ".", and "," characters. If lowercase characters are keyed in, 
they are converted to uppercase. 



Type
----

Sets the type of active ACS (rectangular, cylindrical, or spherical). See 
*XRef in the User's Guide for information about ACS type.



Description
-----------

Sets the optional description of the active ACS -- limited to 27 characters 
from those that are allowed for the ACS Name, plus the space character.



Origin
------

Sets the location in the global coordinate system where ACS is defined as 
0:0:0. To move the active ACS, key in the coordinates in the Origin fields, 
or use the *XRef (can be activated by choosing Move from the Tools menu in 
the ACS settings box.)



Save
----

Saves the active ACS for future attachment.

The active ACS's Name, Type, and Description then appear in the Saved ACS 
list box.

The Save button is dimmed if an ACS is not active.

Key-in: SAVE ACS <name>[,description] or SX=<name>[,description]

Note:
The ACS attachment (the settings that specify the active ACS and its 
origin) cannot be saved. 



Saved ACS
---------

Lists the Name, Type and Description of each saved ACS in the active design 
file To attach a saved ACS, you must first select it.



Attach
------

Attaches the selected saved ACS as the active ACS. 

The ACS's Name, Type and Description, and Origin are then displayed in the 
Active ACS fields. 

The Attach button is dimmed if no ACS is saved or selected.

Key-in: ATTACH ACS <name> or RX=<name>



Delete
------

Deletes the selected saved ACS from the active design file. 

The Delete button is dimmed if no ACS is saved or selected.

Key-in: DELETE ACS <name> or PX=<name>



Tools menu/Define By Element >
------------------------------

Choosing this item is the same as selecting the Define ACS (Aligned with 
Element) tool.



Tools menu/Define By Points >
-----------------------------

Choosing an item from this sub-menu is the same as selecting the Define ACS 
(By Points) tool.



Tools menu/Define By View >
---------------------------

Choosing an item from this sub-menu is the same as selecting the Define ACS 
(Aligned with View) tool.



Tools menu/Move
---------------

Choosing this item is the same as selecting the Move ACS tool.



Tools menu/Rotate...
--------------------

Choosing this item is the same as selecting the Rotate ACS Absolute tool.



Tools menu/Select
-----------------

Choosing this item is the same as selecting the Select ACS tool.



Cells
-----

Opens the Cell Library settings box, which is used to activate different 
types of cells and create, delete, and rename cells in the attached cell 
library, if one is attached. The name and path of the attached cell 
library, if one is attached, are displayed in the title bar.

The Cell Library settings box may take a few moments to open, depending on 
whether a cell library is attached and the size of the cell library.

Key-in: DIALOG CELLMAINTENANCE

Note:
For general information about working with cells, see *XRef.

   Sort
   Use Shared Cells
   Display
   List Box
   Active Cells
   Placement
   Point
   Terminator
   Pattern
   Edit...
   Delete
   Create...
   Share
   File menu/New...
   File menu/Attach...
   File menu/Compress
   File menu/<library_name>


Sort
----

Sets the manner in which the cell listing is sorted.

Sort:   Meaning:

Name    Listed alphabetically by Name.

Group   Cells in the attached cell library (Lbry) are 
        listed first, followed by shared cells (Shrd) 
        in the active design file.

Type    Graphic cells are listed first, followed by 
        menu and point.





Use Shared Cells
----------------

If on, cells are placed as shared cells. The list box shows the name of 
each shared cell in the design and the name and description of each cell in 
the attached cell library. 

If off, cells are placed as unshared cells. The list box shows only the 
cells in the attached cell library, if one is attached.

Key-in: SET SHARECELL [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]



Display
-------

Controls the display in the box on the right side of the Cell Library 
settings box that shows the selected cell. Except for wireframe, the 
choices correspond to items in the View menu's Render sub-menu.

Display:     Corresponds to Item in View menu:

Wireframe    Update[a]

Wiremesh     Render > Wiremesh 

Constant ShadRender > Constant 

Smooth ShadinRender > Smooth 

Phong ShadingRender > Phong 

[a]standard wireframe view.
   
   

List Box
--------

Lists the Name, Description, Type, and Location of cells that are available 
for placement in the order specified in the Sort option menu.
   
   If there are cells with common names in both the design (as shared 
cells) and in the cell library, the names of the shared cells are shown. 
   
   To work with a cell, select its list item. When you select a cell, it is 
displayed to the right of the list box with its name, type, and size. For a 
3D cell, an isometric, top, front, and right view are shown. 
   
   If the cell is large, it may take a few moments to display. All the 
other controls in the Cell Library settings box operate on the selected 
cell.
   
   

Active Cells
------------

Contains buttons that are used to designate the cell selected in the in the 
List Box as the Active Cell, Active Point, Active Line Terminator, or 
Active Pattern Cell.
   
   Note:
   To deactivate a cell, make sure no cell is selected and then click the 
appropriate button -- Placement, Point, Terminator, or Pattern.
   
   

Placement
---------

Makes the selected the Active Cell, which is placed in the design with the 
Place Active Cell tool in the Cells sub-palette.
   
   To the right of the Placement button, the name of the Active Cell is 
shown. If there is no active cell, "NONE" appears in this spot. 
   
   

Point
-----

Makes the selected cell the Active Point, which is placed with any of the 
tools in the Points sub-palette. 
   
   The identity of the Active Point is shown to the right of the Point 
button. The Active Point does not need to be a cell. It can also be a 
zero-length line or a text character or symbol. 
   
Point      Displayed     Active Point is:
Type:      Next to Point 
           Button:

Element    Element       Zero-length line.

Character  Symb          A character (or symbol if 
           (<character>) the Active Font is a 
                         symbol font)

Cell       The cell's namThe cell, which is called 
                         the "Active Point Cell."



Note:
The Active Point can also be set in pop-down fields from the Points 
sub-palette.

Key-in: ACTIVE POINT <name> or PT=<name>



Terminator
----------

Makes the selected cell the Active Line Terminator, which is placed in the 
design with the Place Active Line Terminator tool in the Cells sub-palette.

The name of the Active Line Terminator is shown to the right of the 
Terminator button. If there is no Active Line Terminator, "NONE" appears in 
this spot.

Key-in: ACTIVE TERMINATOR <name> or LT=<name>

Note:
The Active Line Terminator can also be set in a pop-down field from the 
Cells sub-palette.



Pattern
-------

Makes the selected cell the Active Pattern Cell, which is tiled to pattern 
an area with the Pattern Area tool or pattern along a linear element with 
the Linear Pattern tool.

The name of the Active Pattern Cell is shown to the right of the Pattern 
button. If there is no Active Pattern Cell, "NONE" appears in this spot. 

Key-in: ACTIVE PATTERN CELL <name> AP=<name>

Note:
The Active Pattern Cell can also be set in pop-down fields from the 
Patterning sub-palette.



Edit...
-------

Opens the Edit Cell Information dialog box, which is used to modify the 
name or description of the selected cell in the attached cell library. This 
button is dimmed if a cell is not selected, the selected cell is a shared 
cell, or the attached cell library is attached without write access. See 
*XRef

Key-in: RENAME CELL <old name>, <new name> or CR=<old name>,<new name>

   Name
   Description
   Modify
   Cancel


Name
----

Sets the name of the selected cell in the attached cell library.



Description
-----------

Sets the description of the selected cell in the attached cell library.



Modify
------

Updates the name and description in the attached cell library.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without modifying the cell information.



Delete
------

Deletes the selected cell from the attached cell library. An alert box 
requires you to confirm that you want to delete the cell, because it cannot 
be undone.

This button is dimmed if no cell is selected, the selected cell is a shared 
cell, or the cell library is attached without write access.

Key-in: DELETE CELL <name> or CD=<name>



Create...
---------

Opens the Create New Cell dialog box, which is used to add a cell to the 
attached cell library. This button is dimmed unless the following 
conditions are met:
1. A cell library is attached (see *Xref) with write access.
2. The elements to be included in the cell are selected or fenced (see 
*Xref in the User's Guide).
3. A cell origin is defined with the Define Cell Origin tool.
4. The attached cell library's dimensionality (2D or 3D) matches the design 
file's dimensionality. (However, a cell in a 2D cell library can be placed 
in a 3D design.)
   
Key-in: CREATE CELL <name>[,description][,type] 
CC=<name>[,description][,type]

   Name
   Description
   Type
   Create
   Cancel


Name
----

Sets the cell name, which is limited to six characters. Uppercase 
alphabetic and numeric characters and the punctuation characters "_", ".", 
and "," are valid. If lowercase characters are keyed in, they are converted 
to uppercase.



Description
-----------

Sets the optional cell description, which is limited to 27 characters. 
Valid characters include those listed above for the cell Name, plus the 
space character.



Type
----

Sets the cell type--a Graphic, Point, Menu, or Tutorial. See *XRef



Create
------

Creates the new cell.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without creating a new cell.



Share
-----

Defines the selected cell as a shared cell in the design file. An instance 
of the cell is not placed in the design. Defining a shared cell without 
placing an instance is helpful when customizing a seed file.

This button is dimmed if Use Shared Cells is off, no cells are selected, or 
the selected cell is not in the cell library.



File menu/New...
----------------

Opens the Create Cell Library dialog box, which is used to create a new 
cell library. Choosing this item is the same as choosing Cell Library > 
New... from the File menu.



File menu/Attach...
-------------------

Opens the Attach Cell Library dialog box, which is used to lets you attach 
an existing cell library to the active design file. Choosing this item is 
the same as choosing Cell Library > Attach... from the File menu.



File menu/Compress
------------------

Compresses the active cell library. Choosing this item is the same as 
choosing Cell Library > Compress from the File menu.



File menu/<library_name>
------------------------

Attaches the specified cell library, which is in the cell library list. 
Choosing this item is the same as choosing Cell Library > <library_name> 
from the File menu.



Colors > Color Table...
-----------------------

Opens the Color Table settings box, which lets you browse and modify a 
"copy" of the active color table -- the color table that is currently 
attached to the design file or, if none is attached, the default (internal) 
color table. 

After you make any desired changes, you can attach this "copy" to the 
active design file, or you can save it as a separate file for later 
attachment.

Key-in: DIALOG COLOR

   Color Table
   Attach
   Cancel
   File menu/Open...
   File menu/Save As...
   Edit menu/Exact Colors...
   Edit menu/Interpolate Colors
   Edit menu/Copy Color
   Edit menu/Paste Color
   Color Tables menu/Default
   Color Tables menu/Revert


Color Table
-----------

Each square represents a color in the active color table.

The view background color is in the lower right corner of the palette and 
has a dot in it.

>> To modify a color in the color table:

1. Double-click it in the color palette.
   The Modify Color dialog box opens.
   


Attach
------

Click to attach a color table with the colors shown in the color palette to 
the active design file. The color table is automatically attached when the 
design file is reopened. The attachment adds only 768 bytes to the design 
file.

Key-in: ATTACH COLORTABLE <table> CT=<table>

>> To detach an attached color table

1. Key in CT=<space>
   


Cancel
------

Click to do either of the following
*  Discard the copy of the color table and close the Color Table settings 
box.
*  If the Color Table settings box is expanded as a result of Interpolate 
Colors having been chosen from its Edit menu, cancels interpolation and 
restore the settings box to its normal size. For more information, see Edit 
menu/Interpolate Colors.)
   


File menu/Open...
-----------------

Choosing Open from the File menu in the Color Table settings box opens the 
Open Color Table dialog box, which lets you attach a color table file to 
the active design file. 

Key-in: tbd

   OK
   Cancel


OK
--

Click to open the selected color table file.



Cancel
------

Click if you decide not to open the selected color table file.



File menu/Save As...
--------------------

Choosing Save As from the File menu in the Color Table settings box opens 
the Save Color Table dialog box, which lets you to save the Color Table as 
a color table file.

Key-in: tbd

   OK
   Cancel


OK
--

Click to create a new color table file.



Cancel
------

Click if you decide not to create a new color table file.



Edit menu/Exact Colors...
-------------------------

Opens the Exact Color Selections dialog box, which lets you select exact 
colors (design file-specific or system default). Design file-specific exact 
colors, if present, override system default exact colors.

Key-in: MDL LOAD EXCOLOR

Note:
The Exact Color Selections dialog box is the MDL application "excolor.ma," 
which loads when Exact Colors is chosen from the Edit menu in the Color 
Table settings box.

   Color Palette
   This Design File
   System Default
   Maximum Selection Count
   Current Selection Count
   Color palette
   Done


Color Palette
-------------

Exact colors are indicated by Xs in the color palette in the Exact Color 
Selections dialog box.



This Design File
----------------

If on, design file-specific exact color selections are displayed in the 
color palette for editing.



System Default
--------------

If on, system default exact color selections are displayed in the color 
palette for editing.



Maximum Selection Count
-----------------------

The maximum allowable number of exact color selections. This number cannot 
exceed Exact Colors, set in the Preferences dialog box, which is opened by 
choosing Preferences from the User menu.



Current Selection Count
-----------------------

Shows the number of exact color selections.



Color palette
-------------

Represents the settings in the active color table and shows the exact color 
selections. Exact colors are indicated by Xs. Clicking a tile selects or 
de-selects the corresponding color.



Done
----

Click to make new exact color selections effective and close theExact Color 
selections dialog box.



Edit menu/Interpolate Colors
----------------------------

Lets you modify a rectangular area in the Color Table to create a gradation 
between two colors. When Interpolate Colors is chosen, the Color Table 
settings box expands to include a prompt field and the Interpolate button. 
After the operation is complete, the Color Table settings box returns to 
its normal size.



Edit menu/Copy Color
--------------------

Copies the selected color in the color palette to the Clipboard to be 
pasted to another location in the color palette.



Edit menu/Paste Color
---------------------

Copies the color from the Clipboard to the selected location in the color 
palette.



Color Tables menu/Default
-------------------------

Changes the copy of the color table to have the same settings as 
MicroStation's default (internal) color table (the color table that is 
active by default if no color table is attached to the active design file). 
To attach a color table with the same settings as the default color table 
to the active design file, click Default and then Attach.

Key-in: tbd

Note:
For information about customizing the default (internal) color table, see 
*Xref in the User's Guide.



Color Tables menu/Revert
------------------------

Resets the Color Table to the active color table settings without closing 
the Color Table settings box.

By default, any exact color definitions are taken from the beginning of the 
color table.



Modify Color dialog box
-----------------------

Used to modify a color. Opens when you double-click a color in the Color 
Table settings box's Color Table.

Its graphichal, textual, and numerical controls let you select colors using 
a number of different color models. Because there is a direct relationship 
between the color models (they all define the same color, but in a 
different way), a change to any value in one model causes a change to one 
or more values in the other models.

   Current Color Selection
   Tint
   Shade
   Named Colors
   RGB
   Alternate Model


Current Color Selection
-----------------------

As modifications are made, the color is shown in these tiles
   Wireframe -- Shows the appearance of the color in a wireframe, wiremesh, 
polygon, or filled polygon display.
   Dithered -- an approximation of the color in a shaded model; lighting 
and material characteristics also affect color in shaded models. Clicking 
the OK button applies the color modification to the active color table.
   
Note:
A wide discrepancy may exist between the Wireframe and Dithered tiles, with 
the Dithered tile closer, in most cases, to the color defined using the 
controls in the dialog box. This discrepancy is caused by limitations on 
the number of colors that some graphics adapters can display.

The Wireframe tile shows the displayable color closest to the defined 
color. For example, you can define "hot pink" using the controls in the 
dialog box, but red might appear in the tile because it is the closest 
displayable color. The Dithered tile, on the other hand, is derived by 
dithering (mixing displayable colors). For example, "hot pink" is dithered 
by mixing a small amount of blue with red.



Tint
----

The "rainbow" of colors below the tiles controls tint (hue and saturation). 
The left side of the rectangle is fully saturated with color; no whiteness 
is mixed in. To the right, the saturation level drops off as whiteness is 
added. 

Within the rectangle, an inverse "X" pointer marks the selected tint. 
Dragging the pointer changes the tint. 

The position of the pointer corresponds directly to the Hue and Saturation 
if the Alternate Model is HSV.



Shade
-----

The shade rectangle (to the right of the tint rectangle) controls shade or 
brightness for the specified tint. The rectangle ranges from all black at 
the bottom to the specified tint at the top with decreasing amounts of 
blackness along the way. 

A horizontal bar that extends across the rectangle marks the selected 
brightness. Dragging the pointer vertically changes the brightness. 

The position of the pointer corresponds directly to the Value (when the 
Alternate Model is HSV).



Named Colors
------------

You can select a standard X Window color in the list box.



RGB
---

The controls in this group box let you select a color based on 
MicroStation's internal RGB model.

Control:   Valid Range:

Red        0 (no red) through 
           1.

Green      0 (no green) 
           through 1.

Blue       0 (no green) 
           through 1.





Alternate Model
---------------

You can choose an alternate color model from the option menu below the RGB 
values.
*  HSV (hue, saturation, and value) -- The Hue, Saturation, and Value 
controls work similarly to a color TV's tint, contrast, and brightness 
controls, respectively. The HSV model is generally the most intuitive for 
those with no background in color theory.
   
Control:   Valid 
           Range:

Hue        0-359

Saturation 0-100

Value      0-100

 
*  RGB (0-255) -- The valid ranges of Red, Green, and Blue are 0-255. 
*  CMY (cyan, magenta, and yellow) -- The valid ranges of cyan, magenta, 
and yellow are 0-255. Cyan, magenta, and yellow, along with black, are the 
colors used in four-color process printing.
   


Coordinate Readout
------------------

Opens the Coordinate Readout settings box, which is used to set the format 
and accuracy with which coordinates, distances, and angles are displayed in 
the Command Window, settings boxes, and palette pop-downs.

Key-in: DIALOG READOUT

   Coordinates
   Format 
   Accuracy 
   Angles
   Format 
   Mode
   Accuracy


Coordinates
-----------

Contains controls that are used to set the manner in which coordinates are 
displayed.



Format 
-------

Sets which units are displayed:

Format:     Displays the Following:

Master UnitsMaster units only.

Sub Units   Master- and sub-units (MU:SU).

Working unitMaster- , sub-, and positional units 
            (MU:SU:PU).





Accuracy 
---------

Sets decimal accuracy up to four decimal places or fractional accuracy to 
1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, or 1/64.



Angles
------

Contains controls that are used to set the format, direction, and accuracy 
of angle readout.


Format 
-------

Sets the angle readout format:
*  DD.DDDD -- Decimal degrees (for example, 65.4290d).
*  DDMM'SS" -- Degrees (d), minutes ('), and seconds (") (for example, 
65d14'37")
   


Mode
----

Sets the manner in which angles are measured:
*  Conventional -- counter-clockwise from the design plane positive x-axis.
*  Azimuth -- clockwise from the design plane positive y-axis; used in 
disciplines such as astronomy, surveying, and navigation.
*  Bearing -- Angles are measured as follows:
   
Quadrant:  Direction:            From 
                                 Axis:

Northeast  Eastward (clockwise)  North

Northwest  Westward              North
           (counter-clockwise)

Southeast  Eastward              South
           (counter-clockwise)

Southwest  Westward (clockwise)  South


   Reads out: <distance> <axis> <angle> <direction>, where
   
Read       Description:
Out:

<distance> The length of the terminal side

<axis>     Axis (N or S) from which the angle is 
           measured

<angle>d   The angle

<direction>Direction (E or W) in which the angle is 
           measured 


   A sample bearing readout is "3.5, N 45dE." The terminal side lies in the 
quadrant identified by the bearings (the northeast quadrant in this 
example).
   
Note:
The Active Angle is defined conventionally regardless of the Angle Mode 
setting.



Accuracy
--------

Sets decimal accuracy up to four decimal places.



Database
--------

Opens the Database settings box, which is used to control settings related 
to linkages between elements and rows in a non-graphical database. See XRef 
in the Database Guide.



Digitizing
----------

Opens the Digitizing settings box, which is used to control settings 
related to digitizing and to start procedures for setting up and testing 
the digitizing tablet, if one is present. 

Note:
see (*XRef in "Introducing MicroStation") for information about supported 
input devices. Digitizing tablets cannot be used with MicroStation on some 
systems.

Key-in: DIALOG DIGITIZING

For more information about digitizing, see *XRef in Intoducing 
MicroStation.

   Stream Settings
   (Active Stream) Delta
   (Active Stream) Tolerance
   (Active Stream) Angle
   (Active Stream) Area
   Acceptance Display
   Tablet menu/Partition
   Tablet menu/Setup
   Tablet menu/Check Menus


Stream Settings
---------------

Contains controls for setting the manner in which data points are sampled 
while using the Place Stream Line String tool and Place Stream Line String 
tool while digitizing.



(Active Stream) Delta
---------------------

Sets the minimum distance, in working units, between sampled points 
(vertices in the stream line string or curve). 

When the distance between the pointer's location and the previously sampled 
point exceeds the Active Stream Delta, the point is sampled and the (Active 
Stream) Tolerance, (Active Stream) Angle, and (Active Stream) Area are 
applied to see if a data point should be recorded.

Key-in: ACTIVE STREAM DELTA [mu:su:pu] or SD=[mu:su:pu]



(Active Stream) Tolerance
-------------------------

Sets the maximum distance, in working units, between recorded data points. 
The distance from the most recently recorded data point is checked for each 
sampled point. If that distance exceeds the active stream Tolerance, the 
sampled point is recorded as a data point.

Key-in: ACTIVE STREAM TOLERANCE [mu:su:pu] or ST=[mu:su:pu]



(Active Stream) Angle
---------------------

Sets the angle, in degrees, that when exceeded, causes the last sampled 
point (not the current one) to be recorded as a data point. The pertinent 
angle is formed by the current sampled point and the two most recently 
sampled points.

Key-in: ACTIVE STREAM ANGLE [dd]



(Active Stream) Area
--------------------

Sets the area that, when exceeded, causes a sampled point to be recorded as 
a data point. The pertinent area is the triangle formed by extending a line 
between each of the last two recorded data points and the sampled point. 
Units are square master units, and the value must be specified as a 
floating point number (for example, 110.0 or 1.1E2).

Key-in: ACTIVE STREAM AREA [square_mu]



Acceptance Display
------------------

If on, the Command Window shows criteria being satisfied as data points are 
recorded with the Place Stream Line String tool or Place Stream Curve tool. 
This is useful for adjusting the stream settings.

Key-in: SET STREAM [OFF | ON]



Tablet menu/Partition
---------------------

Used to separate the digitizing tablet surface into two areas or partitions 
-- one for digitizing and the other for standard tablet-to-screen mapping.

After choosing this item, identify the lower-left and upper-right corners 
of the screen partition. See *XRef.

This item is dimmed if a tablet is not in the configuration.

Key-in: DIGITIZER PARTITION



Tablet menu/Setup
-----------------

Used to define monument points that specify the mapping between digitizing 
tablet coordinates and design plane coordinates.

After you choose this item, enter data points to define monument points. 
Reset when you are finished. See *XRef.

This item is dimmed if a tablet is not in the configuration.

Key-in: DIGITIZER SETUP



Tablet menu/Check Menus
-----------------------

Used to check and, if necessary, realign attached digitizing tablet menus.

After you choose this item, block outlines of the attached menus are 
displayed on the screen. To check the attachments, compare the tablet 
cursor location with the pointer location, or press the Command button and 
look in the Command Window. Reset when finished.

If a menu is incorrectly aligned, press the Data button to relocate the 
origin. Press it again to relocate the upper right corner. 

This item is dimmed if a tablet is not in the configuration.

Key-in: MC



Fonts
-----

Opens the Fonts settings box, which is used to review the fonts in the font 
library and set the Active Font.

Key-in: DIALOG FONT

The list box lets you select a font for review. The character set of the 
selected font is displayed on the large button below. To set the active 
font to the selected font, click the button.

The active font can also be set in the Text settings box, which is opened 
by choosing Text from the Element menu.

Hint:
The active font can be set using the ACTIVE FONT (FT=) [font_number] key-in 
-- for example, FT=1.



Grid
----

Opens the Grid settings box, which is used to set Grid Lock and the grid's 
spacing and configuration.

   Grid Lock
   Master/Grid
   Reference Grid
   Configuration
   Aspect Ratio (Y/X)


Grid Lock
---------

If on, each data point is forced to lie on the grid.

Key-in: LOCK GRID [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]

If the optimal argument is omitted, the current setting is toggled.

Note:
Conflicts between Grid Lock and Axis Lock are resolved as follows:

*  If the (Axis) Start Angle and (Axis) Increment are such that the grid 
does not align with an axis, Axis Lock nullifies Grid Lock.
*  If the axis anchor point is off the grid and the axis start angle and 
increment are such that grid points do not lie on an axis, Grid Lock is 
applied, followed by Axis Lock.
   
Note:
Unit Lock  nullifies Grid Lock if the (Unit) Distance is greater than the 
distance between grid points.

Note:
Grid Lock can also be set in the Locks settings box along with Axis Lock, 
Axis Start Angle, Axis Increment, Unit Lock, and Unit Distance. The Locks 
settings box is opened by choosing Locks > Full from the Settings menu.



Master/Grid
-----------

Sets the distance, in working units, between horizontal grid points in an 
orthogonal grid.

Key-in: ACTIVE GRIDUNIT [mu:su:pu] GU=[mu:su:pu]



Reference Grid
--------------

Sets the distance between grid references expressed as a multiple of 
Master/Grid.

Key-in: ACTIVE GRIDREF [units] GR=[units]



Configuration
-------------

Sets the grid configuration:

ConfigurationGrid points aligned:

Orthogonal   Orthogonally.

Isometric    Isometrically.[a]

Offset       Grid rows are offset by half the 
             distance between horizontal grid 
             points.

[a] An Isometric grid is actually a special case of an Offset grid.
   
Key-in: ACTIVE GRIDMODE [ISOMETRIC | OFFSET | ORTHOGONAL]



Aspect Ratio (Y/X)
------------------

Sets the ratio of vertical (Y) grid points to horizontal (X) grid points.

Aspect Ratio (Y/X) is disabled if the Configuration is Isometric, because 
the aspect ratio is fixed in an isometric grid.

Key-in: ACTIVE GRIDRATIO [aspect ratio]

Hint:
To configure a grid to lie at a 45d angle, set Configuration to Offset and 
set Aspect Ratio to 0.5.



Level Names
-----------

Opens the Level Names settings box, which is used to assign names to 
levels, create groups of levels, and define a level structure. A level 
structure is composed of level name assignments and level group 
definitions.

Key-in: DIALOG NAMEDLEVELS

The settings box contains two list boxes -- one for levels and one for 
groups. These are analogous to the files and directories list boxes in 
MicroStation's file opening dialog boxes. You can move up and down the 
level structure by selecting items in the Groups list box. Your location in 
the structure (Path) is denoted above the list boxes.

Levels can be sorted by number, name, or comment. This is set in the Sort 
By option menu.

   File menu/Open...
   File menu/Save...
   Level menu/Assign...
   Level menu/Remove
   Level menu/Edit...
   Groups menu/Create...
   Groups menu/Drop
   Groups menu/Edit...
   Groups menu/Open Group
   Display menu/On
   Display menu/Off


File menu/Open...
-----------------

Opens the Open Level Structure dialog box, which is used to load a level 
structure from a resource file. Its controls are analogous to those in the 
Open Design File dialog box (see Open...).



File menu/Save...
-----------------

Opens the Save Level Structure dialog box, which is used to save the level 
structure in a resource file to use with other design files. Its controls 
are analogous to those in the Save Design As dialog box (see Save As...).

Note:
You can save the level name assignments and level group definitions 
composing the level structure in the active design file, along with other 
savable settings, by choosing Save Settings from the File menu.



Level menu/Assign...
--------------------

Opens the Level Name dialog box, which is used to assign a level name.

To assign a level name, key in the level number, name, and optionally, a 
comment. Then click OK.

Level names are limited to 16 characters. Comments are limited to 32 
characters.



Level menu/Remove
-----------------

Removes the selected level name assignment.



Level menu/Edit...
------------------

Opens the Level Name dialog box, which is used to edit the Number, Name, or 
Comment for the selected level.



Groups menu/Create...
---------------------

Opens the Level Group dialog box, which is used to define a level group. 
Group names are limited to 16 characters.



Groups menu/Drop
----------------

Discontinues the selected level group and removes the names assigned to all 
levels in the group.



Groups menu/Edit...
-------------------

Opens the Level Group dialog box which is used to edit the name of the 
selected group.



Groups menu/Open Group
----------------------

Lists the level name assignments in the selected group in the Level list 
box.



Display menu/On
---------------

Turns on the display of the selected level or group. 

It is an alternative to using the View Levels settings box or the SET 
LEVELS (ON= ) key-in.

Because different levels can display in each view, you need to select a 
view(s) after choosing an item from the Display menu.



Display menu/Off
----------------

Turns off the display of the selected level or group. 

This menu item is an alternative to using the View Levels settings box or 
the SET LEVELS (OF)= key-in.



Level Symbology...
------------------

Opens the Level Symbology dialog box, which is used to modify level 
symbology (color, line style, and line weight) or individual level display 
attributes to distinguish between elements on different levels.

Key-in: DIALOG LEVELSYMB

Note:
Level symbology is truned on and off for a view in the View Attributes 
settings box, which is opened by choosing Attributes from the View menu.

Note:
As defined in level symbology, color applies only to the outline color of 
closed elements.

   Settings
   Apply
   Overrides


Settings
--------

For each attribute (color, line style, or line weight) to be set, turn on 
the attribute under Settings and choose the desired setting. The controls 
are analogous to those in the Element Attributes settings box, which opened 
by choosing Attributes from the Element Menu.



Apply
-----

Applies the Settings to the selected level.



Overrides
---------

These check buttons toggle the corresponding level attribute assignment for 
all levels. If the override is on for an attribute, MicroStation 
substitutes the level attribute for the corresponding attribute of each 
displayed element.

Elements are displayed with the level symbology, instead of their own 
symbologies, only if the display of level symbology is turned on in the 
view (and the override settings in this settings box are on).

   OK
   Cancel


OK
--

Accepts the specified changes and closes the dialog box.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without modifying level symbology.



Locks > Full
------------

Opens the Locks settings box, which is used to set locks and the fence 
selection mode.

Key-in: DIALOG LOCKS

Note:
After a lock is turned on or off, a list of all locks that are on appears 
in the Command Window. The list uses two-letter abbreviations. For example, 
"GR" denotes Grid Lock. These abbreviations are shown in parentheses.

Note:
If the optional [OFF | ON | TOGGLE] argument is omitted from a LOCK key-in, 
the current setting is toggled.

   Grid Lock 
   Level Lock 
   Boresite (Lock)
   Text Node (Lock)
   Graphic Group (Lock)
   ACS Plane (Lock)
   Fence (Selection) Mode
   Snap Lock
   (Snap) Mode
   (Snap) Divisor
   Association Lock 
   ACS Plane (Snap)
   Depth Lock
   Axis Lock
   (Axis) Start Angle
   (Axis) Increment
   Unit Lock 
   (Unit) Distance
   Isometric Lock


Grid Lock 
----------

(GR) If on, each data point is forced to lie on the grid.

Grid Lock, along with Master/Grid and Configuration, can also be set in the 
Grid settings box, which is opened by choosing Grid from the Settings menu.

Key-in: LOCK GRID [OFF |ON | TOGGLE]



Level Lock 
-----------

(LV) If on, you can select to elements only on the Active Level; you cannot 
manipulate elements that are not on the Active Level. 

Note:
Fence contents and graphic group manipulations ignore Level Lock.

Key-in: LOCK LEVEL [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]



Boresite (Lock)
---------------

(3D only) (BS) If on, you can select or snap to elements at any depth in 
the view cube.

If off, you can select or snap to only those elements that are at or very 
near the Active Depth (see *Xref).

Key-in: LOCK BORESITE [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]



Text Node (Lock)
----------------

(TN) If on, newly placed text is attached to empty text nodes, and you 
cannot place text if there aren't any empty text nodes.

Key-in: LOCK TEXTNODE [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]



Graphic Group (Lock)
--------------------

(GG) If on, any manipulation performed on one member of a graphic group is 
automatically performed on all members.

If off, the member elements of a graphic group can be manipulated 
individually.

Key-in: LOCK GGROUP [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]

Note:
To group elements in a graphic group, use the Add to Graphic Group tool in 
the Chain sub-palette.



ACS Plane (Lock)
----------------

(3D only) (AP) If on, each data point is forced to lie on the Active ACS's 
xy plane (z=0). The Active ACS is set in Auxiliary Coordinates System 
settings box, which is opened by choosing Auxiliary Coordinates from the 
Settings menu.

Key-in: LOCK ACS [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]

Note:
ACS Plane Lock was called Construction Plane Lock in versions of 
MicroStation prior to Version 4.0.



Fence (Selection) Mode
----------------------

Sets the manner in which the fence contents are determined for element 
manipulatons:

Fence        Fence Contents:
Selection:

Inside       Elements completely enclosed by fence.

Overlap      Elements enclosed by and crossing 
             fence.

Clip         Elements or parts of elements enclosed 
             by fence.[a]

Void         Elements completely outside fence.

Void-Overlap Elements outside and crossing fence.

Void-Clip    Elements or parts of elements outside 
             fence.a

[a]Each element that overlaps the fence is clipped into two or more 
separate elements, possibly of different types than the original. For 
example, a shape is clipped into line strings. However, text, cones, and 
B-splines cannot be clipped, and must be completely inside the fence to be 
part of the fence contents when the Fence Selection is Clip, or be 
completely outside the fence to be part of the fence contents when the 
Fence Selection is set to Void-Clip. 
   
Key-in: LOCK FENCE [VOID] [CLIP | INSIDE | OVERLAP]



Snap Lock
---------

(SN) If on, tentative points are forced to snap to nearby elements. 

Snap Lock is automatically turned on when Association Lock  is turned on.



(Snap) Mode
-----------

Sets the manner in which tentative points can be snapped to elements.

Snap       Tentative Points Snap 
Mode:      to:

Project    The closest points on 
           elements.

Keypoint   Pre-defined keypoints on 
           elements.











Intersection



Key-in: LOCK SNAP [INTERSECTION | KEYPOINT | PROJECT]

Note:
Snap Lock must be on for Snap Mode to take effect. 



(Snap) Divisor
--------------

The number of keypoints on a line, line string segment, or curve segment is 
one greater than this value.

Snap Divisor   Keypoints are:

1              Endpoints of line or segment

2 (or any even Endpoints and midpoint of line or 
value)         segment.



Key-in: ACTIVE KEYPNT [value] KY=[value]



Association Lock 
-----------------

(AS) If on, an association point is created each time an element is snapped 
to with one of the following:
*  Dimensioning tools.
*  The Place Multi-line tool.
*  The Place Active Cell tool, with Use Shared Cells on.
   
Hint:
Dimensions, multi-lines, and shared cells placed with association points 
are associative; they are automatically modified when the associated 
element(s) are modified.

Note:
Snap Lock must be on for an association point to be created; turning 
Association Lock on automatically turns on Snap Lock.

Key-in: LOCK ASSOCIATION [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]



ACS Plane (Snap)
----------------

(PS) (3D only) If on, each tentative point is forced to lie on the active 
ACS's xy plane (z=0).

Key-in: LOCK SNAP ACS

Note:
ACS Plane Snap Lock was called Construction Plane Snap Lock in versions of 
MicroStation prior to 4.0.



Depth Lock
----------

(DE) (3D only) If on, each tentative point is projected along the view 
z-axis at the Active Depth.

Key-in: LOCK DEPTH



Axis Lock
---------

If on, each data point is forced to lie at an angle (or multiples of that 
angle) from the previous data point. The angle is specified by the (Axis) 
Increment relative to the (Axis) Start Angle.

Key-in: LOCK AXIS [ON | OFF | TOGGLE]

Hint:
If (Axis) Start Angle is 0d and (Axis) Increment is 90d, Axis Lock 
constrains successive data points to lie orthogonally.

Note:
Conflicts between Axis Lock and Grid Lock or Unit Lock  are resolved as 
follows:

*  If the Axis Start Angle and Axis Increment are such that the grid or 
imaginary unit grid does not align with an axis, Axis Lock nullifies the 
other locks.
*  If the axis anchor point is off the grid or unit grid and the Axis Start 
Angle and Axis Increment are such that grid points do not lie on an axis, 
Grid Lock or Unit Lock is applied, followed by Axis Lock.
   


(Axis) Start Angle
------------------

An angle, in degrees, relative to the view x-axis that is used as a 
starting angle by Axis Lock.

Key-in: ACTIVE AXORIGIN <angle>



(Axis) Increment
----------------

The increment, in degrees, between angles on which data points are forced 
to lie when Axis Lock is on.

Key-in: ACTIVE AXIS <angle>



Unit Lock 
----------

(UN) If on, each data point is forced to lie at coordinates that are 
multiples, in each dimension, of the (Unit) Distance. Unit Lock works with 
the imaginary unit grid in the same manner Grid Lock works with the real 
grid.

For example, if Unit Distance is 0:1, points in the imaginary unit grid are 
spaced one sub-unit apart. 

Key-in: LOCK UNIT [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]

Note:
Conflicts between Unit Lock and Axis Lock are resolved as follows:

*  If the (Axis) Start Angle and (Axis) Increment are such that the 
imaginary unit grid does not align with an axis, Axis Lock nullifies Unit 
Lock.
*  If the axis anchor point is off the unit grid and the Axis Start Angle 
and Axis Increment are such that grid points do not lie on an axis, Unit 
Lock is applied, followed by Axis Lock.
   
Note:
Grid Lock nullifies Unit Lock if the distance between grid points exceeds 
Unit Distance.



(Unit) Distance
---------------

Sets the distance, in working units, between points in the imaginary grid 
used by Unit Lock . Unit Distance takes effect only when Unit Lock is on.

Key-in: ACTIVE UNITROUND [mu:su:pu] UR=[mu:su:pu]



Isometric Lock
--------------

(IS) If on, each data point is forced to lie on the isometric drawing 
plane. 

Isometric      Plane Axes:
Plane:

Left           90d and 150d

Right          30d and 90d

Top            30d and 150d

All            30d, 90d, and 150d[a]

[a]For use with Isometric Lock and at 30d and 150d (the same as Top) for 
use the Place Isometric Block tool and Place Isometric Circle tool.
   
Key-in: LOCK ISOMETRIC [OFF | ON | TOGGLE]



Locks > Toggles
---------------

Opens the Lock Toggles settings box, which is used to turn locks on and 
off. The check buttons have the same effect as those in the Locks settings 
box.

Key-in: DIALOG LOCKTOGGLES

   Axis Lock
   Grid Lock
   Unit Lock
   Snap Lock
   Association (Lock)
   Level Lock
   Graphic Group (Lock)
   Text Node (Lock)
   Isometric Lock
   Boresite (Lock)
   ACS Plane (Lock)
   ACS Plane Snap
   Depth Lock


Axis Lock
---------

See Axis Lock.



Grid Lock
---------

See Grid Lock.



Unit Lock
---------

See Unit Lock .



Snap Lock
---------

See Snap Lock.



Association (Lock)
------------------

See Association Lock .



Level Lock
----------

See Level Lock .



Graphic Group (Lock)
--------------------

See Graphic Group (Lock).



Text Node (Lock)
----------------

See Text Node (Lock).



Isometric Lock
--------------

See Isometric Lock.



Boresite (Lock)
---------------

(3D only) See Boresite (Lock).



ACS Plane (Lock)
----------------

(3D only) See ACS Plane (Lock).



ACS Plane Snap
--------------

(3D only) See ACS Plane (Snap).



Depth Lock
----------

(3D only) See Depth Lock.



Rendering > General
-------------------

Opens the Rendering Settings box, which is used to adjust rendering 
settings.

Key-in: DIALOG RENDER

Note:
The settings in this box cannot be saved; the default settings are in 
effect each time MicroStation starts.

   Stroke Tolerance
   Anti-Aliasing Grid Size
   Shadow Filter Size
   Shadow Tolerance
   Interpolate Textures
   Save Shadow Maps
   Distance Cueing
   Near Distance
   Near Density
   Far Density
   Fog Color...


Stroke Tolerance
----------------

Sets the maximum deviation (in pixels) from the surface mesh to the true 
surface. This determines the size of the polygons that a curved surface is 
broken up into when it is rendered. 
*  A small value produces many small polygons that very closely approximate 
the surface at the expense of increased rendering time. 
*  A large value produces a coarse mesh with larger polygons that can be 
rendered significantly faster.
   


Anti-Aliasing Grid Size
-----------------------

Sets the size of the anti-aliasing grid, a pattern that determines Phong 
Anti-aliased shading quality and the number of passes needed to render an 
image.

The default value of 2 produces excellent results in most cases with 4 
(2x2) passes. A higher grid size produces slightly better anti-aliasing, 
but requires additional passes. A grid size greater than 3 is rarely 
worthwhile.



Shadow Filter Size
------------------

Contols the softness of shadows; a higher value causes softer shadows.
   0 -- Very sharp, crisp shadows
   15 -- Shadows with very soft edges. 


Shadow Tolerance
----------------

Used to prevent surfaces from casting shadows on themselves -- specified as 
a proportion of the maximum distance from the light to an element. 

The default value, 0.02, is usually sufficient to avoid self-shadowing. A 
larger value may help when the light strikes a surface at a small incidence 
angle. Excessively large shadow tolerances can cause inaccurate shadow 
generation.



Interpolate Textures
--------------------

If on, surface color is extracted from the pattern image by interpolating 
between the two closest pixels. In most cases, this produces the best 
results, although it may be undesirable in certain instances.



Save Shadow Maps
----------------

If on, shadow maps are saved the first time that a design is rendered, 
resulting in reduced times for future rendering. Subsequent rendering of 
the design uses the saved shadow maps, rather than re-creating them.

Names for shadow map files are based on the order of the lights and the 
name of the design file. For the design file "test3d.dgn," the shadow maps 
will be "test3d.l01", "test3d.l02," etc., (where l is for light). 

If a light is moved using the controls in the Source Lighting settings box, 
making its shadow map invalid, the shadow map is recalculated 
automatically. The Source Lighting settings box is opened by choosing 
Rendering > Source Lighting from the Settings menu.



Distance Cueing
---------------

Contains controls to set distance cueing, which simulates the atmosphere's 
effect on how we see distant objects by fading surface colors to black 
(standard cueing) or a color you can define (fog) as their distance from 
the eye increases. Distance Cueing must be on for the view.


Near Distance
-------------

Sets the distance at which fading begins--specified as a proportion of the 
distance from the front to the back clipping plane. For example, if set to 
0.25, there is no fading in the nearest one-fourth of the view's volume.

The front and back clipping planes are set with the Set Display Depth view 
control (*XRef) or when setting up or adjusting the view camera with Camera 
> Set Up , Camera > Move Camera, or Camera > Move Target .



Near Density
------------

Sets the fog intensity at the Near Distance.



Far Density
-----------

Sets the fog intensity at the back of the view.



Fog Color...
------------

Opens the Modify Fog Color dialog box, which is used to select a fog color. 
A fog color can be used to create a realistic atmospheric haze. The 
controls in the dialog box are analogous to those in the



Rendering > View Attributes
---------------------------

Opens the Rendering View Attributes settings box, which i sused to set view 
attributes that affect rendered images.

   View
   Delayed Display
   Pattern/Bump Maps
   Shadows
   Transparency
   Display
   Distance Cueing
   Apply
   All


View
----

Sets the view for which rendering view attribute settings are displayed.



Delayed Display
---------------

If on, rendering is not displayed as it is performed. Instead, the entire 
rendered image is displayed when done.
*  Advantages: Faster rendering, particularly with slow display hardware. 
Also, if the display is not true color, delayed images use a superior 
dithering process, resulting in a much better image on a 16-color display, 
and a subtle improvement on a 256-color display.
*  Disadvantages: More memory (4 bytes per pixel) is required for delayed 
display. If anti-aliasing or transparency is performed this memory is 
required also. Delayed display gives no visual indication that rendering is 
in progress.
   


Pattern/Bump Maps
-----------------

If on, Pattern maps are displayed in the view.



Shadows
-------

If on, Shadows  in Phong shaded models are displayed in the view.



Transparency
------------

If on, materials that have a Transmit value greater than 0 are translucent. 
Transparent objects are updated last when rendering the view.



Display
-------

Controls whether the contents of a view are continuously rendered and, if 
so, how the view is rendered, as follows: 

Display:       Corresponding Item in View 
               Menu:

Wireframe      None

Wiremesh       Render > Wiremesh 

Cross-section  Render > Cross-section 

Hidden         Render > Hidden Line 

Filled Hidden LRender > Filled Hidden Line

Constant ShadinRender > Constant 

Smooth Shading Render > Smooth 

Phong Shading  Render > Phong 



Key-in: SET VIEW <WIREFRAME | WIREMESH | SECTION | HIDDEN | FILLED | 
CONSTANT | SMOOTH | PHONG>

Hint:
Using one-time rendering only as needed is usually more efficient than 
continuous rendering. Most design work is done in wireframe views, with 
views rendered on a one-time basis as desired, by choosing the desired item 
from the View menu's Rendering sub-menu.



Distance Cueing
---------------

Controls simulation of atmospheric fading in a view:
*  None -- Atmospheric fading is not produced.
*  Depth Cueing -- Elements are faded to black as their distance from the 
eye increases. 
*  Fog -- Elements are faded to the Fog Color... as their distance from the 
eye increases.
   
Note:
Distance Cueing is set up in the Rendering settings box, which is opened by 
choosing Rendering > Settings from the Settings menu.



Apply
-----

Applies rendering attribute changes to the View. The view is updated, if 
necessary, to show the effects of the changes.



All
---

Applies the attributes of the chosen View to all views.



Rendering > Assign Materials
----------------------------

Opens the Assign Materials settings box, which is used to assign materials 
to elements on a level(s) with a certain color(s). The title bar identifies 
the open material table file.

Note:
(identiying "assmat.ma")

   Material
   Palette
   Display
   File menu/Open Material Table...
   File menu/Save Material Table
   File menu/Save Material Table As...
   File menu/Open Palette...
   File menu/Exit
   Tools menu/Assign...
   Tools menu/Assign By Selection
   Tools menu/Delete Assignment
   Tools menu/Attach Material
   Tools menu/Delete Material Attachment
   Tools menu/Preview Material
   Tools menu/Edit Material


Material
--------

Lists the materials and the levels and colors of elements in the design to 
which they are assigned.



Palette
-------

TBD



Display
-------

Sets the shape used to display the material -- None (no display), 
Rectangle, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere.

Another option, Preview, is used only with the material Preview option.



File menu/Open Material Table...
--------------------------------

Opens the Open Table File dialog box, which is used to open a material 
table file.



File menu/Save Material Table
-----------------------------

Saves the material assignments to the open material table.



File menu/Save Material Table As...
-----------------------------------

Opens the Save Table File As dialog box, which is used to save the material 
assignments in a different material table file.



File menu/Open Palette...
-------------------------

Opens the Open Palette File dialog box, which is used to open a material 
palette file.



File menu/Exit
--------------

Closes the settings box.



Tools menu/Assign...
--------------------

Opens the Assign Material dialog box, which is used to assign a material to 
elements on a level(s) with a color(s). This menu item is not available 
(dimmed) if a material is not selected in the Material or Palette list box.

   Levels
   Colors


Levels
------

Sets the level(s) to which the material is to be assigned.



Colors
------

Sets the color(s) to which the material is to be assigned.



Tools menu/Assign By Selection
------------------------------

Used to assign a material in the open material palette by identifying an 
element. This menu item is not available (dimmed) if a material is not 
selected in the Material or Palette list box.



Tools menu/Delete Assignment
----------------------------

Deletes the selected assignment from the list. This menu item is not 
available (dimmed) if a material is not selected in the Material list box.



Tools menu/Attach Material
--------------------------

Attaches a material attribute to the selected element(s).



Tools menu/Delete Material Attachment
-------------------------------------

Deletes a material attribute from the selected element(s).



Tools menu/Preview Material
---------------------------

Used to see how a material looks when applied to an element(s) in a file.

After selecting an element, the Display section shows the material applied 
to the element. To preview multiple elements, use the Element Selection 
tool to select them prior to choosing Preview.



Tools menu/Edit Material
------------------------

Used to edit an existing material from either the material assignment list, 
or the Palette list. 

If you select an assignment from the current assignment list, or a material 
from the Palette list, choosing Edit Material opens the Define Materials 
settings box with that palette and material selected. If an assignment or a 
material is not selected, you are prompted to select elements. If the 
element has a material defined, the Define Material settings box opens with 
the palette and material selected.

This is particularly useful for browsing the material definitions in a 
design file.



Rendering > Define Materials
----------------------------

Opens the Define Materials settings box, which is used to create or modify 
a material palette. The title bar identifies the open material palette 
file.

For general information about defining materials, see Surface material 
definitions.

Note:
(identifying "defmat.ma" MDL application)

   Materials
   Shading
   Display
   Material Name
   Add
   Delete
   Replace
   Preview
   Material Lighting
   Ambient
   Diffuse
   Specular
   Finish
   Transmit
   Base Color
   Specular Color
   Cast Shadows
   More Settings
   Map
   Name
   (Pattern Map) Weight
   (Bump Map) Height
   Base Color
   Specular Color...
   Shadows
   (Pattern Map) Transparent Background
   (Bump Map) Invert
   Elevation Drape
   Angle
   Size
   Offset
   Clear
   Select...
   File menu/Open Palette...
   File menu/Save Palette
   File menu/Save Palette As...
   File menu/Exit


Materials
---------

Lists all defined materials. To display or edit a material, you must first 
select it.



Shading
-------

Sets the manner in which the Display shape is rendered -- Constant, Smooth, 
or Phong.



Display
-------

The shape used to display the material in the settings box -- Rectangle, 
Cylinder, Cone, Sphere, None (no display). 

Note:
The Preview option is used only when the Preview button is clicked to 
preview a material.



Material Name
-------------

Sets the material name. To avoid conflicts, each material's name should be 
unique in the material palette and any other material palette that might be 
used at the same time.



Add
---

Adds the material to the list.



Delete
------

Deletes the selected material from the list.



Replace
-------

Applies modifications to the selected material.



Preview
-------

Used to see how a material looks when applied to an element(s) in a model.

After clicking the Preview button, select an element. The display section 
shows the material applied to the element. To preview multiple elements, 
use the selection tool to choose them prior to clicking Preview.



Material Lighting
-----------------

Contains controls for affecting the manner in which the material interacts 
with light sources to produce lighting effects.



Ambient
-------

Sets the intensity of the material's ambient light.
   0 -- No ambient light.
   1 -- Full ambient lighting. 
   
Note:
In MicroStation Version 4 the value was always 1. For more information 
about material ambient light, see Material lighting effects in the UG.



Diffuse
-------

The intensity of the material's diffuse color.
   0 -- No diffuse color.
   1 -- Complete diffuse color.
   
A material's diffuse color is derived from this setting, a pattern map, or 
a combination of both. For more information about material diffuse color, 
see Material lighting effects in the UG.



Specular
--------

Sets the intensity of the specular highlights reflected by the material.
   0 -- Dull (for example, felt).
   1 -- Shiny (for example, chrome).
Refer also to Finish (below).



Finish
------

Controls the concentration of specular highlights.
   0 -- Low polish (for example, felt). A rough material scatters light and 
produces a larger specular highlight. 
   1 -- High polish (for example, chrome). A highly polished material has 
concentrated specular highlights. 
   
A material's specular highlights are determined from this setting and 
Specular. For more information about material finish, see Material lighting 
effects in the UG.



Transmit
--------

Sets the material's translucency (how transparent it is), if Transparency 
is on for the View being rendered.
   0 -- Opaque; objects located behind the object are completely hidden.
   1 -- Fully transparent; objects located behind the object are clearly 
visible.
   


Base Color
----------

TBD



Specular Color
--------------

TBD



Cast Shadows
------------

TBD



More Settings
-------------

Opens the More Material Settings box, which is used to control that do not 
affect MicroStation's rendering, but are applicable to ModelView or 
third-party rendering products. These settings are documented in the 
ModelView manual and include refractance, reflectance, Fresnel, Pixie Color 
and Pixie Pattern.



Map
---

Contains controls that are used to set how pattern maps and bump maps are 
displayed -- choose Pattern or Bump from the option menu.

The settings for both are the same, except for these that change:

For a Pattern Map: For a Bump 
                   Map:

Weight             Height

Transparent BackgroInvert





Name
----

Shows the name of the selected Pattern Map, or Bump Map.



(Pattern Map) Weight
--------------------

Sets the ratio of the contribution of a pattern map (if one is defined) to 
the diffuse material color, specified as follows:
   0 -- No pattern map contribution.
   1 -- All pattern map.
   0.5 -- Equal contribution from diffuse color and pattern map. 
   
Hint:
By mixing the diffuse color with a pattern map, the need for many different 
pattern maps is reduced. For example, both blue and pink materials could be 
created by mixing different base colors with a single marble pattern map.



(Bump Map) Height
-----------------

Sets the relative height of the bumps in the selected bump map. This can be 
used to magnify, or enhance, the 3D effect of a bump map.



Base Color
----------

Opens the Modify Material Color dialog box, which is used to define the 
material's diffuse color. The dialog box controls are analogous to those in 
the Modify Color dialog box.



Specular Color...
-----------------

Opens the Modify Material Color dialog box, which is used to define the 
color of the material's specular highlights. The dialog box controls are 
analogous to those in the Modify Color dialog box.



Shadows
-------

If off, the material will not cast shadows in a Phong image.



(Pattern Map) Transparent Background
------------------------------------

If on, the pattern map has a transparent background. The background is 
defined as all pixels that have the same color as the image's upper 
left-most pixel.



(Bump Map) Invert
-----------------

If on, the bump map is inverted -- the "hills" (bumps), become "valleys" 
and vice versa.



Elevation Drape
---------------

If on, "drapes" a raster image over the contents of a view. Useful for 
mapping (scanned) aerial photography to a 3D digital terrain model.



Angle
-----

Sets the angle at which the selected pattern or bump map is rotated when 
applied to elements in the design. Useful examples include angled wood 
paneling or tile. 

The default is 0 (no rotation).



Size
----

Sets the pattern or bump map's size -- used to repeat the pattern or bump 
map on elements.
   X -- Size in x-direction. 
   Y -- Size in y-direction. 
*  Surface -- The pattern or bump map is scaled relative to the size of the 
element. For example, a pattern or bump map of a single brick with size in 
the X and Y directions set to 0.5 displays as 4 bricks on the elements to 
which it is assigned.
*  Master Units -- The size of the pattern or bump map in the X and Y 
fields is specified in master units.
*  Sub Units -- The size of the pattern or bump map in the X and Y fields 
is specified in sub-units.
   


Offset
------

Sets the offset of the pattern or bump maps from the X or Y axes as a 
percentage of the pattern or bump map, where a value of 0.5, for example, 
offsets it by 50%.



Clear
-----

Removes the selected pattern or bump map from memory.



Select...
---------

Opens the Select Pattern Map or Select Bump Map dialog box, which are used 
to select a pattern or bump map, respectively.

   Type
   Preview
   OK
   Cancel


Type
----

Choose FLI, GIF, Img, Img (24 Bit), Intergraph RGB, Intergraph Bump, 
Intergraph RLE, BMP, PCX, Sun Raster, Targa, or TIFF.



Preview
-------

Click to preview the selected pattern or bump map.



OK
--

Click to select the pattern or bump map.



Cancel
------

Click to return to the Define Materials settings box.



File menu/Open Palette...
-------------------------

Opens the Open Palette File dialog box, which is used to open a material 
palette file.



File menu/Save Palette
----------------------

Saves the material definitions to the open material palette file.

Note:
If a material palette file is not open, definitions are not saved.



File menu/Save Palette As...
----------------------------

Opens the Save Palette As dialog box, which is used to save the material 
definitions to a different material palette file. 



File menu/Exit
--------------

Closes the Define Materials settings box.



Rendering > Global Lighting
---------------------------

Opens the Global Lighting settings box, which is used to control settings 
for Ambient, Flashbulb, and Solar lighting. 

Note:
(MDL application "globlgt.ma")

   Ambient
   Flashbulb
   Solar
   Solar Shadow Resolution
   Solar Direction Vector
   Lock
   Azimuth Angle
   Altitude Angle
   Location
   Longitude
   Latitude
   GMT Offset
   Cities...
   Map...
   Zones...
   Time
   Time
   Date
   Year


Ambient
-------

If on, enables controls for setting the intensity and color of ambient 
lighting in a rendered view.



Flashbulb
---------

If on, lets you control the intensity and color of the view flashbulb.



Solar
-----

If on, solar lighting is on and the controls for solar lighting are 
enabled. You can specify intensity, color, and whether or not solar shadows 
are cast in a Phong rendered image. Other settings let you position the sun 
in the "sky," specify the Location of the model, and set the Time.

Note:
For Solar shadows to be cast in a Phong shaded image, Shadows, which is set 
in the View Attributes settings box, must also be on.



Solar Shadow Resolution
-----------------------

TBD



Solar Direction Vector
----------------------

TBD



Lock
----

If on, the position of the solar light is determined by Vector values; if 
off, or by Location and Time settings.



Azimuth Angle
-------------

Sets the azimuth direction of the solar light (from 0-360d). 

Disabled (dimmed) if Lock is on.



Altitude Angle
--------------

The angle of the "sun" above the horizon (from 0-90d).

Disabled (dimmed) if Lock is on.



Location
--------

Contains controls used to set the model's location for calculating solar 
light. These controls are disabled (dimmed) if Lock is on.



Longitude
---------

Sets the longitude, at the model's location.



Latitude
--------

Sets the latitude, at the model's location.



GMT Offset
----------

Sets the time difference from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) at the model's 
location.



Cities...
---------

Opens the Location By City dialog box, which is used to set the Longitude, 
Latitude, and GMT Offset to the values for one of the listed cities.

   OK
   Cancel


OK
--

Sets the Longitude, Latitude, and GMT Offset to the values for the selected 
city.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without changing the Longitude, Latitude, and GMT 
Offset.



Map...
------

Opens the Location By Map dialog box, which is used to set the Longitude 
and Latitude by pointing at the location on a map of the world.

Note:
The GMT Offset cannot be set in the Location By Map dialog box.

   OK
   Cancel


OK
--

Sets the Longitude and Latitude to the values for the indicated location.



Cancel
------

Closes the dalog box without changing the Longitude and Latitude.



Zones...
--------

Opens the GMT Offset By Time Zone dialog box, which is used to set the GMT 
Offset by selecting a time zone.



Time
----

Contains controls to set the time, date, and year, for the rendering. These 
controls are disabled (dimmed) if Lock is on.



Time
----

Sets the time for the rendering. You can key in the time in the hour and 
minutes fields and choose AM or PM from the option menu at right.

The other unnamed option menu sets (United States) Standard or Daylight 
time.



Date
----

Sets the date for the rendering. Choose a month from the option menu and 
key in the day.



Year
----

Sets the year for the rendering.



Rendering > Source Lighting
---------------------------

Opens the Source Lighting settings box, which is used to control the 
placement and configuration of light source cells. 

Note:
(identifying MDL application "lightcon.ma")

   Light Type
   Color
   On
   Intensity
   Shadow
   Resolution
   Cone Angle
   Delta Angle
   Attenuate
   Distance
   Tools menu/Place New Light
   Tools menu/Edit Light
   Tools menu/Scan For Light
   Tools menu/Apply Values
   Tools menu/Move Light
   Tools menu/Target Light
   Tools menu/Delete Light
   Tools menu/Clear Shadow Map(s)


Light Type
----------

Sets the type of light source being specified -- Spot, Point, or Distant.



Color
-----

Opens the Modify Color dialog box, which is used to specify a color for the 
light source. Its controls are described in Colors > Color Table....



On
--

If on, the light source is on. If off, the light source is off. 



Intensity
---------

Sets the intensity of the light source.
*  0 -- No light.
*  1 -- Full brightness.
   


Shadow
------

If on, the light source can cast shadows, in a Phong rendered image. 
Applies only to Spot and Distant light sources. It is disabled (dimmed) if 
Light Type is set to Point.

Note:
For a light source to cast shadows in a Phong shaded image, Shadows must be 
on for the View. Shadows is set in the Rendering View Attributes settings 
box, which is opened by choosing Rendering > View Attributes from the 
Settings menu.



Resolution
----------

TBD



Cone Angle
----------

Sets the angle of the beam cone of a spot light source. Used to "focus" the 
beam. Disabled (dimmed) if Light Type is set to Point or Distant.



Delta Angle
-----------

Sets the angle through which a Spot light beam falls from full intensity to 
zero. Disabled (dimmed) if Light Type is set to Point or Distant.



Attenuate
---------

If on, TBD



Distance
--------

Sets the TBD



Tools menu/Place New Light
--------------------------

Used to place a light source cell with the current settings.



Tools menu/Edit Light
---------------------

Used to change the settings for an existing light source.



Tools menu/Scan For Light
-------------------------

Used to find and highlight the next light source in a file.



Tools menu/Apply Values
-----------------------

Applies the current settings to the selected light source.



Tools menu/Move Light
---------------------

Used to move an existing light source.



Tools menu/Target Light
-----------------------

Used to specify a new target point for an existing Spot or Distant light 
source. Disabled (dimmed) if Light Type is set to Point or Distant.



Tools menu/Delete Light
-----------------------

Used to delete an existing light source cell.



Tools menu/Clear Shadow Map(s)
------------------------------

Used to delete an existing shadow map(s).



Tag Sets
--------

Opens the Tag Sets settings box, which is used to create, edit, and remove 
tag set definitions. Before you can attach a tag to an element in the 
design file, you must first use this settings box to define the tag and the 
set of which it is a member.

Key-in: DIALOG TAGS

Note:
The Tag Sets settings box is part of the MDL application, "tags.ma," which 
loads when an item related to element tags is chosen from the File, 
Settings, or Palettes menu.

   Sets
   New Set Name
   Add
   Remove
   Tags
   Add...
   Edit...
   Remove


Sets
----

Lists the names of sets that are defined for the active design file. To 
operate on a set, you must first select it.



New Set Name
------------

Sets the set name when defining a set. The maximum valid number of 
characters is 32.



Add
---

Adds a set with the name specified in the New Set Name field to the Sets 
list box.



Remove
------

Removes the set that is selected in the Sets list box (and detaches all of 
the set's member tags from elements).



Tags
----

Lists the names of tags that are in the set selected in the Sets list box. 
To edit or remove a tag, you must first select it.



Add...
------

Opens the Define Tag dialog box for defining a new tag.



Edit...
-------

Opens the Define Tag dialog box for editing the tag that is selected in the 
Tags list box.



Remove
------

Removes the tag that is selected in the Tags list box (and detaches all 
instances of the tag from elements).



Define Tag dialog box
---------------------

Used to create and edit tag definitions. Opens when you click the Add or 
Edit button is clicked in the Tag Sets settings box.

   Tag Name
   Prompt
   Text Style
   Type
   Variable
   Default
   Confirm
   Default Tag Value
   Display Tag
   Reset
   OK
   Cancel


Tag Name
--------

Sets the tag name. The maximum valid number of characters is 32.



Prompt
------

Sets the prompt for the tag value that appears in the Tag Value dialog box 
if the value is Variable when the Attach Tag tool is used. This should be 
descriptive of the tag and also give the data type (see Type). The maximum 
valid number of characters is 32. The default prompt is "Key in value:".



Text Style
----------

Sets the style for displaying the tag value. 



Type
----

Sets the tag data type.
*  Character -- Text data, maximum 1024 characters.
*  Integer -- 4-byte numerical value.
*  Real -- 8-byte floating point value.
   


Variable
--------

If on, the tag value is variable. Unless Default is also on, the Tag Value 
dialog box will open when the Attach Tag tool is used, for keying in the 
value for the tag. If Variable is off, the default value is considered 
constant and cannot be changed when the tag is attached. The only way to 
change the value of a tag for which Variable is off is to edit the default 
value and apply it to all instances of the tag. By default Variable is on.



Default
-------

If on, the tag will be automatically attached with the default value when 
the Attach Tag tool is used. If Default Value is not set, the tag will be 
automatically attached with the value of NULL for character data or 0 for 
numeric data. By default Default is off.



Confirm
-------

If on, an alert box opens when the Attach Tag tool is used for confirming 
the tag value keyed in in the Tag Value dialog box. By default Confirm is 
off.



Default Tag Value
-----------------

Sets the default value for the tag.



Display Tag
-----------

If off, the tag will not be displayed in views. This is useful for fast 
displays or for associating non-visual information with a tag. By default 
Display Tag is on.



Reset
-----

Resets tag settings to their default or defined values.



OK
--

Accepts the specified tag definition and closes the dialog box.



Cancel
------

Closes the dialog box without creating or modifying the tag defintion.



Working Units...
----------------

Opens the Working Units dialog box, which is used to set "real world" 
working units and working resolution.

Key-in: DIALOG UNITS

For more information about working units and working resolution, see *XRef.

   Unit Names
   Master units
   Sub-Units
   Resolution
   Sub-Units Per Master Unit
   Positional Units Per Sub-Unit
   Working Area
   OK
   Cancel


Unit Names
----------

Contains controls used to identify master and sub-units with one- or 
two-character abbreviations.


Master units
------------

Identifies the largest measuring unit, for example, M (meters) or FT 
(feet).



Sub-Units
---------

Identifies the smaller measuring unit, for example, CM (centimeters) or IN 
(inches).



Resolution
----------

Contains controls used to set the working resolution and control the 
Working Area.


Sub-Units Per Master Unit
-------------------------

Sets the number of sub-units per master unit. This setting is ignored for 
AEC dimensioning.



Positional Units Per Sub-Unit
-----------------------------

Sets the number of positional units (UORs) per sub-unit -- the working 
resolution, which determines the size of elements.



Working Area
------------

Shows the design plane working area, in master units square, which is 
computed from the Resolution settings.



OK
--

Click to change the working unit settings. 

Warning:
An alert box cautions that working units should not be changed after 
elements are placed and gives you the opportunity to cancel changes. 
Maintaining consistent working units in a design lets you draw "full size" 
elements without regard for plotting scale. (You can infinitely adjust 
plotting scale when creating a plot.)



Cancel
------

Closes the dilaog box without changing the working unit settings.



Precision Input
---------------

Opens the Precision Input settings box, which continuously displays 
coordinates, distances, and angles and provides a means for precise input 
of data points. Precision input can override the effects of locks.

Key-in: DIALOG PRECISION

Clicking a label button (for example, DX) causes the value in the 
associated field to stop changing as the pointer is moved. This is useful 
for constraining data point entry. MicroStation's dynamics illustrate the 
constraint(s). Constraining continues, even if new values are keyed in, 
until a data point is entered or the button(s) are clicked again. When no 
constraints are set, the fields reflect the current position of the 
pointer. The pointer is adjusted for the effects of Grid Lock, Axis Lock, 
Unit Lock, and Isometric Lock if any are on.

Shift-clicking a label button locks the associated field (indicated by the 
button label turning black) so that constraining continues even after a 
data point is entered. This is helpful for using the same value (a 
distance, for example) more than once. To unlock a field, click the 
associated label button.

The arrowhead radio buttons are used to choose the field that is active 
immediately after a data point is entered. Choose the field you use most 
frequently.

Hint:
The Precision Input settings box can be bypassed, for many uses, with 
Precision Input key-ins.

   Coordinates
   Absolute
   Relative
   Angle
   Dist(ance)
   Apply
   Precision input key-ins


Coordinates
-----------

The option menu to the left of the Apply button sets the coordinate system 
in which coordinate fields are displayed and entered

*  Drawing (design plane/cube)
*  View
*  Auxiliary -- not available (dimmed) if an auxiliary coordinate system is 
not active. 
   
Note:
Using View coordinates rather than Drawing coordinates affects only the DX, 
DY, and DZ values.



Absolute
--------

The X, Y, and Z (3D only) fields continuously show the design file 
coordinates, in working units (MU

You can key in absolute coordinates for entering a data point:
   X -- x direction
   Y -- y direction
   Z -- z direction
   


Relative
--------

The DX, DY, and DZ (3D only) fields continuously display the distances, in 
working units (MU

You can key in relative distances for entering a data point.
   DX -- x direction
   DY -- y direction
   DZ -- z direction
   


Angle
-----

Shows the angle of the pointer in degrees, relative to the x-axis, from the 
last tentative point or data point. You can key in a relative angle for 
entering a data point, typically in conjunction with a keyed-in distance.



Dist(ance)
----------

Shows the distance of the pointer in working units (MU



Apply
-----

Enters a data point as specified in the fields. 

Pointing in a view and pressing the Data button also enters a data point as 
specified. However, the Data button cannot be used if a tentative point is 
set. In that case, the data point is entered, as usual, at the tentative 
point location. 



Precision input key-ins
-----------------------

   The following table summarizes precision input key-ins:
   
Key-in          Alternate        Distance from    Along/Relative 
                Key-in:                           to

POINT ABSOLUTE  XY=<x, y, z>     (0, 0, 0) (designDesign plane axes
                                 plane coordinates)

POINT DELTA     DL= <DX, DY, DZ> Last tentative orDesign plane axes
                                 data point

POINT VDELTA    DX= <DX, DY, DZ> Last tentative orView axes
                                 data point

POINT DISTANCE  DI=<distance>,   Last tentative orView X-axis**
                <direction>      data point

POINT ACSABSOLUTAX=

POINT ACSDELTA  AD=




The POINT ABSOLUTE (XY=) key-in is used to enter a data point at specified 
world (design plane/cube) coordinates as follows:

Key-in: POINT ABSOLUTE <x, y, [z]> or XY= <x, y, [z]>

The POINT DELTA (DL=) key-in is used to enter a data point at distances, 
relative to the last tentative point or data point, along the design plane 
axes as follows:

Key-in: POINT DELTA <delta X,delta Y,[delta Z]> or DL=<delta X,delta 
Y,[delta Z]>

The POINT VDELTA (DX=) key-in is used to enter a data point at distances, 
relative to the last tentative point or data point, along the view axes as 
follows:

Key-in: POINT VDELTA<delta X,delta Y,[delta Z]> *or DX=<delta X,delta 
Y,[delta Z]>

The POINT DISTANCE (DI=) key-in lets you enter a data point at a distance 
and direction relative to the last tentative point or data point as 
follows:

Key-in: POINT DISTANCE <distance, direction> *or DI=<distance, direction>

The Distance is specified in working units (MU:SU:PU), and Direction is 
specified as an angle in degrees relative to the view X-axis or as 
bearings. The syntax for a bearing is [NORTH | SOUTH] <angle> [EAST | WEST] 
-- for example, DI=10,N 30 E. Here, angle can be specified in decimal 
degrees or degrees, minutes, and seconds (dddmm'ss"). Any portion of the 
bearing can be omitted -- for example, DI=10,E.

   The POINT ACSABSOLUTE (AX=) is used to enter a data point at specified 
auxiliary coordinates. The specification depends on the type of the active 
auxiliary coordinate system, but is analogous to the POINT ABSOLUTE (XY=) 
key-in.
For example, to enter a data point at specified auxiliary coordinates in a 
3D cylindrical system, use the syntax AX=<R,q,Z>. Angles are specified in 
degrees.

The POINT ACSDELTA (AD=) key-in is used to enter a data point at distances 
or angles, relative to the last tentative point or data point, along or 
relative to the active auxiliary coordinate system axes. The specification 
depends on the type of the active auxiliary coordinate system, but is 
analogous to the POINT DELTA (DL=) and POINT VDELTA (DX=) key-ins.

For example, to enter a data point at specified auxiliary coordinates in a 
3D cylindrical system, use the syntax AD=<delta R,delta q, delta Z>. Angles 
are specified in degrees.

An omitted value in a precision input key-in is assumed to be 0. For 
example, the key-in DL=,5:4 is equal to DL=0,5:4.

   Syntax Notes


Syntax Notes
------------

The syntax of precision input key-ins includes a provision for specifying 
the view in which the data point will be entered. The view number 
optionally follows the last coordinate, distance, or angle. For example, 
the key-in XY=,,1 enters a data point at the global origin of the design 
plane in View 1. The equivalent key-in in 3D is XY=,,,1.

The syntax of precision input key-ins further includes a provision for 
entering multiple data points. A number following a "|" character at the 
end of a key-in string indicates how many data points will be entered. (The 
default is 1.) For example, the key-in DL=15|3 enters three data points at 
incremental distances of 15 master units from the last tentative point or 
data point.





















View Menu
---------

The View menu has items for opening and closing views, controlling the 
arrangement of views and other windows on the screen, and changing view 
contents.

Many items that let you change the contents of views (Update, Copy, Fit, 
Window, and Zoom) prompt you to select each view by entering a data point 
in the view.

These view controls work similarly to drawing tools in that Resetting backs 
up one step. However, it is possible to exit a view control by Resetting 
enough times to return to the control's state before the first step. 
Exiting a view control returns you to the selected drawing tool or active 
tool modifier.

To:                      Choose from the View 
                         Menu:

Open or close a view.    Open/Close > <view number>

Open a settings box that Open/Close > Dialog
you open or close a view.

Make the bottom view fullBottom to Top
visible.

Stack views so that at leCascade
the title bar of each is 
visible.

Arrange open views so thaTile
overlap.

Swap the screen image betSwap
two logical screens.

Update (redraw) a view(s)Update > View

Update (redraw) all viewsUpdate > All

Update (redraw) the fenceUpdate > Inside Fence
area.

Update (redraw) the conteUpdate > Outside Fence
the view, excluding the fenced 
area.

Update (redraw) the grid.Update > Grid

Update all views on the rKey in UPDATE RIGHT or 
(primary) or left (secondUPDATE LEFT (see 
screen.                  Update key-ins)

Update only the elements Key in UPDATE FILE or 
active design file or onlUPDATE REFERENCE (see 
elements in a reference fUpdate key-ins)

Negate the last viewing  Previous
operation.

Negate the last negated vNext
operation.

Copy a view's contents anCopy
attributes to another view(s).

Align two views so that tKey in ALIGN (see 
both display the same areTo align two views:).
volume.

Display all displayable  Fit > Active Design
elements in the active design 
in a view(s).

Display all displayable  Fit > All
elements in the active design 
and attached reference files in 
a view(s).

Display all displayable  Fit > Reference
elements in the attached 
reference files in a view(s).

Window an area in a view.Window > Area

Window an area in a view(Window > Center
defining the center.

Set the view origin.     Key in WINDOW ORIGIN 
                         (WO=) (see "To set the 
                         view origin:" on page 
                         5-11)

Window a volume in a 3D vWindow > Volume 

Pan in a view without chaHold down <Shift>, point 
the view magnification.  in the view, and press 
                         the Data button (see 
                         To pan in a view with a mouse:)

Scroll a view by a specifKey in MOVE (see 
factor.                  To scroll a view(s) by a specified factor:)

Increase the magnificatioZoom > In
view.

Decrease the magnificatioZoom > Out
view.

Set the target, position,Camera > Set Up 
clipping planes for a view 
camera and turn on the camera.

Turn the view camera on. Camera > On

Turn the view camera off.Camera > Off

Move the camera without mCamera > Move Camera
the camera target.

Move the target without mCamera > Move Target 
the camera.

Set the angles and focal Camera > Lens 
lengths of view camera lenses.

Show the display depth foUse the 
view(s).                 Show Display Depth 
                         tool 

Set the display depth forUse the 
view.                    Set Display Depth 
                         tool or key in SET 
                         DDEPTH RELATIVE (see 
                         To key in a view's Display Depth:)

Render a view(s) as a wirRender > Wiremesh 
display.

Render a view(s) as a    Render > Cross-section 
cross-section.

Render a view(s) as a    Render > Hidden Line 
hidden-line (polygon) display.

Render a view(s) as a filRender > Filled Hidden Line
hidden-line (filled polygon) 
display.

Render a view(s) as a conRender > Constant 
shaded model.

Render a view(s) as a smoRender > Smooth 
shaded model.

Render a view(s) as a PhoRender > Phong 
shaded model.

Render a Phong shaded vieRender > Phong Stereo 
with a stereo effect for 
viewing with 3D glasses.

Render an anti-aliased PhRender > Phong Anti-aliased
shaded view(s).

Set view attributes.     Attributes

Control the display of elLevels
by level.

Set the active level.    Levels

Control view rotation.   Rotation > Settings

Rotate a view(s) to a speKey in ROTATE VIEW 
orientation.             ABSOLUTE (see 
                         To rotate a view(s) to a specific orientation with a key-in:)

Rotate a view(s) relativeKey in ROTATE VIEW 
their current orientationRELATIVE (see 
                         To rotate a view(s) counter-clockwise about its center:)

Rotate a view(s) to alignRotation > By Element
with an element.

Rotate a view(s) by enterRotation > By Points
data points.

Rotate a view(s) to the  Rotation > Top
standard Top orientation.

Rotate a 3D view(s) to thRotation > Bottom
standard Bottom orientation.

Rotate a 3D view(s) to thRotation > Left
standard Left orientation.

Rotate a 3D view(s) to thRotation > Right
standard Right orientation.

Rotate a 3D view(s) to thRotation > Front
standard Front orientation.

Rotate a 3D view(s) to thRotation > Back
standard Back orientation.

Rotate a 3D view(s) to thRotation > Isometric
standard Isometric orientation.

Name and save a view.    Saved

Attach or delete a saved Saved



   Open/Close > <view number>
   Open/Close > Dialog
   Bottom to Top
   Cascade
   Tile
   Swap
   Update > View
   Update > All
   Update > Inside Fence
   Update > Outside Fence
   Update > Grid
   Update key-ins
   Previous
   Next
   Copy
   Fit > Active Design
   Fit > All
   Fit > Reference
   Window > Area
   Window > Center
   Window > Volume 
   Setting the view origin
   Panning
   Zoom > In
   Zoom > Out
   Camera > On
   Camera > Off
   Camera > Set Up 
   Camera > Move Camera
   Camera > Move Target 
   Camera > Lens 
   Render > Wiremesh 
   Render > Cross-section 
   Render > Hidden Line 
   Render > Filled Hidden Line
   Render > Constant 
   Render > Smooth 
   Render > Phong 
   Render > Phong Stereo 
   Render > Phong Anti-aliased
   Attributes
   Levels
   Rotation > Settings
   Rotation > By Element
   Rotation > By Points
   Rotation > Top
   Rotation > Bottom
   Rotation > Left
   Rotation > Right
   Rotation > Front
   Rotation > Back
   Rotation > Isometric
   Saved


Open/Close > <view number>
--------------------------

Lets you open or close a view. The items in the sub-menu are view numbers. 
The views marked "on" are open.

To open or close a view, choose the view from the sub-menu.

Key-in: VIEW OFF <view_number> VIEW ON <view_number>

Hint:
You can also close a view by double-clicking its window menu button.



Open/Close > Dialog
-------------------

Opens a settings box that has the same controls as the View menu's 
Open/Close sub-menu.



Bottom to Top
-------------

Makes the bottom view fully visible, even if the view is fully obscured 
before this item is chosen. 

Key-in: WINDOW BOTTOMTOTOP

Note:
To bring a partially obscured view to the front, you can also:

*  Click its title bar (if not obscured).
*  Click in its resize border.
   


Cascade
-------

Stacks views in numerical order with the lowest numbered view entirely 
visible and the title bar of each remaining view visible.

Key-in: WINDOW CASCADE

Note:
In the 2D seed design files supplied with MicroStation, views 1 and 2 are 
cascaded.



Tile
----

Tiles views between other MicroStation windows (Command Window, Text 
Editor, Tool Settings, palettes, and settings boxes) that are near the 
edges of the screens. This is a quick way to "clean up" the screen.

Key-in: WINDOW TILE



Swap
----

Swaps the screen image between two logical (virtual) screens. When Swap is 
chosen, MicroStation redraws the physical screen with the contents of the 
previously hidden logical screen. The Command Window remains visible in the 
same location. 

This item is dimmed if your system is configured with dual monitors or if 
it does not support two virtual screens. For information about configuring 
your system, see "Introducing MicroStation."

Key-in: SWAP SCREEN



Update > View
-------------

Updates (redraws) the contents of a view(s).

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be updated. To stop an 
update in progress, Reset.

You can choose this item directly from the View menu without opening the 
sub-menu.

Key-in: UPDATE [view_number]

Note:
Selecting the Update View control in the View Control sub-palette has the 
same effect as choosing this menu item. The Update View control is in the 
default start-up configuration of the Main palette.



Update > All
------------

Updates the contents of all views.

Key-in: UPDATE ALL 



Update > Inside Fence
---------------------

Updates the fenced area.

Key-in: UPDATE FENCE INSIDE



Update > Outside Fence
----------------------

Updates the contents of the view, excluding the fenced area.

Key-in: UPDATE FENCE OUTSIDE



Update > Grid
-------------

Updates (redraws) the grid in views in which Grid is on. This is useful 
after an element deletion removes part of the grid, or after grid units are 
redefined.

Key-in: UPDATE GRID

Note:
Grid is urned on for a view in the View Attributes settings box, which is 
opened by choosing Attributes from the View menu.



Update key-ins
--------------

These key-in only update methods are available

To Update:                   Key in:

All views on the right screenUPDATE RIGHT 
primary virtual screen).

All views on the left screen UPDATE LEFT 
secondary virtual screen).

Only elements in the active dUPDATE FILE 
file in all views.

Only elements in a reference UPDATE REFERENCE[a] 
in all views.

[a]You must then identify the reference file (see Identifying a reference 
file). 
   
   

Previous
--------

Negates the last viewing operation (view control operation or view 
attribute change). After you choose this item, select the view whose 
operation is to be negated.
   
   After you undo a viewing operation, the operation previous to the 
negated operation becomes undoable. You can, therefore, undo a series of 
previous operations -- a maximum of eight per view -- by selecting views.
   
   Choosing Next from the View menu negates view undo operations.
   
   Key-in: UNDO VIEW
   
   Note:
   To undo a drawing operation, choose Undo (action) from the Edit menu.
   
   

Next
----

Negates the last negated viewing operation. After you choose this item, 
select the view(s).
   
   Key-in: REDO VIEW
   
   

Copy
----

Copies the contents of an entire view and its corresponding attributes to 
other views.
   
   After you choose this item, select the source view and the destination 
view(s).
   
   Key-in: COPY VIEW
   
   To align two views:


To align two views
------------------

1. Key in ALIGN.
2. Select the source view.
3. Select the view(s) to align with the source view.
   The second view displays the same area (in 3D, volume) as the source 
view.
   The orientation of the second view remains the same.
   


Fit > Active Design
-------------------

Fits all displayable elements in the active design file in a view(s). This 
is useful as an overview of the entire design.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be fitted. The view 
origin, magnification, and in 3D, the display depth are adjusted so that 
all elements on levels that are on in the views are displayed. Elements on 
levels that are off are ignored.

Key-in: FIT ACTIVE

Note:
Selecting the Fit Active Design control in the View Control sub-palette has 
the same effect as choosing this menu item.



Fit > All
---------

Fits all displayable elements in the active design file and attached 
reference files into a view(s).

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be fitted.

Key-in: FIT ALL



Fit > Reference
---------------

Fits displayable elements in all attached reference files in a view(s).

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be fitted. 

Key-in: FIT REFERENCE

   To fit some of the attached reference files in a view(s):


To fit some of the attached reference files in a view(s)
--------------------------------------------------------

1. Key in FIT REFERENCE [file_number_list].
   file_number_list lists the attachment numbers (*Xref) of the reference 
files to fit. Hyphens (-) denote ranges of attachments and commas are used 
as a separator, as in 3-5,8,91-100.
2. Select the view(s).
   


Window > Area
-------------

Windows (fits) the contents of an area of a view in a view. In 3D, the 
display depth is not affected. Use *XRef to window the volume of a view.

After you choose this item, enter a pair of data points to define a range 
(window) and then select the destination view. One of the destination views 
can be the source view.

You can choose this item directly from the View menu without opening the 
sub-menu.

Key-in: WINDOW AREA

Note:
Selecting the Window Area control in the View Control sub-palette has the 
same effect as choosing this menu item.



Window > Center
---------------

Defines a new viewing area by specifying the center of the area.

After you choose this item, enter a data point to define the center of the 
desired viewing area and then select the destination view(s). One of the 
destination views can be the source view. The rotation and magnification of 
the destination view(s) remain unchanged.

Key-in: WINDOW CENTER

Note:
Selecting the Window Center control in the View Control sub-palette has the 
same effect as choosing this menu item.



Window > Volume 
----------------

Windows (fits) the volume of a 3D view in a view.

After you choose this item, enter two data points to define a range 
(window) and then select the destination view. The volume of the range is 
determined by the depth of each data point.

Note:
For information about controlling the depth of data points in 3D, see *XRef 
in the User's Guide.

This item is dimmed if the active design file is not 3D.

Key-in: WINDOW VOLUME



Setting the view origin
-----------------------

The view origin is the lower left corner of the view.

>> To set the view origin:

1. Key in WINDOW ORIGIN mu[:su:pu], mu[:su:pu, mu:su:pu].
   or
   WO= mu[:su:pu], mu[:su:pu, mu:su:pu].
2. Select the view.
   
For example, to set the view origin to the global origin, key in WO=0,0,0. 
(This assumes the global origin is (0,0,0).)



Panning
-------

Panning is the process of viewing a different part of a design without 
changing the view magnification. Any view can be panned, but panning is 
most useful with 2D views and orthogonal 3D views. The View menu does not 
have an item for panning.

   To pan in a view with a mouse:
   To scroll a view(s) by a specified factor:


To pan in a view with a mouse
-----------------------------

1. Press the <Shift> key and hold it down.
2. Point in the view, press the Data button, and hold it down. The pointer 
location becomes the anchor point for panning.
3. Drag in the direction to pan. When panning begins, the <Shift> key can 
be released.
4. The panning speed increases as the pointer is dragged farther away from 
the anchor point. You can change the panning direction without repeating 
steps 1 and 2.
   
Note:
For information about panning with a digitizing tablet, see *Xref in 
Introducing MicroStation.



To scroll a view(s) by a specified factor
-----------------------------------------

1. Key in MOVE <DOWN | LEFT | RIGHT | UP> [factor].
   factor is the amount of the view to scroll. If factor is omitted the 
view is scrolled by the default factor -- 0.25 (one fourth of the view).
2. Select the view(s). 
   


Zoom > In
---------

Increases the magnification of a view(s), making elements appear larger.

After you choose this item, select each view at the point to zoom about.

In 3D, only the view's area is changed; the display depth remains the same.

Key-in: ZOOM IN [zoom_factor]

Hint:
The zoom in key-in lets you specify a zoom factor. For example, the key-in 
ZOOM IN 2.5 specifies a factor of 2.5. The factor is a value in the 1-100 
range. The default is 2.0.

Note:
Selecting the Zoom In control in the View Control sub-palette has the same 
effect as choosing this menu item.



Zoom > Out
----------

Decreases the magnification of a view(s), making elements appear smaller.

After you choose this item, select each view at the point to zoom about.

In 3D, only the view's area is changed; the display depth remains the same.

Key-in: ZOOM OUT [zoom_factor]

Hint:
The zoom out key-in lets you specify a zoom factor. For example, the key-in 
ZOOM OUT 2.5 specifies a factor of 2.5. The factor is a value in the 1-100 
range. The default is 2.0.

Note:
Selecting the Zoom Out control in the View Control sub-palette has the same 
effect as choosing this menu item.



Camera > On
-----------

Turns the camera on in the view(s).

After you choose this item, select the view(s).

Key-in: SET CAMERA ON



Camera > Off
------------

Turns the camera off the view(s).

After you choose this item, select the view(s).

Key-in: SET CAMERA OFF



Camera > Set Up 
----------------

Lets you set the target, position, and clipping planes for a view camera 
and turn on the camera for the view.

This item is dimmed if the active design file is not 3D.

>> To turn on the camera and set the target, position, and clipping planes:

1. From the View menu's Camera sub-menu, choose Setup.
2. Select the view.
3. Enter a data point to define the camera target -- the focal point 
(center) of the view. 
4. Enter a data point to define the camera position. 
   A dynamic pyramid displays to show the viewing volume with the camera at 
the pointer location. 
5. Enter a data point to define the front clipping plane -- any elements or 
parts of elements in front of this plane are not displayed.
6. Enter a data point to define the back clipping plane -- any elements or 
parts of elements behind this plane are not displayed.
   The camera is turned on.
   
Key-in: SET CAMERA DEFINITION



Camera > Move Camera
--------------------

Lets you move the camera without moving the camera target -- analogous to 
focusing the camera at an object and moving around to obtain different 
views of the object. This item is dimmed if the active design file is not 
3D.

>> To move the camera:

1. From the View menu's Camera sub-menu, choose Move Camera.
2. Select the view.
   A dynamic pyramid shows the viewing volume with the camera at the 
pointer location. 
3. Enter a data point to define the new camera position.
   If the camera was off, it is turned on.
   
Key-in: SET CAMERA POSITION



Camera > Move Target 
---------------------

Lets you move the target without moving the camera -- analogous to standing 
in one position and pointing the camera at different objects. 

This item is dimmed if the active design file is not 3D.

>> To move the target:

1. From the View menu's Camera sub-menu, choose Target.
2. Select the view.
   A dynamic pyramid shows the viewing volume with the camera target at the 
pointer location. 
3. Enter a data point to define the new camera target.
4. Enter a data point to define the front clipping plane.
5. Enter a final data point to define the back clipping plane.
   If the camera was off, it is turned on.
   
Key-in: SET CAMERA TARGET



Camera > Lens 
--------------

Opens the Camera Lens settings box, which is used to set the angles and 
focal lengths of view camera lenses. Changes take effect only if applied 
with the Apply button.

This item is dimmed if the active design file is not 3D.

Key-in: DIALOG CAMERA

   View Number 
   Angle
   Focal Length
   Standard
   Apply


View Number 
------------

Sets the view for which camera lens settings are displayed. 



Angle
-----

Sets the camera lens angle in degrees.

Key-in: SET CAMERA LENS ANGLE <degrees>



Focal Length
------------

Sets the camera lens focal length in millimeters (MM). 

Key-in: SET CAMERA LENS LENGTH<length_in_mm>



Standard
--------

Sets the camera lens type-- Fisheye, Extra Wide, Wide, Normal, Portrait, 
Telephoto, or Telescopic.

Key-in: SET CAMERA LENS <standard_lens>



Apply
-----

Applies lens changes to the chosen view. The view is updated, if necessary, 
to show the effects of the changes.

To discard changes (not apply them), choose a different view from the View 
Number Option menu.



Render > Wiremesh 
------------------

Renders a view(s) as a Wiremesh display.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rendered.

Each view rendered this way reverts back to its normal Display as soon as 
it is updated or otherwise changed.

Key-in: RENDER VIEW WIREMESH



Render > Cross-section 
-----------------------

Renders a view(s) as a Cross-section display. 
*  If an auxiliary coordinate system (ACS) is active, the cross-section is 
cut at the x-y plane of the ACS. For more information about auxiliary 
coordinate systems, see Auxiliary Coordinates.
*  If an ACS is not active, the cross-section is cut at the view's active 
depth (parallel to the view).
   
After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rendered.

Each view rendered this way reverts back to its normal Display as soon as 
it is updated or otherwise changed.

Key-in: RENDER VIEW SELECTION



Render > Hidden Line 
---------------------

Renders a view(s) as a Hidden line display, also called a "polygon" 
display.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rendered.

Each view rendered this way reverts back to its normal Display as soon as 
it is updated or otherwise changed.

Key-in: RENDER VIEW HIDDEN

Hint:
To create a higher quality hidden line display, generate a visible edges 
design file by choosing Export > Visible Edges in the File menu.



Render > Filled Hidden Line
---------------------------

Renders a view(s) as a Filled hidden line display, also called a "filled 
polygon" display.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rendered.

Each view rendered this way reverts back to its normal Display as soon as 
it is updated or otherwise changed.

Key-in: RENDER VIEW FILLED



Render > Constant 
------------------

Renders a view(s) with Constant shading.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rendered.

Each view rendered this way reverts back to its normal Display as soon as 
it is updated or otherwise changed.

Key-in: RENDER VIEW CONSTANT



Render > Smooth 
----------------

Renders a view(s) with Smooth (Gouraud) shading.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rendered.

Each view rendered this way reverts back to its normal Display as soon as 
it is updated or otherwise changed.

Key-in: RENDER VIEW SMOOTH



Render > Phong 
---------------

Renders a view(s) with Phong shading, the most realistic of MicroStation's 
rendering methods.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rendered.

Each view rendered this way reverts back to its normal Display as soon as 
it is updated or otherwise changed.

Key-in: RENDER VIEW PHONG



Render > Phong Stereo 
----------------------

Renders a view(s) with Phong stereo shading for viewing with the supplied 
3D glasses.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rendered. If the 
camera for a selected view is not on, is turned on. 

Each view rendered this way reverts back to its normal Display as soon as 
it is updated or otherwise changed.

Key-in: RENDER VIEW STEREO



Render > Phong Anti-aliased
---------------------------

Renders a view(s) with Phong Anti-aliased shading.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rendered. If the 
camera for a selected view is not on, is turned on. 

Each view rendered this way reverts back to its normal Display as soon as 
it is updated or otherwise changed.

Key-in: RENDER VIEW ANTIALIAS



Attributes
----------

Opens the View Attributes settings box, which is used to set view 
attributes that affect whether and how certain types and classes of 
elements are displayed and whether certain drawing aids are displayed. 
Changes take effect only if applied with the Apply or All button.

Key-in: DIALOG VIEWSETTINGS

Note:
Rendering view attributes are set in the Rendering View Attributes box, 
which is opened by choosing Rendering > View Attributes from the Settings 
menu.

Note:
When view attributes are set with key-ins, the effect is usually not 
apparent until the view(s) is updated by choosing Update > View from the 
View menu or with the Update View control.

   View
   ACS Triad
   Area Fill
   Background
   Camera
   Constructions
   Dimensions
   Dynamics
   (Enter) Data Fields
   Fast Cells
   Fast Curves
   Fast Font
   Fast Ref(erence File) Clipping
   Grid
   Level Symbology
   Line Weights
   Patterns
   Ref(erence File) Boundaries
   Text
   Text Nodes
   Apply
   All


View
----

Sets the view for which attribute settings are displayed.



ACS Triad
---------

If on, a coordinate triad representing the active auxiliary coordinate 
system (ACS) is displayed. 

Key-in: SET ACSDISPLAY [off | on | toggle]

Note:
The ACS is controlled using the Auxiliary Coordinate Systems settings box, 
which is opened by choosing Auxiliary Coordinates from the Settings menu.



Area Fill
---------

If on, solid, closed elements with Fill Type of Opaque or Transparent and 
text characters in a filled font display with color fill. 

Key-in: SET FILL [off | on]



Background
----------

If on, the view background is displayed.

Key-in: SET BACKGROUND [off | on]



Camera
------

If on, the view camera is on for the view. 

This control is disabled (dimmed) if the active design file is 2D.

Key-in: SET CAMERA <off | on>

Note:
See Perspective views -- the view camera for information about using the 
view camera.



Constructions
-------------

If on, construction elements (those with the Class attribute of 
Construction) are displayed. In general, construction elements are placed 
to assist in drawing but are not actually part of the design.

Key-in: SET CONSTRUCT [off | on]

Note:
Constructions typically are turned off in a view before plotting or 
rendering.



Dimensions
----------

If on, dimension elements are displayed. Turning Dimensions off can 
decrease view update time.

Key-in: SET DIMENSION [off | on]



Dynamics
--------

If on, elements are dynamically updated as they are displayed or modified, 
letting you see an element or modification before it is actually placed in 
the design. Turning Dynamics off can decrease view update time.

Key-in: SET DYNAMIC [off | on]



(Enter) Data Fields
-------------------

If on, enter data fields (see *Xref in User's Guide) are displayed.

Key-in: SET ED [off | on]



Fast Cells
----------

If on, cells are displayed as outlines. Turning Fast Cells on can decrease 
view update time.

Key-in: SET CELL [off | on | toggle]



Fast Curves
-----------

If on, curve elements display as line strings (with line segments 
connecting the vertices). 

If off, curves are smooth.

Turning Fast Curves on can decrease view update time.

Key-in: SET CURVES [fast | slow]



Fast Font
---------

If on, all text elements are displayed in the fast font. A font library can 
have only one Fast character font and one Fast symbol font. Since text 
elements generally require more time to update than most other element 
types, turning Fast Font on can decrease view update time.

Key-in: SET FONT [fast | slow]



Fast Ref(erence File) Clipping
------------------------------

If on, reference files are clipped to the largest rectangle that encloses 
the clipping boundaries. Turning on Fast Ref. Clipping can decrease view 
update time if the reference file clipping boundaries in the view are 
non-rectangular.

Key-in: SET REFCLIP [fast | slow]

Note:
Reference file clipping boundaries are defined with the Define Reference 
File Clipping Boundary tool.



Grid
----

If on, the grid is displayed. Its uniformly placed dots (grid points) and 
crosses (grid references) provide an indication of distances as a visual 
aid and a means of facilitating drawing precision with Grid Lock.

Key-in: SET GRID [off | on]

Note:
Grid Lock and settings that affect grid display are set in the Grid 
settings box, which is opened by choosing Grid from Settings menu.

Note:
When the grid disappears as you Zoom > Out of a view is controlled by the 
Max. Grid Pts/View and Max Grid Refs/View user preferences, which are not 
view-dependent.

Note:
To redraw the grid, for example after an element is deleted, choose Update 
> Grid from the View menu.



Level Symbology
---------------

If on, level symbology -- the color, numbered line style, and line weight 
associated with each level -- is dispayed in the view, instead of the 
color, numbered line style, and line weight of each element.

Note:
To set level symbology, choose Level Symbology... from the Settings menu.

Key-in: SET LVLSYMB [off | on]



Line Weights
------------

If on, elements are displayed with their line weight. 

If off, all elements are displayed with a line weight of zero. Turning Line 
Weights off can decrease view update time.

Key-in: SET WEIGHT [off | on]



Patterns
--------

If on, pattern elements are displayed. Turning Patterns off can decrease 
view update time.

Key-in: SET PATTERN [off | on]



Ref(erence File) Boundaries
---------------------------

If on, reference file clipping boundaries, represented by dashed polygons, 
are displayed.

Key-in: SET REFBOUND [off | on]

Note:
Reference file clipping boundaries are defined with the Define Reference 
File Clipping Boundary tool.



Text
----

If on, text elements are displayed. Since text elements take longer to 
display than most other elements, turning Text off can decrease view update 
time.

Key-in: SET TEXT [off | on]



Text Nodes
----------

If on, empty text nodes are displayed as small crosses with numeric 
identifiers. When you insert text in empty text nodes with the Place Text 
tool, displaying the nodes is useful. However, in most cases displaying 
text nodes is unnecessary.

Key-in: SET NODES [off | on]



Apply
-----

Applies attribute changes to the chosen View. The view is updated, if 
necessary, to show the effects of the changes. To discard changes (not 
apply them), choose a different view from the View option menu.



All
---

Applies the displayed attributes to all views.



Levels
------

Opens the View Levels settings box, which is used to control the display of 
elements by level and set the Active Level.

Key-in: DIALOG VIEWLEVELS

   View
   View Levels
   Apply
   All


View
----

Sets the view for which the level map is indicated.



View Levels
-----------

Sets the level map for the chosen view
*  Elements on levels shown in black are displayed in the view.
*  The circle indicates the Active Level.
   
You can do the following:

To:                    Do this:

Toggle the display of  Click the level.
elements on a level

To set many levels at oDrag through the level 
                       map.

Set a rectangular blockPress <Shift> while 
levels                 dragging.

Set the active level   Double-click the desired 
                       level. 



Key-in: SET LEVELS [ON | OFF] <level_list>

level_list can be as follows:

Form:                 Examples:

List levels by number SET LEVELS ON 2,4,7,9 

Range(s) of levels,   SET LEVELS ON 2-4 SET 
indicated by hyphen (-LEVELS ON 2-4,9-15 

Level and level group SET LEVELS ON plumbing 
names[a]

[a]The complete level path must be specified for each name that is not 
unique in the level structure. The colon (:) is the separator character in 
a level path specification.
   
Hint:
Using the SET LEVELS key-in or one of these alternate key-ins can be faster 
than using the controls in the Levels settings box.

To:          Key in:[a]

Display levelON=<level_list> 

Hide levels  OF=<level_list> 

[a]After either key-in, you must select the view(s).
   
Note:
Elements on the Active Level are displayed in all views.



Apply
-----

Applies level display changes to the chosen view. The view is updated, if 
necessary, to show the effects of the changes.

To discard changes (not apply them), choose a different view from the View 
Number option menu.



All
---

APplies the displayed level map to all views.



Rotation > Settings
-------------------

Opens the View Rotation settings box, which is used to control view 
rotation. Changes take effect only if applied with the Apply button.

Key-in: DIALOG VIEWROTATION

   Std. (Standard)
   View
   "+" Control
   "-" Control
   Step
   Axis
   Apply
   To rotate a view(s) to a specific orientation with a key-in:
   To rotate a view(s) counter-clockwise about its center:


Std. (Standard)
---------------

Sets a standard orientation:

2D  Top (not rotated)

3D  Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left, Right, or 
    Iso(metric)



Key-in: VIEW <TOP | BOTTOM | FRONT | BACK | LEFT | RIGHT | ISO>

Hint:
Using a key-in to specify a standard rotation can be faster than opening 
the settings box and using its controls.



View
----

Sets the view for which rotation is displayed.



"+" Control
-----------

Rotates in the positive direction by the Step amount about the specified 
Axis.



"-" Control
-----------

Click to rotate the view in the negative direction by the Step amount about 
the specified Axis.



Step
----

Sets the rotation increment, in degrees, for each click on a "+" or "-" 
control.



Axis
----

Sets the ???:
*  View -- TBD
*  Drawing -- TBD


Apply
-----

Applies the displayed rotation to the chosen View. To discard changes (not 
apply them), choose a different view from the View option menu.



To rotate a view(s) to a specific orientation with a key-in
-----------------------------------------------------------

1. (2D) Key in ROTATE VIEW ABSOLUTE<dd>.
   dd is the rotation, in degrees, about the view center (by default, 0).
   or
   (3D) Key in ROTATE VIEW ABSOLUTE <xx,yy,zz>.
   xx, yy, and zz are the rotations, in degrees, about the view x-, y-, and 
z-axes (by default, 0 for each).
2. Select the view(s).
   


To rotate a view(s) counter-clockwise about its center
------------------------------------------------------

1. (2D) Key in ROTATE VIEW RELATIVE <dd>.
   or
   Key in RV=<dd>.
   dd is the relative, counter-clockwise rotation, in degrees, about the 
view center.
   or
   (3D) Key in ROTATE VIEW RELATIVE <xx,yy,zz>
   or
   RV=<xx,yy,zz>.
   xx, yy, and zz are the relative, counter-clockwise rotations, in 
degrees, about the view x-, y-, and z-axes.
2. Select the view(s).
   


Rotation > By Element
---------------------

Rotates a view(s) to align it with a planar element.

After you choose this item, enter a pair of data points to identify the 
element and select the view(s) to be rotated.

In: View is rotated so that:

2D  Its x-axis is aligned with edge of identified 
    element.

3D  Its x-axis is aligned with edge of identified 
    element and its z-axis is perpendicular to 
    identified element.



The first data point also indicates the part of the element with which to 
align view's x-axis.

Element:    View x-axis is:

Linear      Aligned with identified line segment

Non-linear  Tangent to identified element at the 
            identification point.



Key-in: ROTATE VIEW ELEMENT



Rotation > By Points
--------------------

Rotates a view(s) as specified by graphically entered data points.

After you choose this item, enter data points in succession to:
*  Define the origin of the view x-axis.
*  Define the positive direction of the view x-axis.
*  (3D only) Define the view y-axis. The viewing plane will be parallel to 
the plane defined by the this data point and the two previous ones.
*  Select the view(s) to be rotated.
   
Key-in: ROTATE VIEW POINTS or ROTATE 3PTS



Rotation > Top
--------------

Rotates a view(s) to the standard Top orientation.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rotated.

Key-in: VIEW TOP



Rotation > Bottom
-----------------

(3D only) Rotates a view(s) to the standard Bottom orientation.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rotated.

Key-in: VIEW BOTTOM



Rotation > Left
---------------

(3D only) Rotates a view(s) to the standard Left orientation.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rotated.

Key-in: VIEW LEFT



Rotation > Right
----------------

(3D only) Rotates a view(s) to the standard Right orientation.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rotated.

Key-in: VIEW RIGHT



Rotation > Front
----------------

(3D only) Rotates a view(s) to the standard Front orientation.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rotated.

Key-in: VIEW FRONT



Rotation > Back
---------------

(3D only) Rotates a view(s) to the standard Back orientation.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rotated.

Key-in: VIEW BACK



Rotation > Isometric
--------------------

(3D only) Rotates a view(s) to the standard Isometric orientation.

After you choose this item, select the view(s) to be rotated.

Key-in: VIEW ISO



Saved
-----

Opens the Saved Views settings box, which is used to name, save, attach, 
and delete views. Saving a view allows you to quickly recall a view with 
specific attributes.

Key-in: DIALOG NAMEDVIEWS

   Source
   View
   Name
   Description
   Save
   Saved
   Dest(ination) View
   Attach
   Delete


Source
------

Controls that are used to specify a view to save.



View
----

Sets the number of the source view.



Name
----

Sets the saved view's name -- limited to six uppercase alphabetic or 
numeric characters and the punctuation characters "-", ".", and ",". 
Lowercase characters are interpreted as uppercase.



Description
-----------

Sets the saved view's optional description--up to 27 characters. Acceptable 
characters include those listed for the Name, plus the space character.



Save
----

Saves the chosen source view with the specified Name and Description.

This button is dimmed if the Name field is blank.

Key-in: SAVE VIEW <name>[,description] SV=<name>[,description]



Saved
-----

Controls that are used to attach a saved view to a view in the design. The 
list box shows the Name and Description of each view saved in the active 
design file. To attach or delete a view, you must first select it.



Dest(ination) View
------------------

Sets the number of the destination view.



Attach
------

Windows the area of the selected view in the destination view.

Key-in: VI=<name>



Delete
------

Deletes the selected view from the active design file.

Key-in: DELETE VIEW <name> DV=<name>





















Palettes Menu
-------------

The Palettes menu has items for opening and closing palettes and 
sub-palettes.

   Main > Main
   Main > Arcs
   Main > Cells
   Main > Chain
   Main > Change Element
   Main > Circles and Ellipses
   Main > Curves
   Main > Drop Element
   Main > Fence
   Main > Fillets
   Main > Lines
   Main > Manipulate Element
   Main > Modify Element
   Main > Points
   Main > Polygons
   Main > Text
   Main > View Control
   3D
   Auxiliary Coordinates
   Database
   Dimensioning > Dimensioning
   Dimensioning > Angular
   Dimensioning > Linear
   Dimensioning > Radial
   Dimensioning > Miscellaneous
   Match
   Measuring
   Multi-line Joints
   Patterning
   Reference Files
   Tags
   Close Sub-palettes


Main > Main
-----------

Opens the Main palette, which is arranged as follows:

Left Column:                Right Column:

Element Selection           Lines sub-palette
tool

Fence sub-palette           Polygons sub-palette

Arcs Sub-palette            Circles and Ellipses sub-palette

Curves sub-palette          Text sub-palette

Points sub-palette          Cells sub-palette

Fillets sub-palette         Manipulate Element sub-palette

Change Element sub-palette  Modify Element sub-palette

Chain sub-palette           Drop Element sub-palette

View Control                Delete Element 
sub-palette (*Xref)         tool



The Main palette is open when you start MicroStation for the first time.

Key-in: DIALOG MAINFRAME



Main > Arcs
-----------

Opens the Arcs Sub-palette.

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50ARC



Main > Cells
------------

Opens the Cells sub-palette.

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50CELL



Main > Chain
------------

Opens the Chain sub-palette.

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50CHAIN



Main > Change Element
---------------------

Opens the Change Element sub-palette.

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50CHANGE



Main > Circles and Ellipses
---------------------------

Opens the Circles and Ellipses sub-palette.

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50CIRCLE



Main > Curves
-------------

Opens the Curves sub-palette.

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50CURVE



Main > Drop Element
-------------------

Opens the Drop Element sub-palette.

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50DROP



Main > Fence
------------

Opens the Fence sub-palette.

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50FENCE



Main > Fillets
--------------

Opens the Fillets sub-palette.

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50FILLET



Main > Lines
------------

Opens the Lines sub-palette.

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50LINE



Main > Manipulate Element
-------------------------

Opens the Manipulate Element sub-palette.

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50MANIPULATE



Main > Modify Element
---------------------

Opens the Modify Element sub-palette.

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50MODIFY



Main > Points
-------------

Opens the Points sub-palette.

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50POINT



Main > Polygons
---------------

Opens the Polygons sub-palette.

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50POLYGON



Main > Text
-----------

Opens the Text sub-palette.

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50TEXT



Main > View Control
-------------------

Opens the View Control sub-palette (*Xref).

Key-in: DIALOG PALETTE 50VIEWCONTROL



3D
--

Opens the 3D palette, which is arranged as follows:

Left Column:                Right Column:

3D Primitives sub-palette   3D Free-form Surfaces sub-palette

Manipulate 3D Surfaces sub-p3D View Control sub-palette



This item is dimmed if the active design file is not 3D.



Auxiliary Coordinates
---------------------

Opens the ACS palette.



Database
--------

Opens the Database palette (*XRef)



Dimensioning > Dimensioning
---------------------------

Opens the Dimensioning palette, which is arranged as follows:

Left Column:                 Right Column:

Angular Dimensions sub-palettLinear Dimensions sub-palette

Misc(ellaneous) Dimensions suRadial Dimensions sub-palette





Dimensioning > Angular
----------------------

Opens the Angular Dimensions sub-palette.



Dimensioning > Linear
---------------------

Opens the Linear Dimensions sub-palette.



Dimensioning > Radial
---------------------

Opens the Radial Dimensions sub-palette.



Dimensioning > Miscellaneous
----------------------------

Opens the Misc(ellaneous) Dimensions sub-palette.



Match
-----

Opens the Match palette.



Measuring
---------

Opens the Measuring palette.



Multi-line Joints
-----------------

Opens the Multi-line Joints palette.



Patterning
----------

Opens the Patterning palette.



Reference Files
---------------

Opens the Reference Files palette.



Tags
----

Opens the Tags palette.



Close Sub-palettes
------------------

Closes all sub-palettes and any palettes that do not have sub-palettes.



















Snaps Menu
----------

The Snaps menu has items for setting the snap mode, which determines how 
tentative points snap to elements and can impose constraints during 
placement or modification. The same items can be used to set the snap 
overrides, which permit a single-shot use of a snap mode other than the 
active snap mode.

To:                      Choose from the Snaps 
                         menu:

Snap a tentative point toNearest
point on an element closest to 
the pointer.

Snap a tentative point toKeypoint
keypoint on an element.

Snap a tentative point toMidpoint
midpoint of an element or a 
segment of an element.

Snap a tentative point toCenter
center or centroid of an 
element.

Snap a tentative point toOrigin
origin of a cell.

Snap a tentative point toBisector (not yet implemented)
midpoint of an entire element.

Snap a tentative point toIntersection
intersection of two elements.

Constrain an element to bTangent
tangent to another element.

Constrain an element to bTangent Point
tangent to another element with 
the point of tangency at its 
starting or ending point.

Constrain an element to bPerpendicular
perpendicular to another 
element.

Constrain an element to bPerpendicular Point
perpendicular to another 
element with the point of 
intersection at its starting or 
ending point.

Constrain an element to  Intersection
intersect another element with 
the point of intersection at 
its starting or ending point.

Constrain an element to bParallel
parallel to another element.

Constrain an element to pThrough Point
through a particular point on 
the design plane.



Note:
For more information about using tentative points, see Using Tentative 
Points.

   Nearest
   Keypoint
   Midpoint
   Center
   Origin
   Bisector (not yet implemented)
   Intersection
   Tangent
   Tangent Point
   Perpendicular
   Perpendicular Point
   Parallel
   Through Point


Nearest
-------

Sets the snap override (or snap mode if the <Shift> key is pressed) to 
Nearest, which causes a tentative point to snap to the point closest to the 
pointer on an element.



Keypoint
--------

Sets the snap override (or snap mode if the <Shift> key is pressed) to 
Keypoint, which causes a tentative point to snap to a keypoint on an 
element.



Midpoint
--------

Sets the snap override (or snap mode if the <Shift> key is pressed) to 
Midpoint, which causes a tentative point to snap to the midpoint of an 
element or a segment of a complex element.



Center
------

Sets the snap override (or snap mode if the <Shift> key is pressed) to 
Center, which causes a tentative point to snap to the center or centroid of 
an element.



Origin
------

Sets the snap override (or snap mode if the <Shift> key is pressed) to 
Origin, which causes a tentative point to snap to the origin of a cell.



Bisector (not yet implemented)
------------------------------

Sets the snap override (or snap mode if the <Shift> key is pressed) to 
Bisector, which causes a tentative point to snap to the midpoint of an 
entire element.



Intersection
------------

Sets the snap override (or snap mode if the <Shift> key is pressed) to 
Intersection, which causes two tentative points to snap to the intersection 
of two elements.



Tangent
-------

Sets the snap override (or snap mode if the <Shift> key is pressed) to 
Tangent, which constrains an element to be tangent to another element.



Tangent Point
-------------

Sets the snap override (or snap mode if the <Shift> key is pressed) to 
Tangent Point, which constrains an element to be tangent to another element 
with the point of tangency fixed.



Perpendicular
-------------

Sets the snap override (or snap mode if the <Shift> key is pressed) to 
Perpendicular, which constrains an element to be perpendicular to another 
element.



Perpendicular Point
-------------------

Sets the snap override (or snap mode if the <Shift> key is pressed) to 
Perpendicular Point, which constrains an element to be perpendicular to 
another element with the point at which the first element does or would 
intersect the second element fixed.



Parallel
--------

Sets the snap override (or snap mode if the <Shift> key is pressed) to 
Parallel, which constrains an element to be parallel to another element.



Through Point
-------------

Sets the snap override (or snap mode if the <Shift> key is pressed) to 
Through Point, which constrains an element to pass through a particular 
point on the design plane.























User Menu
---------

The User menu has items for setting user preferences, switching workspaces, 
creating custom workspaces, and starting applications.

To:                      Choose from the User 
                         menu:

Select a different projecWorkspace > Switch Project...
configuration file.

Select a different user  Workspace > Switch User Interface...
interface.

Modify user configurationWorkspace > Modify User Configuration...
variables.

Modify project configuratWorkspace > Modify Project Configuration...
variables.

TBD                      Workspace > Modify User Interface

TBD                      Workspace > Create Workspace User...

Set user preferences for Preferences...
program operation, memory use, 
and screen appearance.

Edit and save the functioFunction Keys
menu.

Reassign buttons such as Button Assignments...
Data, Tentative, and Reset 
buttons.

Load or unload a MicroStaMDL Applications
Development Language (MDL) 
application.

Capture an image of the sUtilities > Capture Screen
or of a portion of the screen.

Convert a raster (bitmappUtilities > Convert Raster File
file from a format that is 
directly supported by 
MicroStation to a format that 
is not directly supported by 
MicroStation.

Edit a UCM index file.   Utilities > Edit UCM Index File

Create a section.        Utilities > Generate Section

Build and place commonly Utilities > Glossary
text strings and combinations 
of text strings.

Insert fonts in a font   Utilities > Install Fonts...
symbology resource file.

Activate a user command. User Command...



   Workspace > Switch Project...
   Workspace > Switch User Interface...
   Workspace > Modify User Configuration...
   Workspace > Modify Project Configuration...
   Configuration Variables dialog box
   Workspace > Modify User Interface
   Workspace > Create Workspace User...
   Preferences...
   Function Keys
   Button Assignments...
   MDL Applications
   Utilities > Capture Screen
   Utilities > Convert Raster File
   Utilities > Edit UCM Index File
   Utilities > Generate Section
   Utilities > Glossary
   Utilities > Install Fonts...
   User Command...
   Help Menu


Workspace > Switch Project...
-----------------------------

Opens the Switch Project dialog box, which lets you select a different 
Project configuration file.

Note:
The Switch Project dialog box is part of the MDL application, 
"wkspcmgr.ma," which loads when Switch Project, Switch User Interface, or 
Create User is chosen from the User menu's Workspace sub-menu.

   OK
   Cancel


OK
--

Click to switch to the selected project.



Cancel
------

Click if you decide not to switch projects.



Workspace > Switch User Interface...
------------------------------------

Opens the Switch User Interface dialog box, which lets you select a 
different user interface (see Workspace Components).

Note:
The Switch User Interface dialog box is part of the MDL application, 
"wkspcmgr.ma," which loads when Switch Project, Switch User Interface, or 
Create User is chosen from the User menu's Workspace sub-menu.

   OK
   Cancel


OK
--

Click to switch to the selected user interface.



Cancel
------

Click if you decide not to switch to a different user interface.



Workspace > Modify User Configuration...
----------------------------------------

Opens the Configuration Variables dialog box to let you modify the user 
configuration variables.

   User configuration variables


User configuration variables
----------------------------

This table lists user configuration variables.

Category   Variable       Short name       Description

B/RAS      BRAS           B/RAS Resource   Directory containing the 
                                           "bras.rsc" resource file

           BRAS_RASTER    Default B/RAS    Default directory for the Load 
                          Directory        and Preview dialog boxes when no 
                                           other raster file is loaded

           BRAS_FILTER    Default B/RAS    Default filter (e.g. "*.*") for 
                          Filter           Load and Preview dialog boxes .

           BRAS_MAX_SCAN  Max Scan Lines   The maximum number of scan lines 
                                           a raster file can have

           BRAS_MAX_X     Max Scan Line    The maximum scan line length 
                          Length           (pixels) a raster file can have

           BRAS_MAX_FG_RUNMax Foreground RuMaximum number of foreground run 
                                           lengths per scan line in a 
                                           raster file

           BRAS_BKLOAD_TICBackground Load  Time (in MicroStation timer 
                          Ticks            ticks) between background 
                                           loading time slices

           BRAS_BKLOAD_SCABackground Scan  Number of raster scan lines 
                          Lines            loaded for each time slice of 
                                           BRAS fast loading

           BRAS_AUTOLOAD  B/RAS Auto-load  Specifies ("yes" or "no") if 
                                           raster reference files are 
                                           automatically loaded when a 
                                           design file is opened

Cells      MS_CELL        Cell Library     Search path(s) for cell 
                          Directories      libraries

           MS_CELLIST     Cell Library ListList of cell libraries to be 
                                           searched for cells not found in 
                                           the current library

           MS_MENU        Menu Cells       Cell library file containing 
                                           menu cells

           MS_TUTLIB      Tutorial Cell    Cell library containing tutorial 
                          Library          cells.

Chart      MS_GALLERYLIB  Chart Cell LibrarCell library used by chart 
                                           application

           MS_GALLERYCELL Default Chart CelDefault gallery cell to connect 
                                           to

Colors     MS_DEFCTBL     Default Color TabDefault color table if design 
                                           file has none

           MS_RMENCTBL    Right Menu Color Default menu colors (dialog 
                          Table            boxes, borders, etc.) for right 
                                           screen -- specifies a color 
                                           table (.tbl) file

           MS_LMENCTBL    Left Menu Color  Default menu colors (dialog 
                          Table            boxes, borders, etc.) for left 
                                           screen -- specifies a color 
                                           table (.tbl) file

Command                                    A list of MDL applications whose 
Table                                      command tables are autoloaded
Load

Database   MS_DBASE       Database Files   Search path(s) for database 
                                           files

           MS_SERVER      Server Loader    MDL application to load the 
                                           database server

           MS_DBEXT       Database Server  The database server application

           MS_LINKTYPE    Database LinkagesUser data linkage types 
                                           recognized by the server. The 
                                           first one in the list is the 
                                           type that will be created. Types 
                                           include "XBASE," "DMRS," "IX," 
                                           "ORACLE," and "RIS."

           MS_TAGREPORTS  Tag Reports      Output directory for tag data 
                                           manager reports

           MS_TAGTEMPLATESTag Templates    Directory containing tag data 
                                           manager report templates

Design     MS_DGNAPPS                      Lists MDL applications to load 
Apps                                       automatically when design file 
                                           is opened.

Extensions MS_SHEETSEED

MDL        MS_DBGSOURCE   MDL Source       Location of source code for MDL 
Development                                applications (used by MDL 
                                           debugger)

           MS_ DEBUGMDLHEAExtended Malloc  Set to the base name of an MDL 
                                           application (or "ALL") -- if set 
                                           use extended malloc for 
                                           debugging

           MS_MDLTRACE    MDL Trace        Additional debugging print 
                                           statements when debugging MDL 
                                           applications

           MS_DBGOUT      MDL Debug Output Output for MDL debugger (e.g. 
                                           COM1:)

           MS_DEBUG       Time Out         If set to an integer with bit 1 
                                           on, do not time out

Micro-CSL  MS_CACH        Cache ID String  Optional cache ID string for 
                                           MicroCSL

Operation  MS_FKEYMNU     Function Key MenuFunction key menu file

                          Escape to O.S.   If set, MicroStation allows the 
                                           user to escape to the operating 
                                           system

           MS_TRAP        Exception HandlinSet to "NONE," "MDL," or "ALL" 
                                           (default)

Plotting   MS_PLTFILES    Output Directory Directory for plotting output 
                                           files

           MS_PLTR        Configuration FilName of plotter configuration 
                                           file

Primary    MS_DEF         Design Files     Search path(s) for design files
Search 
Paths

           MS_RFDIR       Reference Files  Search path(s) for reference 
                                           files

           MS_MDLAPPS     Visible MDL      Search path(s) for MDL 
                          Applications     applications displayed in the 
                                           MDL dialog box

           MS_MDL         MDL Applications Search path(s) for MDL 
                                           applications or external 
                                           programs loaded by MDL 
                                           applications

           MS_RSRCPATH    Resource Files   Search path(s) for resource 
                                           files loaded by MDL applications

Rendering  MS_MATERIAL    Material PalettesSearch path(s) for material 
                                           palettes

           MS_PATTERN     Pattern Maps     Search path(s) for pattern maps

           MS_BUMP        Bump Maps        Search path(s) for bump maps

           MS_IMAGE       Images           Search path(s) for images

           MS_SHADOWMAP   Shadow Maps      Directory where shadow maps will 
                                           be read from and written to

Seed       MS_SEEDFILES   Seed File LocatioSearch path(s) for all seed 
Files                                      files

           MS_DESIGNSEED  Default Seed FileDefault seed file

           MS_CELLSEED    Default Seed CellDefault seed cell library
                          Library 

           MS_TRANSEED    Default TranslatiDefault seed file for DWG, CGM, 
                          Seed             and IGES translations

Symbology  MS_SYMBRSRC    Symbology ResourcList of symbology resource files 
                                           -- last one in list has highest 
                                           priority

System     MS             MicroStation BaseThe directory path for where 
Env                       Dir              MicroStation is installed

           MS_CONFIG      Main ConfiguratioMain MicroStation configuration 
                          File             file -- sets up all 
                                           configuration variables

           MS_EDG         EDG Directories  Directories used by EDG (not 
                                           MicroStation)

           MDL_COMP       MDL Compiler     Text string to be inserted at 
                          Command Line     the beginning of the command 
                                           line by the MDL compiler (used 
                                           to specify where to search for 
                                           include files)

           RSC_COMP       Resource CompilerText string to be inserted at 
                          Command          the beginning of the command 
                                           line by the resource compiler 
                                           (used to specify where to search 
                                           for include files)

           BMAKE_OPT      BMAKE Options    Command line options for BMAKE. 
                                           Used to search for bmake include 
                                           (.mki) files.

Temp and   MS_BACKUP      Backup Files     Default directory for backup 
Backup                                     files
Files

           MS_TMP         Temporary Files  Directory for temporary files 
                                           created and deleted by 
                                           MicroStation

           MS_SCR         Scratch Files    Directory for scratch files 
                                           created by MicroStation

TranslationMS_CGMIN       CGM Input DirectoInput directory for CGM 
-- CGM                                     translations

           MS_CGMOUT      CGM Output       Output directory for CGM 
                          Directory        translations

           MS_CGMLOG      CGM Log Files    Output directory for CGM log 
                                           files

           MS_CGMTABLES   CGM ConfigurationDirectory containing the CGM 
                          Tables           translation tables

           MS_CGMINSET    CGMIN Settings FiSettings file for the CGMIN 
                                           application

           MS_CGMOUTSET   CGMOUT Settings  Settings file for the CGMOUT 
                          File             application

TranslationMS_DWGIN       DWG Input DirectoInput directory for DWG 
-- DWG                                     translations

           MS_DWGOUT      DWG Output       Output directory for DWG 
                          Directory`       translations

           MS_DWGLOG      DWG Log Files    Output directory for DWG log 
                                           files

           MS_DWGTABLES   DWG ConfigurationDirectory containing the DWG 
                          Tables           translation tables

           MS_DWGINSET    DWGIN Settings FiSettings file for the DWGIN 
                                           application

           MS_DWGOUTSET   DWGOUT Settings  Settings file for the DWGOUT 
                          File             application

TranslationMS_IGESIN      IGES Input       Input directory for IGES 
-- IGES                   Directory        translations

           MS_IGESOUT     IGES Output      Output directory for IGES 
                          Directory`       translations

           MS_IGESLOG     IGES Log Files   Output directory for IGES log 
                                           files

           MS_IGESINSET   IGESIN Settings  Settings file for IGES import
                          File

           MS_IGESOUTSET  IGESOUT Settings Settings file for IGES export
                          File

User       MS_UCM         User Commands    Search path(s) for user commands
Commands

           MS_INIT        Startup User     Name of user command to be 
                          Command          executed at startup

           MS_EXITUC      Exit User CommandName of user command to be 
                                           executed at exit

           MS_NEWFILE     New File User    Name of user command to be 
                          Command          executed when a new file is 
                                           opened

           MS_APP         Apps from "TSK"  Search path(s) of applications 
                          statements       started from "TSK" statements in 
                                           user commands.

Workspace  MS_PROJECTCFG  Project          Name of project configuration 
                          Configuration    file

           MS_USERPREF    User Preference  Name of user preference resource 
                          Resource         file

           MS_UIDIR       User Interface   Search path for user interface 
                                           modification resources







Workspace > Modify Project Configuration...
-------------------------------------------

Opens the Configuration Variables dialog box to let you modify the project 
configuration variables.



Configuration Variables dialog box
----------------------------------

The Configuration Variables dialog box lets you edit, define, save, and 
delete either User or Project configuration variables, depending on the 
item from the User menu with which it was opened.

If you choose from the User menuLevel:    Title Bar 
                                          Displays:

Workspace > Modify User ConfigurUser      User: <user_name>

Workspace > Modify Project ConfiProject   Project: 
                                          <project_name>



Key-in: MDL LOAD CFGVARS

Note:
The Configuration Variables dialog box is the MDL application "cfgvars.ma."

   Category
   Configuration Variables (list box)
   Select...
   Edit...
   Delete
   Expansion
   Description
   Applications To Load
   Available Applications
   Add
   Remove
   OK
   Cancel
   File menu/Save
   File menu/Save As...


Category
--------

Lists for selection the logical categories into which configuration 
variables are grouped. Selecting a category causes the appropriate controls 
to be displayed to the right of the category list.



Configuration Variables (list box)
----------------------------------

Lists the short logical names and levels of all of the configuration 
variables in the selected Category. Above the list box is a brief 
description of the function of the configuration variable category.
To modify a configuration variable definition (or to define a new 
user-level configuration variable with the same name as an existing 
variable on another level), you must first select the configuration 
variable. When a configuration variable definition has been modified on the 
user level, its name is highlighted.

When the dialog box opens, all configuration variables are listed 
alphabetically by their actual names (because All (Alphabetical) is 
automatically selected in the Category list box).



Select...
---------

Opens a dialog box that is used to assign a file, directory, or path to the 
configuration variable that is selected in the list box above, depending on 
the configuration variable's type. For example, if the selected 
configuration variable specifies a directory, the dialog box lets you 
select a directory. In general, the controls are analogous to those in the 
Open Design File dialog box.



Edit...
-------

Opens the Edit Configuration Variable dialog box, which is used to directly 
edit the value, expressed as a text string, of the selected configuration 
variable. This requires knowing what kind of definition is appropriate 
(directory, file, keyword, and so on) and familiarity with the syntax of 
definitions. This method of modifying configuration variables is 
recommended only for experienced MicroStation users.

   Variable
   New Value
   Expansion
   OK
   Cancel


Variable
--------

Shows the configuration variable that is selected in the Configuration 
Variables dialog box.



New Value
---------

Sets the configuration variable definition. For information about the 
syntax of definitions, see *Xref



Expansion
---------

Shows the expansion of the configuration variable.



OK
--

TBD



Cancel
------

TBD



Delete
------

Removes the selected configuration variable from the configuration variable 
file. This button is dimmed unless the selected variable is defined at this 
level.



Expansion
---------

Shows the expansion of the selected configuration variable.


Description
-----------

Shows a brief description of the currently selected variable. The 
description includes the name of the selected configuration variable (for 
example, MS_DEF).


Applications To Load
--------------------

(Command Table Load and Design Applications categories) Lists MDL 
applications whose command tables will be automatically loaded (if the 
Command Table Load category is selected) or that will be loaded whenever a 
design file is opened (if the Design Applications category is selected).



Available Applications
----------------------

(Command Table Load and Design Applications categories) Lists available MDL 
applications.



Add
---

(Command Table Load and Design Applications categories) Adds the MDL 
application selected in the Available Applications list box to the list in 
the Applications to Load list box.



Remove
------

(Command Table Load and Design Applications categories) Removes the MDL 
application selected in the Applications to Load list box from the list.



OK
--

Closes the dialog box. If any configuration variables were modified but not 
saved, an alert box opens that asks if you want to save changes in the 
configuration variable file whose name was displayed in the title bar or 
just for the remainder of the current session.



Cancel
------

TBD



File menu/Save
--------------

Saves changes in the configuration variable file whose name is displayed in 
the title bar.



File menu/Save As...
--------------------

Opens the Save User Configuration File dialog box, which is used to save 
changes in a new user configuration variable file.



Workspace > Modify User Interface
---------------------------------

Not yet implemented.



Workspace > Create Workspace User...
------------------------------------

Not yet implemented.

Note:
The Create Workspace User dialog box is part of the MDL application, 
"wkspcmgr.ma," which loads when Switch Project, Switch User Interface, or 
Create User is chosen from the User menu's Workspace sub-menu.



Preferences...
--------------

Opens the Preferences dialog box, which lets you set user preferences. 

Preferences are settings that control how MicroStation operates. They are 
not design file-dependent and cannot be saved in the design file. However, 
they are automatically saved in the user preferences file pointed to by the 
MS_USERPREF configuration variable when you click the OK button. The title 
bar of the Preferences dialog box shows the filename of the user 
preferences file.

Key-in: DIALOG USERPREF

Note:
The Preferences dialog box is the MDL application "userpref.ma," which 
loads when you choose Preferences from the User menu.

   Category
   Description
   Compatibility (with earlier versions)
   Compatibility
   Dimensions 
   Multi-lines
   Shared cells
   Attribute elements (not in Version 4.x)
   (Custom) Line styles
   Associative patterning
   Dialog Font
   Dialog
   Borders
   Sidebar
   Display
   Use Backing Store
   Black Background -> White
   Gamma Correction
   Drawing
   Exact Colors
   Max. Grid Pts/View
   Max Grid Refs/View
   GUI Options
   Dialog Boxes
   Dialog Colors...
   Help Settings
   Hypertext Color:
   Background Color:
   Underlines
   Input
   Start in Parse All mode
   Disable Drag Operations
   Memory Usage
   Max(imum) Element Cache
   Resource Cache
   Undo Buffer
   External Progs. (Conv.) 
   External Progs. (Ext'd)
   Conserve Memory
   Operation
   Pointer Size
   Pointer Type
   Locate Tolerance
   Reset Aborts Fence Operations
   Block Database Undeletes
   View Popups:
   Reference File
   Locate on when attached
   Snap on when attached
   Use color table
   Cache When Display Off
   Reload When Changing Files
   Max(imum) Reference Files
   Text
   Display text with line styles
   Edit text in Command Window
   Fit text by inserting space
   Fixed-width character spacing
   Preserve Text Nodes
   Smallest Text
   ED Character:
   Underline spacing (%)
   Tool Palette
   Single Click
   Default Tool
   Highlight
   Layout
   Tool Size
   Auto-focus Tool Settings window
   On both virtual screens
   Window
   Window title bars
   Window Highlighting
   Tile Like IGDS


Category
--------

Lists for selection the logical categories into which preferences are 
grouped. Selecting a category causes the appropriate controls to be 
displayed to the right of the category list.

A description of whichever item in the dialog box has the input focus is 
displayed under Focus Item Description. On the right are two buttons:
*  Click OK to accept changes made to user preference settings.
*  Click Cancel to discard changes made to user preference settings.
   
Descriptions of the controls for setting preferences in the Preferences 
dialog box are organized below by category of preferences.



Description
-----------

Shows a description of the user preferences file in the text field to the 
right, where you can edit it. The description helps identify the file and 
relate it to a particular workspace. For more information about workspaces, 
see *Xref.



Compatibility (with earlier versions)
-------------------------------------

Lets you limit the elements you place in your design file to those 
compatible with older versions of MicroStation and IGDS.

Note:
Dimension and multi-line elements can be frozen (stored in the design file 
in a way that they can be displayed by versions of MicroStation and IGDS 
prior to 4.0. See *XRef.



Compatibility
-------------

Lets you to place only elements compatible with MicroStation Version 3.x, 
Version 4.x, or Version 5.0 and later.

Even if you choose 5.0+ from the Compatibility option menu, to place 
elements that did not exist in earlier versions, you must turn on the check 
box next to the type of element.



Dimensions 
-----------

Turn on to be able to place dimension elements, which did not exist in 
Version 3.x. If off, dimensions are placed as graphic groups of 
IGDS-compatible primitive elements.



Multi-lines
-----------

Turn on to be able to place multi-lines, which did not exist in Version 
3.x. If off, multi-lines are placed as graphic groups of IGDS-compatible 
primitive elements.



Shared cells
------------

Turn on to be able to place shared cells, which did not exist in Version 
3.x.



Attribute elements (not in Version 4.x)
---------------------------------------

Turn on to be able to place attribute elements, which did not exist in 
Version 4.x.



(Custom) Line styles
--------------------

Turn on to be able to place custom line styles, which did not exist in 
Version 4.x.



Associative patterning
----------------------

Turn on to be able to place associative patterning, which did not exist in 
Version 4.x.



Dialog Font
-----------

Lets you adjust the size of text on the screen in MicroStation dialog 
boxes, borders, and sidebar menus. If you have two screens, there is a set 
of option menus for the Right and the Left screen.



Dialog
------

From the option menu, choose the text size in dialog and settings boxes.



Borders
-------

From the option menu, choose the text size in window borders.



Sidebar
-------

From the option menu, choose the text size in sidebar menus.



Display
-------

Lets you set preferences that control how MicroStation displays a design 
file.



Use Backing Store
-----------------

Turn on Use Backing Store to enable backing store, which saves in RAM the 
display temporarily covered by dialog boxes and menus. For more information 
about backing store, see *Xref.



Black Background -> White
-------------------------

Turn on Black Background -> White to display a black background as white. 
Backgrounds of other colors are not affected.



Gamma Correction
----------------

Lets you control the brightness of rendered images on the Right (and, if 
present, a Left) screen.

Gamma correction compensates for the spectral characteristics of the 
display (or printer). The default value of 2.2 is close to ideal for most 
monitors. The valid range is 0.1 to 3.0.

Increasing the Gamma Correction setting has the effect of lightening 
images; decreasing it darkens images. A change in this preference is 
effective the next time a view is updated.

Note:
In some previous versions, Gamma Correction was referred to as Dither 
Intensity, and 1.0 was the default value. If your rendered images appear 
much too light, try setting Gamma Correction to 1.0.



Drawing
-------

Lets you set user preferences useful in drawing a design.



Exact Colors
------------

The number of colors that can be displayed exactly as they are defined.

The number of colors that can be displayed on screen is generally smaller 
than the number of colors that can be defined internally in MicroStation. 
When MicroStation displays an element, it selects the available display 
color that most closely approximates the internally-defined color of the 
element. In most cases, there is a sufficient number of displayable colors 
to closely match all the colors of elements in a design file.

When close approximation is not good enough, set the number of exact colors 
required. Then use the controls in the Color Table settings box to set 
which colors are displayed exactly as they are defined in the design file. 
See *XRef.

Each exact color decreases the number of display colors available to 
MicroStation for approximating colors; selecting more exact colors can 
reduce MicroStation's color-approximating precision and reduce the quality 
of rendered images.

The default is:
   0*if fewer than 43 display colors are available
   32*if more than 43 display colors are available. 
   
A change in this preference is not effective until you restart 
MicroStation.



Max. Grid Pts/View
------------------

Determines when the display of grid points is turned off when you Zoom > 
Out of a view for which Grid is on. The default is 90 and the maximum is 
400.

Key-in: SET MAXGRID points

Note:
The real-world units that grid points represent is controlled by the 
Master/Grid setting, which is set in the Grid settings box (opened by 
choosing Grid from the Settings menu).



Max Grid Refs/View
------------------

Determines when the display of grid references (crosses) is automatically 
turned off as a view is zoomed out. The default is 40 and the maximum is 
150.

Key-in: SET MAXGRID refs

Note:
The relationship of grid references to grid points is controlled by the 
Reference Grid setting, which is set in the Grid settings box (opened by 
choosing Grid from the Settings menu).



GUI Options
-----------

Lets you choose between the look and feel of OSF/Motif or Microsoft Windows 
in MicroStation's user interface.



Dialog Boxes
------------

Choose Windows from the Dialog Boxes option menu to give MicroStation's 
command window and dialog boxes a white background, blue border 
highlighting, and check boxes.

Choose Motif from the Dialog Boxes option menu to give MicroStation's 
command window and dialog boxes a grey background, dark grey border 
highlighting, and check buttons.



Dialog Colors...
----------------

Opens the Color Control dialog box, which is used to change the colors of 
screen elements.

Note:
The Color Control dialog box is the MDL application, "colorcon.ma," which 
loads when the Dialog Colors button in the Preferences dialog box is 
clicked.

   Color Schemes
   Save Scheme...
   Remove Scheme...
   Preview (section)
   Inactive
   Active
   Label:
   text
   (rectangle)
   select
   Disabled
   Color Palette>>
   Screen Element
   Basic Colors
   Custom Colors
   Define Custom Colors...
   OK
   Cancel


Color Schemes
-------------

Lists pre-defined color schemes that affect the colors of several screen 
elements as a group. When a different color scheme is selected, the preview 
section below changes to illustrate the color scheme.

The default Color Scheme selection is determined by the Dialog Boxes 
preference in the GUI Options category of the Preferences dialog box. 



Save Scheme...
--------------

Opens the Save Color Scheme dialog box, which is used to name and save the 
specified color scheme. The maximum valid number of characters is TBD.



Remove Scheme...
----------------

Removes the selected color scheme from the available list. An alert box 
opens to confirm removal.



Preview (section)
-----------------

Shows the current screen element colors. The color of the selected screen 
element can be individually modified. The name of the selected Screen 
Element is shown in the list box that is displayed when Color Palette>> is 
clicked.

Note:
The Desktop and Dialog (box) Background screen elements are not indicated 
with text labels in the preview section.



Inactive
--------

Shows the color of the Inactive Frame Background screen element.



Active
------

Shows the color of the Active Frame Background screen element.



Label
-----

Shows the color of the Dialog Label screen element.



text
----

Shows the color of the Dialog Background screen element.



(rectangle)
-----------

Shows the color of the Traversal Highlight screen element.



select
------

Shows the color of the Selection Text screen element.



Disabled
--------

Shows the color of the Disabled Text screen element.



Color Palette>>
---------------

Expands the Color Control dialog box to reveal additional controls for 
setting the colors of individual screen elements.



Screen Element
--------------

Lists screen elements whose colors can be individually modified. The color 
of the selected screen element is indicated by the tile outlined in the 
Basic Colors palette or the Custom Colors palette.

The following table lists the screen elements and gives a description for 
each.

Screen          Description
Element

Desktop         TBD

Dialog BackgrounTBD

Inactive Frame  TBD
Background

Active Frame    TBD
Background

Traversal HighliTBD

Dialog Label    TBD

Selection HighliTBD

Selection Text  TBD

Disabled Text   TBD





Basic Colors
------------

Each color represented by a tile in the palette is available for assignment 
to the selected screen element. Clicking a tile makes the assignment, which 
is reflected in the preview section.



Custom Colors
-------------

Each color represented by a tile in the palette is available for assignment 
to the selected screen element. Clicking a tile makes the assignment, which 
is reflected in the preview section.

Each color is defined using the Modify Color dialog box, which is opened by 
clicking the Define Custom Colors button. The dialog box operates on the 
selected tile.



Define Custom Colors...
-----------------------

Opens the Modify Color dialog box, which is used to specify a color to 
replace the color selected in the Custom Colors palette. The Modify Color 
dialog box is the same as the one that opens when *Xref[Change] is clicked 
in the Color Table settings box.



OK
--

Accepts the specified screen element colors and returns to the Preferences 
dialog box.



Cancel
------

Returns to the Preferences dialog box without changing screen element 
colors.



Help Settings
-------------

Lets you change the appearance of the on-line help system.



Hypertext Color
---------------

Hypertext is text in a Help dialog box that is actively linked to other, 
related help information. When you click on hypertext, the Help system 
displays the related text.

Choose Black, Green, Blue, or Red, from the Hypertext Color option menu to 
make hypertext stand out from ordinary text in the Help dialog box.



Background Color
----------------

Choose Grey or White from the Background Color option menu to make the 
background on which help text is displayed grey or white.



Underlines
----------

Turn on Underlines to make hypertext underlined in the Help dialog box. 
This helps distinguish hypertext from ordinary text on monochrome or grey 
scale displays.



Input
-----



Start in Parse All mode
-----------------------

If on, MicroStation is loaded with the parsing function turned on. For 
information about the parsing of key-ins, see *XRef. Start in Parse All 
mode is on by default.



Disable Drag Operations
-----------------------

If on, MicroStation disregards Data button-up actions when the pointer is 
in views. A data point is entered at the pointer position when the Data 
button is pressed, but a second data point is not entered when the Data 
button is released. Some placement tools and the Element Selection tool 
operate differently, allowing very fast operators accustomed to versions of 
MicroStation before 4.0 to work more quickly.



Memory Usage
------------

These preferences control how MicroStation uses the RAM available in your 
system. 



Max(imum) Element Cache
-----------------------

The amount of memory, in KB, reserved to store elements. MicroStation 
stores as much of the active design file as fits in cache memory to enhance 
performance. The default Max. Element Cache is 8000 KB (8 MB). Memory used 
to cache elements is dynamically allocated

A change in this preference is not effective until you restart 
MicroStation. To check element cache usage, choose On Version from the Help 
menu.



Resource Cache
--------------

The amount of memory, in KB, reserved for resources read from MicroStation 
resource files and application resource files (the resource cache only 
applies to resource files that were opened for read-only access). 
MicroStation stores or "caches" resources to enhance performance, 
particularly during the display of large dialog boxes and tool palettes. 
The default of 24 KB is sufficient for most cases. A change in this 
preference is not effective until you restart MicroStation.



Undo Buffer
-----------

The amount of memory, in KB, reserved for recording operations for possible 
negation using Undo. The default is 64 KB. A change in this preference is 
not effective until you restart MicroStation.



External Progs. (Conv.) 
------------------------

Determines the amount of conventional (low) DOS memory in KB occupied by 
MicroStation freed when you shell out to DOS. MicroStation usually occupies 
only 200 KB or so in conventional DOS memory, so you may not need to have 
MicroStation swap any part of its low memory to disk. Also, swapping out 
MicroStation's low memory swaps out the DOS extender. The default, 
therefore, is none (0).



External Progs. (Ext'd)
-----------------------

Determines the amount of extended memory in KB occupied by MicroStation 
freed when you shell to DOS. Typically, MicroStation uses all extended 
memory available when it executes. The default is 250. Setting the memory 
too high results in long waits while extended memory is swapped to disk.



Conserve Memory
---------------

When Conserve Memory is on, MicroStation sacrifices speed in some functions 
in order to use less memory. Conserve Memory is off by default.

Note:
For information about how to best match your project, the available memory 
in your system, and MicroStation's performance enhancement features, see 
*XRef.



Operation
---------

TBD



Pointer Size
------------

The size of the cross hair pointers can be
*  Normal (the default size.)
*  Full View (the cross hairs extend to the edges of the view.)
   
Key-in: SET CURSOR [SMALL | FULL]



Pointer Type
------------

The alignment of the cross hairs in the cross hair pointer can be
*  Orthogonal -- The traditional + pointer (the default).
*  Isometric -- The cross hairs in the isometric pointer are aligned with 
the isometric drawing plane (top, left, right, or all). This is especially 
useful with the Place Isometric Block tool and the Place Isometric Circle 
tool.
   
The isometric plane (*XRef.) is set in the Locks settings box.

Key-in: SET CURSOR [ISOMETRIC | ORTHOGONAL]



Locate Tolerance
----------------

The area indicated by the circular part of the pointer, in which 
MicroStation searches when you attempt to select or identify an element for 
manipulation. The default is 10. The value is unitless.

Key-in: SET LOCATE [tolerance]



Reset Aborts Fence Operations
-----------------------------

If on (the default), Resetting during a fence manipulation halts the 
manipulation. (Pressing <Ctrl-C> halts a fence manipulation regardless of 
the Reset preference.)

Note:
see also Manipulations on Many Elements.



Block Database Undeletes
------------------------

If off (the default), you can undo the deletion of an element that is 
linked to a row in a database. 

If on, you cannot undo the deletion of an element that is linked to a row 
in a database. This prevents the creation of "orphan rows" in the database 
when Delete Linked Database Rows (in the Database settings box) is on. If 
the row is deleted when the element is deleted, undeleting the element 
cannot restore the database row to its state prior to its deletion. For 
more information about database linkages, see *XRef.



View Popups
-----------

When the pointer is in a view, you can open a popup menu at the location of 
the pointer. The popup menu's contents depend upon the tool selected. This 
feature is not fully implemented in this Beta version.

The popup menu is opened by pressing the key and button combination chosen 
in the View Popups option menu. The choices include:
   *None
   *Press Reset Button
   *Shift Reset Button (the default)
   *Click Reset Button
   


Reference File
--------------



Locate on when attached
-----------------------

If on, the capability to identify elements in a reference file for 
construction purposes is turned on when a reference file is attached to the 
active design file. The default is off.



Snap on when attached
---------------------

If on, the capability to snap to elements in a reference file is turned on 
when a reference file is attached. The default is off.



Use color table
---------------

If off, MicroStation ignores any color table attached to a reference file 
and displays the elements in it using the color table of the active design 
file. This speeds up loading design files with reference files attached, 
but may change the colors in which the elements in the reference file are 
displayed. The default is off.

Note:
Changes in these reference file preferences are not effective until you 
restart MicroStation.



Cache When Display Off
----------------------

If off, the memory caching of reference files that are not displayed is 
disabled. Disabling caching shortens start-up time when reference files are 
attached but not displayed and it causes a delay when you display an 
uncached reference file.

The default setting is off. You might want to cache reference files that 
are not displayed when:
*  You intend to turn display of reference files on and off frequently.
*  You are using shared cell definitions in a reference file that is not 
displayed in the active design file.


Reload When Changing Files
--------------------------

If off (the default), MicroStation attempts to preserve cached reference 
files when one design file is closed and another is opened. If Max(imum) 
Element Cache is set large enough to hold all the files (and there is 
enough physical memory to accommodate the cache), this behavior 
dramatically speeds up the opening of design files that are referenced to 
each other.



Max(imum) Reference Files
-------------------------

The maximum number of reference files that can be attached to the active 
design file. The default is 32. The valid range is 16-255. A change in this 
preference is not effective until you restart MicroStation.

MicroStation allocates approximately 0.5 KB of memory for each allowed 
reference file, regardless of whether an attachment actually exists. Set 
the maximum no higher than necessary.



Text
----



Display text with line styles
-----------------------------

If off (the default), text is displayed with the line style attribute of 
solid (0).

If on, text is displayed with its true line style attribute.



Edit text in Command Window
---------------------------

If off (the default), text to be placed in a design must be edited in the 
Text Editor window. If on, when the Place Text tool is selected, the Text 
Editor window does not open, and the text must be edited in the Command 
Window. 

Hint:
If Edit text in Command Window is off, you can use the Command Window to 
edit text by using the PLACE TEXT key-in. For more information about 
editing and placing text, see *XRef.



Fit text by inserting space
---------------------------

If off (the default), MicroStation places fitted text by enlarging or 
shrinking the characters of text so that they fit between two data points. 
If on, the size of text characters is determined by the Active Text Size, 
and the text is fitted by increasing or reducing the spacing between 
characters. For information about placing fitted text, see *XRef.



Fixed-width character spacing
-----------------------------

If off (the default), the spacing between characters is measured from the 
end of one character to the beginning of the next character. This results 
in proportionally spaced text, such as the text in this paragraph, in which 
narrower characters take up less (horizontal) space. 

If on, the spacing between characters is measured from the beginning of one 
character to the beginning of the next character. This results in 
monospaced text, such as that produced with a typewriter, in which all 
characters take up the same (horizontal) space.



Preserve Text Nodes
-------------------

When Preserve Text Nodes is on, any text that was placed as a text node 
will remain a text node, even if edited down to one line (at which point 
MicroStation would otherwise replace the text node with a text element). 
This allows the operation of some automatic text placement features that 
require the presence of text nodes, although some efficiency in design file 
size is sacrificed.



Smallest Text
-------------

The size threshold, in pixels, above which text is drawn. 

MicroStation displays text smaller than this threshold as a box containing 
an X, allowing you to prevent MicroStation from taking the time to draw 
text that is too small to read. 

A value of zero specifies that text is drawn regardless of its size. The 
default is 4 pixels.

Key-in: SET SMALLTEXT [size]



ED Character
------------

Character that denotes each character in an enter data field; by default 
the underbar ( _ ). 

Change this preference if you want to place text elements with underbars. 
For more information on text placement and enter data fields, see *XRef.

Key-in: SET EDCHAR [char]



Underline spacing (%)
---------------------

The distance between the baseline (the bottom of characters that do not 
have descenders) of text and underlining. By default, the distance is 20 
percent of the text height.



Tool Palette
------------

These tools affect the operation of MicroStation's tool palettes.



Single Click
------------

Determines how tools are selected with a single click (press) of the Data 
button. 

If set to:*
   Locked -- The selected tool repeats until you Reset or select another 
tool. (This is the default.)
   Single-shot -- After the selected tool is used once, the Default Tool is 
selected.
   
Note:
Your preference for how tools are selected with a single click does not 
prevent you from making the other type of tool selection. Simply 
double-click to make the other type of selection.



Default Tool
------------

The tool that is automatically selected upon completion of a one-time 
function. Compressing design files, creating cells, importing text, and 
arraying elements are some of MicroStation's one-time functions. 
   Element Selection -- The Element Selection is automatically selected 
upon completion of a one-time function.
   None -- There is no default tool; MicroStation reverts to a "null" (no 
tool selected) state upon completion of a one-time function.
   


Highlight
---------

The color with which tools are highlighted to indicate locked selection. 
   Black -- Selected tool has more contrast.
   Gray -- The default; increases 3D button effect.
   
A change in this preference affects only tools selected after the change.



Layout
------

Controls palette size by adjusting inter-tool spacing and spacing between 
tools and palette borders. 
   Narrow -- Conserves screen space.
   Regular -- The default.
   Wide -- Increases 3D button effect.
   
A change in this preference affects only newly opened palettes.



Tool Size
---------

The size at which tools are displayed.
   Small -- The default. 
   Large -- Tools are enlarged by about 70 percent.
   
A change in this preference affects only newly opened palettes.



Auto-focus Tool Settings window
-------------------------------

If on (the default), when the Tool Settings window is displayed and a tool 
with associated settings is selected in a palette that is not floating, the 
keyboard focus will automatically move to the first tool setting in the 
Tool Settings window.



On both virtual screens
-----------------------

If on, open tool palettes display not only on the primary virtual screen, 
but also on the secondary virtual screen when the screens are swapped. 

On both virtual screens is off by default. A change in this preference is 
not effective until you restart MicroStation.



Window
------



Window title bars
-----------------

If off, the Command Window and all views are displayed without title bars. 

This is useful for conserving screen space. You can still move a view by 
holding down the <Shift> key and dragging its resize border. You can move 
the Command Window by dragging any border. Window title bars is on by 
default. A change in this preference affects only newly opened windows.



Window Highlighting
-------------------

If on (the default), MicroStation highlights in gray the title bar of the 
destination window for keyboard input.



Tile Like IGDS
--------------

Sets how choosing Tile from the View menu positions the views, when four 
views are open.

Tile Like    Views positioned in this    
IGDS:        order:

Off (default)From left to right starting 1 23 
             lowest-numbered view at top-4
             as shown:

On           Counter-clockwise starting w2 13 
             lowest-numbered view at     4
             top-right, as shown:


Note:
If more or fewer than four views are open, this preference has no effect on 
tiling.



Function Keys
-------------

Opens the Function Keys dialog box, which is used to edit, save, and open 
function key menus.

Key-in: DIALOG FUNCKEYS

   Shortcut Keys
   Ctrl
   Alt
   Shift
   Key
   Key(s):
   Current:
   List box
   Edit
   Delete
   OK
   Cancel
   File Menu/Open...
   File Menu/Save As...
   File Menu/Save


Shortcut Keys
-------------

Contains controls that let you select a function key definition to change 
(or create) by selecting a function key -- either unmodified or modified by 
one or more of these keys<Ctrl>, <Alt>, and <Shift>.



Ctrl
----

Click to change or create a function key definition for a function key 
modified by (pressed along with) the <Ctrl> key.



Alt
---

Click to change or create a function key definition for a function key 
modified by (pressed along with) the <Alt> key.



Shift
-----

Click to change or create a function key definition for a function key 
modified by (pressed along with) the <Shift> key.



Key
---

Sets the function key to change or create a definition for.

Hint:
You can select a function key when the Function Keys dialog box is open 
simply by pressing the desired function key and any modifiers.



Key(s)
------

Shows the currently selected function key (with any modifiers).



Current
-------

Shows the current definition of the selected function key.



List box
--------

Shows the currently defined function keys (Key) and their current 
definitions (String). You can click on any key or definition in the list 
box to select a currently defined function key.



Edit
----

Opens the Edit Key Definition dialog box, which is used to edit the current 
definition or create a definition of the selected function key.

   Key(s):
   Current:
   New:
   OK
   Cancel


Key(s)
------

Shows the selected function key and any modifiers.



Current
-------

Shows the current definition of the selected function key.



New
---

Edit the text in this field to change or create the definition of the 
selected function key.



OK
--

Click to accept the definition in the New field.



Cancel
------

Click to close the dialog box and cancel any changes made to the definition 
of the selected function key.



Delete
------

Click to delete the current definition of the selected function key.



OK
--

Click to close the Function Keys dialog box and retain any changes and new 
function key definitions in memory. To save them for your next session, you 
must save the function key definitions to a file. See File Menu/Save and 
File Menu/Save As....



Cancel
------

Click to close the dialog box and cancel any changes made to function key 
definitions.



File Menu/Open...
-----------------

Opens the Open Function Key Menu dialog box, which is used to open a 
function key menu.



File Menu/Save As...
--------------------

Opens the Save Function Key As dialog box, which is used to name and save 
the open function key menu.



File Menu/Save
--------------

Saves the open function key menu.



Button Assignments...
---------------------

Opens the Button Assignments dialog box, which is used to change digitizing 
tablet or mouse button assignments. You can change up to 16 digitizing 
tablet cursor or mouse button assignments. When the active design file is 
2D, you can change the Data, Tentative, Reset, and Command button 
assignments, as well as up to 12 cursor button assignments for use with 
cursor button menus. When the active design file is 3D, you can also change 
the 3D Data and 3D Tentative buttons assignments, as well as 10 cursor 
button assignments for cursor button menus.

Key-in: DIALOG

Note:
For information about cursor button menus, see *XRef: User's Guide: 
Creating Custom Modules.

   MicroStation Buttons
   Invoked by
   OK
   Default
   Cancel


MicroStation Buttons
--------------------

Lists the function you want to assign to a button(s).



Invoked by
----------

Lists the device button(s) you want to assign to carry out the function 
listed in the corresponding MicroStation Buttons field.

You cannot assign two MicroStation buttons to the same device button 
combination. If you attempt to do so, the first MicroStation button is 
assigned to the device button combination to which the second MicroStation 
button was previously assigned; the assignments are "swapped."

Some aspects of operation are platform- or device-specific. For 
information, see *Xref: Introducing MicroStation/Getting Started.



OK
--

Makes new button assignments effective.



Default
-------

Restores the default button assignments.



Cancel
------

Click if you decide not to make new button assignments.



MDL Applications
----------------

Opens the MDL settings box, which lets you load, unload, and monitor the 
sizes and memory use of MicroStation Development Language (MDL) 
applications.

Key-in: DIALOG MDL

Hint:
Keying in MDL LOAD <application_name> is often faster than using the dialog 
box.

Hint:
You can create tools, pull-down menu items, or digitizing tablet menu items 
that activate a user command. See *XRef.

   Loaded Applications
   Detail...
   Unload
   Available Applications
   Load


Loaded Applications
-------------------

Displays a list of loaded MDL applications. To select an application, click 
on it.



Detail...
---------

Click to open the MDL Application Detail dialog box, which lists details 
about the selected loaded application, including the version number.

Click OK to close the dialog box.

Key-in: .i.



Unload
------

Click to unload the application selected in the Loaded Applications list 
box.



Available Applications
----------------------

Displays the names of the MDL Applications. To select an application, click 
on it.



Load
----

Click to load the application selected in the Available Applications list 
box.



Utilities > Capture Screen
--------------------------

Loads the MDL Screen Capture utility ("scrncapt.ma"), which is used to 
capture an image of the screen or of a portion of the screen. For 
information about using the Screen Capture utility, see *Xref: 222_MAs.fra.

Key-in: MDL LOAD SCRNCAPT



Utilities > Convert Raster File
-------------------------------

Opens the Raster File Conversion settings box, which is used to convert a 
raster (bitmapped) file from a format that is directly supported by 
MicroStation to a format that is not directly supported by MicroStation.

Note:
The Raster File Conversion settings box is the MDL application, 
"rastconv.ma," which loads when this menu item is chosen.

Key-in: MDL LOAD RASTCONV

>> To convert a file:

1. From the User menu's Utilities sub-menu, choose Convert Raster File.
   The Raster File Conversion settings box opens.
2. Use the controls in the settings box to select the input file, specify 
the output file, and set conversion options.
3. Click the Convert button.
   
   Input
   Type
   Mode
   Select...
   File
   Size
   Output
   Type
   Mode
   Select...
   File
   Size
   Gamma Correction
   Stretch
   Negative
   Convert


Input
-----

Contains controls for specifying the input file.



Type
----

Sets the type of the input file. These are the supported input file 
formats:
   FLI
   FLC
   CompuServe GIF
   Img
   Img (24 bit)
   Intergraph RGB
   Intergraph Bump
   Intergraph RLE
   Microsoft Windows BMP
   PCX
   Sun Raster
   Targa
   TIFF (compressed or uncompressed)


Mode
----

Shows the number of colors in the input file's color palette.



Select...
---------

Opens the Select Input File, which is used to select the input file. The 
controls are analogous to those in the Open Design File dialog box.



File
----

Shows the file specification for the selected input file.



Size
----

Shows the size in pixels, measured horizontally and vertically, of the 
image in the selected input file.



Output
------

Contains controls for specifying the output file.



Type
----

Sets the type of the output file. These are the supported output file 
formats:
   FLI
   FLC
   CompuServe GIF
   Img
   Img (24 bit)
   Intergraph RGB
   Intergraph RLE
   Microsoft Windows BMP
   PCX
   PICT
   PostScript
   Sun Raster
   Targa
   TIFF (compressed or uncompressed)
   WordPerfect (WPG)
   


Mode
----

Sets the number of colors in the output file's color palette. The available 
options depend upon which output Type is chosen. For example, Intergraph 
RGB supports only 24-bit color, while PICT supports 24-bit color, 256 
colors, and grey scale.



Select...
---------

Opens the Select Output File dialog box, which is used to specify the 
filename and directory for theoutput file. The controls are analogous to 
those in the Save Design File dialog box.



File
----

Shows the file specification for the specified output file.



Size
----

Shows the size in pixels, measured horizontally and vertically, of the 
image that will be saved in the specified output file.

By default, the aspect ratio of the image is preserved, and the horizontal 
and vertical values are linked; if one is changed, the other changes 
proportionally. However, if Stretch is on, the values are not linked, and 
the aspect ratio can be changed.



Gamma Correction
----------------

TBD



Stretch
-------

If on, the aspect ratio of the image that will be saved in the specified 
output file can be changed using the Size fields. By default Stretch is 
off.



Negative
--------

TBD



Convert
-------

Creates the specified output file.



Utilities > Edit UCM Index File
-------------------------------

Opens the Edit User Command Index File settings box, which is used to edit 
a user command (UCM) index file. A UCM index file is a text file that 
contains a list of UCMs that is indexed for easy and fast activation. For 
information about using UCM index files, see *Xref: UG "Using Application 
Software."

Key-in: MDL LOAD EDITUCI

Note:
The Edit User Command Index File settings box is the MDL application, 
"edituci.ma," which loads when this menu item is chosen.

   Save
   File
   (UCM Index Number) field
   (UCM Name) field
   User Command
   Insert
   Delete
   Append
   File menu/Open...
   File menu/Save As...


Save
----

Saves the open UCM index file. If a UCM index file is not open, the Save 
UCM Index File dialog box opens; see File menu/Save As....



File
----

Shows the name of the open UCM index file, if any.



(UCM Index Number) field
------------------------

Sets the index number for the next entry in the indexed list.



(UCM Name) field
----------------

Sets the UCM for the next entry in the indexed list.



User Command
------------

Lists all UCMs in the indexed list sorted by index number.



Insert
------

Inserts a new blank entry in the indexed list before the entry selected in 
the User Command list box and increments the index number of each entry 
after the new entry.



Delete
------

Deletes the indexed list entry selected in the User Command list box.



Append
------

Adds a new blank entry to the end of the indexed list.



File menu/Open...
-----------------

Opens the Open UCM Index File dialog box, which is used to open a UCM index 
file and to display the indexed list contained in the file for editing in 
the User Command list box. The controls are analogous to those in the Open 
Design File dialog box.



File menu/Save As...
--------------------

Opens the Save UCM Index File dialog box, which is used to save the indexed 
list to a new or different UCM index file. The controls are analogous to 
those in the Save Design File dialog box.



Utilities > Generate Section
----------------------------

Opens the Section Generation settings box, which is used to control the 
creation of sections (which show interior detail that is too complex to see 
clearly in an ordinary wireframe view).

   Output File
   Tolerance
   Flatten Section
   Interactive Positioning
   Assemble Segments
   Symbology
   File menu/New Output File...
   File menu/Open Output File...
   Tools menu
   Construct Section by Fence
   Construct Section by Element
   Construct Section by Plane
   Construct Section by Projected Element
   Construct Section by Projected Line String
   Construct Section by View Vertical
   Construct Section by View Depth


Output File
-----------

Identifies the 3D design file in which the section geometry is placed. By 
default, the section geometry is placed in the active design file.



Tolerance
---------

The section geometry consists of straight line segments. If the model has 
curved surfaces, the curves are approximated by straight line segments. The 
Tolerance setting controls the variance between the true section curve and 
the approximation. Reducing the tolerance makes the section geometry more 
accurate by increasing the number of vertices. It also increases the file 
size and the time it takes to generate the section.



Flatten Section
---------------

If on, the section geometry is flattened to two dimensions along an axis 
perpendicular to the section plane. This is useful when using a fence to 
define a section. The section created by a fence is a 3D replica of the 
elements lying within the fence.



Interactive Positioning
-----------------------

If on, the position of the section geometry is determined by the active 
scale, active angle, and a data point. By default, Interactive Positioning 
is off, and the section geometry is generated "in place."

When the section geometry has been generated and is about to be placed 
interactively, the section geometry is displayed dynamically as the screen 
pointer is moved. If the section was based on a plane perpendicular to the 
screen, the section geometry is displayed rotated 90d so that it is easier 
to see. As the section geometry is moved to other views, it is rotated so 
that it appears in the same orientation in each view.

When the section geometry is placed, it is placed in the rotated 
orientation. This is convenient for placing sections "flat" in a sheet 
file. For an example of interactive placement, see Construct Section by 
Projected Element (page -20).



Assemble Segments
-----------------

If on, the section geometry segments for all adjacent model surfaces are 
assembled into complex chains or shapes. Assembling all the segments can be 
useful for models that have many adjacent elements, such as triangulated 
digital terrain models.



Symbology
---------

Determine the level and symbology (color, line style, and line weight) of 
the section geometry. If the override buttons are off, each part of the 
section geometry has the same level, color, line style, and line weight as 
the intersecting model geometry on which it is based. If the override 
buttons are on, the level, color, line style, and line weight of all 
elements in the section have the values selected.



File menu/New Output File...
----------------------------

Opens the New Output File dialog box, which is used to create a new file to 
serve as the output file. Its controls are analogous to those in the Create 
Design File dialog box.



File menu/Open Output File...
-----------------------------

Opens the Open Output File dialog box, which is used to open a file to 
serve as the output file. Its controls are analogous to those in the Open 
Design File dialog box.



Tools menu
----------

Tools for generating section geometry are selected by choosing the 
corresponding items from the Tools menu.

To create a section whereChoose from the Tools 
elements intersect:      menu:

An existing element.     Construct Section by Element

The area of a fence.     Construct Section by Fence

A plane defined by three Construct Section by Plane
points.

A projection of an elemenConstruct Section by Projected Element

A projection of a line stConstruct Section by Projected Line String
defined by a series of data 
points.

A horizontal plane       Construct Section by View Vertical
perpendicular to a view.

A vertical plane perpendiConstruct Section by View Vertical
to a view.

A plane parallel to a vieConstruct Section by View Depth
plane at a certain depth.





Construct Section by Fence
--------------------------

Use to generate section geometry for all elements that intersect or are 
enclosed by a fence. This tool is useful for "cutting out" a section of the 
model to provide a view of its interior. The fence contents are always 
copied in clip mode without regard to the fence selection mode.

>> To generate a section for all elements that intersect or are enclosed by 
a fence:

1. Place a fence around the area of the model to be sectioned.
2. Select the Construct Section by Fence tool.
3. Identify the section element.
4. Accept the section element.
   The section geometry is calculated and displayed.
5. Accept the section geometry.
   If Interactive Positioning is on, the data point to accept the section 
geometry also determines its position.
   


Construct Section by Element
----------------------------

Used to generate section geometry for all elements that intersect the 
identified closed planar element (shape, ellipse, or complex shape) or 3D 
element (cone, surface, solid, or B-spline surface).

>> To generate section geometry for all elements that intersect an element:

1. Select the Construct Section by Element tool.
2. Identify the section element.
3. Accept the section element.
   The section geometry is calculated and displayed.
4. Accept the section geometry.
   If Interactive Positioning is on, the data point to accept the section 
geometry also determines its position.
   


Construct Section by Plane
--------------------------

Used to generate section geometry for all elements that intersect a plane 
defined by three data points.

>> To generate section geometry for all elements that intersect a plane:

1. Select the Construct Section by Plane tool.
2. Enter three data points to define the section plane.
   The section geometry is calculated and displayed.
3. Accept the section geometry.
   If Interactive Positioning is on, the data point to accept the section 
geometry also determines its position.
   


Construct Section by Projected Element
--------------------------------------

Used to generate section geometry for all elements that intersect the 
projection of an element through the view volume along the z-axis.

>> To generate section geometry for all elements that intersect the 
projection of an element:

1. Select the Construct Section by Projected Element tool.
2. Identify the element to be projected.
3. Accept the element to be projected.
   The section geometry is calculated and displayed.
4. Accept the section geometry.
   If Interactive Positioning is on, the data point to accept the section 
geometry also determines its position.
   


Construct Section by Projected Line String
------------------------------------------

Used to generate section geometry for all elements that intersect the 
projection of a line string defined by a series of data points.

>> To generate section geometry for all elements that intersect the 
projection of a line string:

1. Select the Construct Section by Projected Line String tool.
2. Enter data points to define a line string to be projected.
3. Reset to complete the line string.
   The element is projected along the z-axis in the view in which the 
acceptance point is entered. The section geometry is calculated and 
displayed.
4. Accept the section geometry.
   If Interactive Positioning is on, the data point to accept the section 
geometry also determines its position.
   


Construct Section by View Vertical
----------------------------------

Used to generate section geometry for all elements that intersect a 
horizontal or vertical plane perpendicular to the screen.

The plane is perpendicular to the screen, and it intersects the data point. 
The plane extends throughout the view depth (along the z-axis). It is as 
tall (for a vertical plane) or as wide (for a horizontal plane) as the view 
window. This tool is the equivalent of drawing a line horizontally or 
vertically across the view and using it with the Construct Section by 
Projected Element tool.

>> To generate section geometry for all elements that intersect a 
horizontal or vertical plane:

1. Select the Construct Section by View Horizontal or Construct Section by 
View Vertical tool.
2. Enter a data point to define a horizontal or vertical view plane.
   The section geometry is calculated and displayed.
3. Accept the section geometry.
   If Interactive Positioning is on, the data point to accept the section 
geometry also determines its position.
   


Construct Section by View Depth
-------------------------------

Used to generate section geometry for all elements that intersect a plane 
parallel to the screen at a depth determined by a data point.

>> To generate section geometry for all elements that intersect a plane 
parallel to the screen:

1. Select the Construct Section by View Depth tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the section plane depth. (The data point 
can be on the active depth or can be snapped to an element to select a 
different depth if the boresite lock is on.)
   The section geometry is calculated and displayed.
3. Enter a data point to accept the section geometry.
   If Interactive Positioning is on, the data point to accept the section 
geometry also determines its position.
   


Utilities > Glossary
--------------------

Opens the Glossary settings box, which is used to build and place commonly 
used text strings and combinations of text strings.

Commonly used text strings are stored in a glossary file that must be 
created with a text editor or word processor. The glossary file is a text 
file with a text string alias on one line and the associated text string on 
the next line, and so on for additional text strings. (A glossary file can 
likewise be modified only with a text editor or word processor.)

The contents of the glossary file pointed to by the MS_GLOSSARY 
configuration variable are displayed in the Glossary settings box. By 
default this file is "example.gls" in MicroStation's "wsmod/default/data" 
directory.

Note:
To place the entire contents of a text file in the design, choose Import > 
Text... from the File menu.

Note:
The Glossary settings box is the MDL application, "glossary.ma," which 
loads when Glossary is chosen from the User menu's Utilities sub-menu.

   Aliases (list box)
   Associated Text String (field)
   Place Text (field)
   Build
   Options menu/Line Length > Custom...
   Options menu/Line Length > 30
   Options menu/Line Length > 40
   Options menu/Line Length > 50
   Options menu/Line Length > 60
   Options menu/Case > 


Aliases (list box)
------------------

Lists text string aliases in the glossary file.



Associated Text String (field)
------------------------------

Shows the text string associated with the alias selected in the Aliases 
list box.



Place Text (field)
------------------

Shows the text string that can be placed in the design.



Build
-----

Appends the selected text string to the string in the Place Text field and 
makes it possible to place the resulting string by entering a data point in 
a view.



Options menu/Line Length > Custom...
------------------------------------

Opens the Custom Line Length dialog box, which is used to set the text line 
length.

   Line Length


Line Length
-----------

Sets the text line length, expressed as the number of characters. The valid 
range is TBD.



Options menu/Line Length > 30
-----------------------------

Sets the text line length to 30 characters.



Options menu/Line Length > 40
-----------------------------

Sets the text line length to 40 characters.



Options menu/Line Length > 50
-----------------------------

Sets the text line length to 50 characters.



Options menu/Line Length > 60
-----------------------------

Sets the text line length to 60 characters.



Options menu/Case > 
--------------------

Controls the case of the built string for placement (UPPER, lower, or 
Default as built).



Utilities > Install Fonts...
----------------------------

Opens the Font Installer dialog box, which is used to insert fonts into 
font symbology resource files and to rename and renumber fonts.

Note:
The Font Installer dialog box is the MDL application, "fontinst.ma," which 
loads when Install Fonts is chosen from the User menu's Utilities sub-menu.

   Source File (list box)
   Destination File (list box)
   >> Copy >>
   >> Remove >>
   Open... (button beneath the Source File list box)
   Open... (button beneath the Destination File list box)
   New...
   Name
   Description
   Number
   Done


Source File (list box)
----------------------

Lists the fonts contained in the symbology file, font library, or font cell 
library that is open as the source file for font insertion operations and 
lets you select fonts for insertion in the destination symbology file.



Destination File (list box)
---------------------------

Lists the fonts contained in the symbology file that is open as the 
destination for font insertion operations and lets you select fonts for 
attribute changes or removal from the file.



>> Copy >>
----------

Inserts the font selected in the Source File list box in the destination 
symbology file. If a font with the same name already exists in the 
destination file, it is replaced by the selected font.



>> Remove >>
------------

Removes the font selected in the Destination File list box from the 
"destination" symbology file. The default font cannot be removed from the 
file.



Open... (button beneath the Source File list box)
-------------------------------------------------

Opens the Open Source Font File dialog box, which lets you select and open 
a symbology file, font library, or font cell library from which to insert 
fonts. The Type option menu in the Open Source Font File dialog box is used 
to choose the file type, which is one of the following
*  Acad Shapes -- AutoCAD shape files (.SHX only).
*  Font Cell Library -- MicroStation font cell library, a standard cell 
library that contains cells that define the characters and symbols in a 
traditional MicroStation font and the font's attributes. For more 
information about font cell libraries, see *Xref: D&S Guide.
*  Font Resource File -- font symbology resource file.
*  PS Type-1 -- PostScript Type 1 (uncompressed only).
*  TrueType.
*  uStn Fontlib -- MicroStation font library (from MicroStation Version 4.1 
or earlier or IGDS).
   


Open... (button beneath the Destination File list box)
------------------------------------------------------

Opens the Open Destination File dialog box, which lets you select and open 
a symbology file as the destination or subject file for font insertion, 
removal or attribute changes.



New...
------

Opens the Create Symbology File dialog box, which lets you create a 
symbology file and open it as the destination file for font insertion 
operations.



Name
----

Shows the name of the font selected in the Destination File list box.



Description
-----------

Sets the description of the font selected in the Destination File list box.



Number
------

Sets the number of the font selected in the Destination File list box. The 
valid range is 0-127.



Done
----

Closes the Font Installer dialog box.



User Command...
---------------

Opens the Run User Command dialog box, which lets you activate a user 
command (UCM). For an introduction to UCMs, see *XRef in the user's guide.

Key-in: USERCOMMAND UC= 

Hint:
Keying in UC=<user_command> is often faster than using the dialog box.

Note:
To activate a UCM and specify arguments, you must use the UC= key-in. You 
cannot specify arguments for UCMs in the Run User Command dialog box. 

Hint:
You can create tools, pull-down menu items, or digitizing tablet menu items 
that activate a user command. See *XRef.

   Name
   Directory
   Filter
   Files
   Directories
   OK
   Cancel


Name
----

The name of the selected UCM file. You can key in a new UCM filename.



Directory
---------

Shows the path of the UCM file.



Filter
------

The filter (by default, "*.ucm"). You can key in a file filter name. 



Files
-----

Lists UCMs you can activate. The files listed for selection have the ending 
".ucm" in the directory pointed to by the MS_UCM configuration variable. 



Directories
-----------

List of directories.



OK
--

Click to activate the selected UCM.



Cancel
------

Click if you decide not to activate a UCM.

















Help Menu
---------

The Help menu has items for accessing on-line help.

To:                      Choose from the Help 
                         menu:

Select help articles fromContents
of topics.

Activate context-sensitivOn Context 
help.

Identify the active worksOn Workspace
components.

Read instructions for usiHow to Use Help
on-line help.

Browse MicroStation key-iKey-in Browser

Check the MicroStation veOn Version
number and the names of active 
files.



Note:
For general information and instructions about using on-line help, see 
Using On-line Help.

Note:
On-line help is the MDL application "ustnhelp.ma," which loads when 
Contents, On Context, or How to Use Help is chosen from the Help menu.

   Contents
   Help window
   On Context 
   On Workspace
   How to Use Help
   Key-in Browser
   Command Tables dialog box
   On Version


Contents
--------

Opens the Help window with the available help files listed for selection. 
If only one help file is available, its contents is listed.

Key-in: HELP



Help window
-----------

Used to browse and display on-line help. Opens when Contents, On Context , 
or How to Use Help is chosen from the Help menu.

Note:
The current Topic's sub-topics are listed at its end

   Contents
   Find
   Back
   Up
   History
   Previous (<<)
   Next (>>)
   Topic
   File menu/Open...
   Settings menu/Tracking On
   Settings menu/Tracking Off
   User menu/Preferences... 
   Help menu/How to Use Help


Contents
--------

Lists the top level topics. Clicking a topic displays the article on that 
topic.



Find
----

Opens the Find settings box, which is used to search for text in the open 
help file.

   Text
   In
   Topic Names Only
   Whole Words Only
   Match Case
   Find
   Found Topics


Text
----

Sets the text for which to search.



In
--

Sets the scope of the search.
*  Current Document -- the entire help file.
*  Subtopics of Current Topic -- Restricts the search to sub-topics of the 
topic displayed in Help window.
   


Topic Names Only
----------------

If on (the default), only article titles are searched. Otherwise, topics 
and article text are searched.



Whole Words Only
----------------

If on, only topics that contain character sequences that exactly match the 
specified text are found.



Match Case
----------

If on, searching is case-sensitive; that is, only text that matches the 
capitalization of the specified text will be found.



Find
----

Begins searching for the specified text.

Topics that contain or match the specified text are displayed in the Found 
Topics list box.



Found Topics
------------

Lists topics that contain or match the specified text.

Double-clicking a topic displays the article on that topic in the Help 
window.



Back
----

Displays the previously displayed article. Repeatedly clicking Back steps 
through the History list.



Up
--

Displays the current Topic's "parent," which usually has more general 
information. Clicking Up repeatedly eventually causes the contents to 
display.



History
-------

Opens the History window, which displays a list of recently-viewed topics 
(up to 40).

Double-clicking a topic in the History window displays the article on that 
topic in the Help window.



Previous (<<)
-------------

Displays the help file's previous article.



Next (>>)
---------

Displays the help file's next article.



Topic
-----

Displays the name of the currently displayed Help topic.

Hint:
Pressing on the option menu displays (from bottom to top), the current 
topic's parent, that topic's parent, and so on, up to the Contents. 
Choosing any one of the topics moves you "up" to that level in the 
document.

*  Choosing the current topic's parent (the second-to-last item in the 
option menu) is equivalent to clicking the Help window's Up button.
*  Choosing Contents (the first item in the option menu) is equivalent to 
clicking the Help window's Contents button
   


File menu/Open...
-----------------

Opens the Open Help File dialog box, which is used to open a different help 
file -- for example, the help file that contains help articles for a 
different application.



Settings menu/Tracking On
-------------------------

(Not yet implemented) Enables automatic display of the help article for 
each newly selected tool, view control, or tool modifier.



Settings menu/Tracking Off
--------------------------

(Not yet implemented) Disables automatic display of the help article for 
each newly selected tool, view control, or tool modifier.



User menu/Preferences... 
-------------------------

(Not yet implemented) Opens the Preferences dialog box with the controls 
for setting *Xref



Help menu/How to Use Help
-------------------------

Displays the help article that contains instructions for using on-line 
help.



On Context 
-----------

(Not yet implemented) Activates context-sensitive help.

Key-in: HELP CONTEXT



On Workspace
------------

Opens the Workspace window, in which the following information is 
displayed:
*  User configuration filename.
*  Project configuration filename.
*  User interface selection.
*  User preferences filename.
   
Key-in: DIALOG ABOUTWORKSPACE



How to Use Help
---------------

Opens the Help window with the help article displayed that contains 
instructions for using on-line help.

Key-in: HELP HELP



Key-in Browser
--------------

Opens the Key-in Browser settings box, which is used to browse, construct, 
and submit key-ins.

Key-in: ? or DIALOG CMDBROWSE

   List boxes
   Key in
   Tables


List boxes
----------

Each list box corresponds to a keyword level in the hierarchical key-in 
language. The leftmost box contains the keywords in the top level. The 
selected keyword(s) are displayed in the Command Window.



Key in
------

Submits the constructed key-in, if any.



Tables
------

Opens the Command Tables dialog box, which is used to display key-ins from 
any single or all loaded MDL applicables for browsing in the list boxes.

Note:
If the ? character in a key-in to open the settings box is preceded by a 
key-in language keyword(s), the specified keyword(s) are automatically 
selected in the list boxes when the settings box opens.



Command Tables dialog box
-------------------------

Used to display key-ins from any single or all loaded MDL applications for 
browsing in the Key-in Browser settings box. Opens when the Tables button 
in the Key-in Browser settings box is clicked.

   Applications
   All


Applications
------------

Lists MicroStation and all loaded MDL applications.

Double-clicking an application displays that application's key-ins after 
first removing any key-ins already displayed.



All
---

Displays the key-ins of MicroStation and all loaded MDL applications.



On Version
----------

Opens a window in which the following information is displayed:
*  MicroStation version number.
*  Active design file name.
*  Name of attached cell library, if any.
*  MicroStation font library name.
*  Element cache size and usage.
   
Key-in: DIALOG ABOUTUSTN

